Evita v300 Ifu 9052995 en PDF

Instructions for use
Evita V300
WARNING Intensive care ventilator

To properly use this medical device,
read and comply with these SW 2.n
instructions for use.
Typographical conventions
1 Consecutive numbers indicate steps of action,

with the numbering restarting with "1" for each
new sequence of actions.
 Bullet points indicate individual actions or
different options for action.
– Dashes indicate the listing of data, options, or
objects.
(A) Letters in parentheses refer to elements in the
related illustration.
A Letters in illustrations denote elements referred
to in the text.
Any text shown on the screen and any labeling on

the device are printed in bold and italics, for
example, PEEP, Air or Alarms.
The "greater than" symbol > indicates the
navigation path in a dialog window, for example,
System setup > Ventilation > Modes. In this
example, System setup represents the dialog
window title, Ventilation represents a horizontal
tab, and Modes a vertical tab.
Screen images
Schematic renderings of screen images are used,

which may differ in appearance or in configuration
from the actual screen images.
Use of terms
Dräger uses the term "Accessory" not only for

accessories in the sense of IEC 60601-1, but also
for consumable parts, removable parts, and
attached parts.
2 Instructions for use Evita V300 SW 2.n

Trademarks
Trademark Trademark owner Trademark Trademark owner

AutoFlow® Dräger BruTab 6S® Brulin
® ®
Infinity Descogen Antiseptica
QuickSet® Dismozon ® BODE Chemie
ATC® Mikrobac ®
SmartCare® Virkon® DuPont

Medical CockpitTM Perform ® Schülke & Mayr
® ®
DrägerService Mikrozid
MEDIBUS™ Buraton®
MEDIBUS.X® BIPAP1)
®
Sekusept Ecolab 1) Licensed trademark
®
Actichlor
Oxycide® Ecolab USA
Klorsept® Medentech
Safety information definitions
WARNING
A WARNING statement provides important
information about a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, could result
in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
A CAUTION statement provides important
information about a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor
or moderate injury to the user or patient or in
damage to the medical device or other property.
NOTE
A NOTE provides additional information intended
to avoid inconvenience during operation.
Instructions for use Evita V300 SW 2.n 3

Definition of the target groups
For this medical device users, service personnel, Service personnel

and experts are defined as target groups.
These target groups have been instructed in the Service personnel are persons who are responsible
use of the medical device and have the necessary for the maintenance of the medical device towards
knowledge to use, install, reprocess, maintain or the operating organization.
repair the medical device. Service personnel are persons who may install,
Dräger emphasizes that the medical device must reprocess, or maintain the medical device.
be used, installed, reprocessed, maintained or
repaired exclusively by defined target groups.
Experts
Users Experts are persons who may carry out repair or

complex maintenance work on the medical device.
Users are persons who may use the medical device
in accordance with its intended use.
Abbreviations and symbols
For explanations refer to sections "Abbreviations"

and "Symbols" in chapter "System overview".

Contents
Contents
Typographical conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Safety information on getting started. . . . . . . . 74
Safety information definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Switching on Evita V300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Definition of the target groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Selecting a patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Abbreviations and symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Selecting the breathing circuit and the
breathing gas humidifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
For your safety and that of your patients. . . 7
Checking readiness for operation . . . . . . . . . . 80
General safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Selecting the Tube or NIV application mode . 89
Product-specific safety information. . . . . . . . . . 12 Transfer of ventilation settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Selecting the therapy type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Starting the therapy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Intended use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Displaying the status of accessories . . . . . . . . 93
Indications for use and contraindications . . . . . 18
Environment of use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Setting ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 NIV – Non-invasive ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Intensive care ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Displaying curves and measured values . . . . 107
Control and display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Ventilation unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Maneuvers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Trolley 2 - 90 cm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Medication nebulization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
GS500 gas supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Diagnostics – measurement maneuver . . . . . 124
Range of functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 GS500 gas supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 O2 therapy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Ending operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Operating concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Storing Evita V300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Mains power supply / DC power supply . . . . . 135
Control and display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Intrahospital patient transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Selecting and setting parameters and
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Setting ventilation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Display of alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Assembly and preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Displaying information on alarms . . . . . . . . . . 144
Alarm history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Safety information for assembly and
Setting alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Setting the volume of the alarm tone . . . . . . . 148
Preparing the trolley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Suppressing the alarm tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Preparing the Medical Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Position of the user to the alarm system . . . . . 149
Preparing the ventilation unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Failure of the acoustic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Intrahospital transport. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Contents
Trends and data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Safety information on disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Displaying trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Disposal of packaging material . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Displaying data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Disposal of batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Displaying the logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Disposal of flow sensor and neonatal flow
Data export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Disposal of medical devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Information on monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Flow monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
O2 monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Set values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
CO2 monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Displayed measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Displayed calculated values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Information on configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Configuring the screen display . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Operating data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Configuring alarm settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Device ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Configuring the ventilation settings . . . . . . . . . 187 Infinity C300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Importing and exporting configurations . . . . . . 195 Automatic alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Essential performance characteristics. . . . . . . 306
System status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Connections to IT networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Open-source software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Service dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 EMC Declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Alarm – Cause – Remedy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Principles of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Description of the ventilation modes . . . . . . . . 314
Reprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Additional settings for ventilation. . . . . . . . . . . 336
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Special functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Information on reprocessing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Description of the therapy types . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Classifications for reprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Automatic leakage compensation . . . . . . . . . 357
Reprocessing list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Flow reduction Anti Air Shower . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Reprocessing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
After reprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Battery concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Pneumatic functional description . . . . . . . . . . 366
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Main menu bar structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Factory-set screen views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
List of references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Preventive maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Replacing the ambient air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Password for Evita V300 SW 2.n . . . . . . . . . 381
Replacing the diaphragm of the expiratory
valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Information on the password . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Replacing the expiratory valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Preventive maintenance on the GS500 gas
supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Battery maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

For your safety and that of your patients
General safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Strictly follow these instructions for use . . . . . . 8
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Safety checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Not for use in areas of explosion hazard . . . . . 9
Safe connection to other electrical
equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Connected devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Device combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Connection to IT network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Patient safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Patient monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Information on electromagnetic compatibility . . 11
Virus protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Disposable articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Sterile accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Installing accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Storing the instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Training. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Product-specific safety information . . . . . . . 12

Monitoring ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Back-up ventilation with an independent
manual ventilation device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Handling Infinity ID components. . . . . . . . . . . . 15

General safety information
The following WARNING and CAUTION Service

statements apply to general operation of the
medical device.
WARNING
WARNING and CAUTION statements specific to
subsystems or particular features of the medical The medical device must be inspected and
device appear in the respective sections of these serviced regularly by service personnel.
instructions for use or in the instructions for use of Repairs or complex maintenance work carried
another product being used with this device. out on the medical device must be performed
by experts.
Dräger recommends that a service contract is
Strictly follow these instructions for use obtained with DrägerService and that all
repairs are performed by DrägerService.
Dräger recommends that only genuine Dräger
WARNING parts are used for maintenance.
Any use of the medical device requires full If the above are not complied with, the correct
understanding and strict observation of all functioning of the medical device may be
sections of these instructions for use. The compromised.
medical device must only be used for the Observe chapter "Maintenance".
purpose specified under "Intended use"
on page 18 and in conjunction with
appropriate patient monitoring (see page 10). Safety checks
Strictly observe all WARNING and CAUTION
statements throughout these instructions for The medical device must be subject to regular
use and all statements on medical device safety checks. See chapter "Maintenance".
labels. Failure to observe these safety
information statements constitutes a use of
the medical device that is inconsistent with its Accessories
intended use.
WARNING
Only the accessories indicated on the list of
accessories 9053027 (1st edition or higher)
have been tested and approved for use with
the medical device.
Therefore, it is strongly recommended that
only these accessories are used in
conjunction with the medical device.
Otherwise, the correct functioning of the
medical device may be compromised.

Not for use in areas of explosion hazard Device combinations
WARNING This device can be operated in combination with

other Dräger devices or with devices from other
This medical device is neither approved nor
manufacturers. Observe the accompanying
certified for use in areas where combustible or
documents of the individual devices.
explosive gas mixtures are likely to occur.
If a device combination is not approved by Dräger,
the safety and the correct functioning of the
Safe connection to other electrical individual devices can be compromised.
equipment The operating organization must ensure that the
device combination complies with the applicable
editions of the relevant standards for medical
WARNING devices.
Risk of patient injury
Device combinations approved by Dräger meet
Electrical connections to equipment not listed the requirements of the following standards:
in these instructions for use or these – IEC 60601-1, 3rd edition (general requirements
assembly instructions must only be made for safety, device combinations, software-
when approved by each respective controlled functions)
manufacturer. – IEC 60601-1-2 (electromagnetic
compatibility)
– IEC 60601-1-8 (alarm systems)
Connected devices Or:
– IEC 60601-1, 2nd edition (general
WARNING requirements for safety)
Risk of electric shock and of device – IEC 60601-1-1 (device combinations)
malfunction – IEC 60601-1-2 (electromagnetic
compatibility)
Any connected devices or device – IEC 60601-1-4 (software-controlled
combinations not complying with the functions)
requirements mentioned in these instructions – IEC 60601-1-8 (alarm systems)
for use may compromise the correct
functioning of the medical device. Before
operating the medical device, strictly comply
with the instructions for use of all connected
devices or device combinations.

Connection to IT network CAUTION

The connection of the medical device to a network
or later changes in the network can result in Do not make therapeutic decisions based solely
previously unidentified risks for patients, users and on individual measured values and monitoring
third parties. These risks must be identified and parameters.
controlled before putting the medical device into
operation.
Relevant changes to the network include: Patient monitoring
– Configuration changes
– Adding or removing additional equipment The user of the medical device is responsible for
– Update or upgrade of connected devices choosing suitable monitoring that provides
appropriate information about medical device
Risks performance and the patient's condition.
Overloading of the medical device as a result of Patient safety may be achieved by a wide variety of
very high network traffic (e.g., due to "denial of means ranging from electronic surveillance of
service" attacks) could lead to deactivation of the medical device performance and patient condition
interfaces. The service functionality would not then to simple, direct observation of clinical signs.
be available until the medical device has been The responsibility for selecting the best level of
restarted. In rare cases, a warm boot may take patient monitoring lies solely with the user of the
place and may occur repeatedly. medical device.
Patient safety
The design of the medical device, the

accompanying documentation, and the labeling on
the medical device are based on the assumption
that the purchase and the use of the medical device
are restricted to persons familiar with the most
important inherent characteristics of the medical
device. Instructions and WARNING and CAUTION
statements are therefore largely limited to the
specifics of the Dräger medical device.
These instructions for use do not contain
references to various hazards which are obvious to
users or references to the consequences of
medical device misuse, or to potentially adverse
effects in patients with different underlying
diseases. Medical device modification or misuse
can be dangerous.

Information on electromagnetic Disposable articles

compatibility
WARNING
General information on electromagnetic Risk of patient injury as a result of failure of
compatibility (EMC) according to international the accessories
EMC standard IEC 60601-1-2:
Disposable articles were developed, tested
Medical electrical equipment is subject to special and manufactured for single use only. Reuse,
precautionary measures concerning reprocessing or sterilization can lead to a
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) and must be failure of the accessories and cause injuries
installed and put into operation in accordance with to the patient.
the EMC information provided on page 308.
Do not reuse, reprocess, or sterilize
Portable and mobile RF communications disposable articles.
equipment can affect medical electrical equipment.
WARNING
Sterile accessories
Do not connect connectors with an ESD
warning symbol and do not touch the pins of
such connectors without implementing ESD CAUTION
protective measures. Such protective Do not use sterile-packaged accessories if the
measures may include antistatic clothing and packaging has been opened, is damaged, or if
shoes, touching a ground stud before and there are other signs of non-sterility.
during connection of the pins, or using
electrically insulating and antistatic gloves.
All relevant personnel must be instructed in Installing accessories
these ESD protective measures.
CAUTION
WARNING
Install accessories to the basic device in
Do not use portable and mobile HF accordance with the instructions for use of the
communications equipment, e.g., mobile basic device. Make sure that there is a safe
phones, in the vicinity of the medical device. connection to the basic device system.
Maintain separation distances, see page 312.
Strictly observe instructions for use and assembly
instructions.
Virus protection
CAUTION Storing the instructions for use

The Infinity Medical Cockpit does not have virus
protection software and therefore relies on the CAUTION
firewall of the respective institution to prevent The instructions for use must be kept in an
infected files being accessed. When configuring accessible location for users.
IT applications that access web pages, be aware
that they pose a risk of viruses.

Training
Training for users is available via the Dräger

organization responsible (see www.draeger.com).
Product-specific safety information
WARNING WARNING
This medical device is intended to be used Do not use the medical device in hyperbaric
only by trained users. chambers! This may impair correct
functioning of the medical device and
WARNING endanger the patient.
Risk of fire
WARNING
The flow sensor can ignite medications or
Correct functioning of the medical device may
other substances based on highly flammable
be impaired by operation of high-frequency
substances.
electrosurgery units, defibrillators or short-
– Do not nebulize medications or other
wave therapy equipment and endanger the
substances that are easily flammable or
patient.
spray them into the device.
– Do not use substances containing alcohol.
– Do not allow flammable or explosive WARNING
substances to enter the breathing system Risk of malfunction
or the breathing circuit. Unauthorized modifications to the medical
device lead to malfunctions.
WARNING
This medical device must not be modified
Risk of fire unless authorized by the manufacturer.
Do not use the medical device in conjunction
with flammable gases or flammable solutions WARNING
that can mix with air, oxygen or nitrous oxide, Risk of electric shock
or other sources of ignition since the medical
device could ignite. Do not allow the medical Live components are located under the cover.
device to come into contact with sources of Do not open the housing of the medical
ignition. device.
WARNING
Do not use the medical device during
magnetic resonance imaging (MRI, NMR,
NMI)! This may impair correct functioning of
the medical device and endanger the patient.

WARNING WARNING
Risk of fire Risk of patient injury
Do not use the medical device in oxygen- If leakages are present, e.g., with non-invasive
enriched rooms since the medical device ventilation, the actual tidal volume may
could ignite. deviate from the measured values for VTe
Medical device malfunctions can increase and VTi.
the O2 concentration in the ambient air.
Activate leakage compensation and monitor
The medical device is only suitable for use
the measured value for VT. Minimize or
in rooms with sufficient ventilation.
remedy all leakages.
WARNING
WARNING
Do not obstruct the gas inlet for the safety
Risk of failure of flow measurement
valve. Otherwise, spontaneous breathing via
the emergency breathing valve is not possible Deposits that were not removed during
in the event of a device failure. reprocessing can damage the measuring
wires in the flow sensor or cause a fire.
WARNING – Before inserting the flow sensor check for
visible damage, soiling, and particles.
With neonates, the administration of
Repeat this check regularly.
increased O2 concentrations can lead to
retinopathy of prematurity. – Replace flow sensors when damaged,
Use additional monitoring, e.g., external SpO2. soiled, or not particle-free.
WARNING CAUTION
Risk of fire Keep away from sources of heat such as direct
sunlight, heat radiators or spotlights! Otherwise
The use of unapproved O2 pressure reducers the medical device may become too hot.
can lead to excess pressure which can cause
a fire. CAUTION
When supplying the ventilator with oxygen Do not obstruct or close off the vents on the
from a compressed gas cylinder, only use medical device. Air must be able to enter freely.
pressure reducers compliant with ISO 10524. Otherwise the medical device may become too
Slowly open the pressure reducer manually. hot. An alarm is triggered if the medical device
Do not use tools. overheats during operation.
WARNING CAUTION
Risk of unnoticed change in inspiratory O2 Positive-pressure ventilation can lead to negative
concentration effects, such as barotrauma or strain on the
If an additional flow is delivered by an external circulatory system.
flow source, the actual O2 concentration
delivered may deviate from the displayed CAUTION
values. Risk of patient injury
Use additional monitoring, e.g., external SpO2 An additional flow delivered by an external flow
monitoring, if necessary. source can affect the measured values for airway
pressure and flow.

CAUTION Monitoring ventilation

Risk of malfunction
The following parameters are monitored by the
The touch screen has a sensitive surface. built-in monitoring facilities of Evita V300:
Damage to the surface may cause the touch- – Airway pressure
sensitive controls not to work properly. – Expiratory minute volume
Do not operate the screen with sharp objects. – Inspiratory tidal volume
– Respiratory rate
– Apnea alarm time
– Inspiratory O2 concentration
– End-expiratory CO2 concentration
Changes in these parameters may be caused by:
– Acute changes in the patient's condition
– Incorrect settings and faulty handling
– Device malfunctions
– Failure of power and gas supplies
If a fault occurs in this equipment, separate
measuring instruments must be used.
During O2 therapy, the monitoring functions of
the medical device are restricted. See chapter
"O2 therapy" on page 128.
Back-up ventilation with an independent

manual ventilation device
WARNING
If a fault is detected in the medical device, its
life-support functions may no longer be
assured. Ventilation of the patient using an
independent ventilation device must be
started without delay, if necessary with PEEP
and/or an increased inspiratory O2
concentration (e.g., with a manual
resuscitator).

Handling Infinity ID components The RFID system of this medical device complies
with Part 15 of the FCC regulations, and its
Through ownership or purchase of this medical operation is subject to the following conditions:
device equipped with RFID technology, you have 1 This medical device does not cause any
only acquired the right to use the medical device dangerous interference.
and RFID technology in conjunction with products
approved by Dräger and in strict compliance with 2 The medical device is not liable to damage
these instructions for use. No intellectual property caused by the reception of interference,
rights or any rights to the use of the medical device including interference causing undesired
or RFID technology are hereby granted, either operating conditions.
explicitly or implicitly, which are contrary to the Dräger hereby declares that the RFID system in the
above-mentioned conditions. ventilation unit is in compliance with the basic
requirements and the other pertinent regulations
WARNING
of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Although Evita V300 does not exceed the
applicable limiting values for electromagnetic
fields, radiation can interfere with the
functioning of pacemakers. Wearers of
pacemakers must keep a distance of at least
25 cm (10 in) between the pacemaker and
Evita V300.
Emission of high-frequency energy

This medical device is equipped with an RFID
(Radio Frequency Identification) system to enable
wireless communication with Infinity ID
accessories. Any changes or modifications to the
RFID system may only be carried out by experts.
Otherwise this may compromise patient safety.
This medical device has been designed and
manufactured to comply with emission limit values
for high-frequency energy. These limiting values
are incorporated in international safety standards
such as IEC 60601-1-2 (EN 60601-1-2) which have
been defined by regulation authorities, such as the
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC Rules), Industry Canada (Radio Standards
Specifications) and the European
Telecommunications Standards Institute
(ETSI standards).

This page has been left blank intentionally.

Application
Application
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Indications for use and contraindications . . 18
Environment of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Application
Intended use
Evita V300 intensive care ventilator is intended for

the ventilation of adults, pediatric patients, and
neonates. Evita V300 provides mandatory
ventilation modes and ventilation modes for
supporting spontaneous breathing and also airway
monitoring. Evita V300 is intended for use in
different medical care areas.
Indications for use and contraindications
Indications It is the responsibility of the user to select the

appropriate respiratory mode for the underlying
Evita V300 is used for treating patients who require
disease of the patient. For all ventilator settings, the
temporary or longer term respiratory support for
user needs to consider the respiratory status and
different medical reasons.
the general state of health of the patient in order to
optimally adapt the ventilation settings to the
Contraindications patient's condition. Any changes to the patient's
state need to be monitored continuously.
There are no additional contraindications apart
from the contraindications contained in chapter
"For your safety and that of your patients".
Environment of use
Evita V300 is intended for stationary use in – In rooms without sufficient ventilation
hospitals and medical rooms or for patient
Do not operate the device with helium or helium
transportation within the hospital.
mixtures.
Do not use the device in the following
environments:
– In hyperbaric chambers
– For magnetic resonance imaging (MRI, NMR,
NMI)
– In conjunction with flammable gases or
flammable solutions that can mix with air,
oxygen or nitrous oxide
– In areas of explosion hazard
– In areas with combustible or explosive
substances

System overview
System overview
Intensive care ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Control and display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Ventilation unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Left side view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Right side view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Trolley 2 - 90 cm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
GS500 gas supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Range of functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Ventilation functions of Evita V300 . . . . . . . . . . 27
Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Gas supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Data transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Medication nebulizer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Attaching accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

System overview
Intensive care ventilator
E
001_V300
A Infinity C300 – Control and display unit (Medical

Cockpit)
B Ventilation unit
C GS500 – Gas supply unit
D PS500 – Power supply unit
E Trolley 2 - 90 cm – Trolley
The intensive care ventilator may include additional
accessories, see separate list of accessories.

System overview
Control and display unit
Front
H G F E D C 501
A Alarm bar I LED indicating the operating status

B Touch screen
C key (Audio paused)
D Rotary knob
E LED indicating battery operation
F LED indicating mains power operation
G key for switching the device on and off
H Ambient brightness sensor

System overview
Rear
F E D C
502
A Alarm bar
B USB port
C Serial RS232 port (COM port)
D DVI port
E USB ports
F LAN port

System overview
Ventilation unit
Front panel Front view, flap folded upwards
Front view, flap closed
A
B G
H
F I
C
D J
E
071
G Infinity ID flow sensor
070
In the Neo. patient category: Muffler

A Operation display of ventilation H Gas outlet Exhaust, non-tapered connection
During ventilation, the inspiratory and (EXHAUST – NOT FOR SPIROMETER)
expiratory phases are indicated by a bar I Connections for future extensions
display. The measured values for minute
volume MVe and the inspiratory O2 J Nebulizer port (nebulizer gas outlet for
concentration FiO2 are also displayed. pneumatic medication nebulizer)
B Infinity ID expiratory valve with expiratory port

In the Neo. patient category: Infinity ID neonatal
expiratory valve with expiratory port
Exp. (GAS RETURN)
C Inspiratory unit (safety valve with inspiratory
port) Insp. (GAS OUTPUT)
D Gas inlet for the Emergency air intake safety
valve, non-tapered connection, do not obstruct
(EMERGENCY AIR INTAKE)
E Water trap
F Flap

System overview
Rear Left side view
A
B A
C B
C
D D
E E
F F
G G
004
005
A Fuse for the batteries
A Connection for system cable to Infinity C300 V1
B Connection for the neonatal flow sensor V5
B Connections for future extensions V2, V3
C Connections for future extensions V6, V8
C Connection for nurse call V4
D Connection for CO2 sensor V7
D Toggle switch
E Potential equalization pin
E Ambient air filter with cover
F Fuse for mains power supply F1, F2
F Strain relief for cable
G Connection for mains power supply
G Left device flap

System overview
Right side view A Connection for data cable to the GS500 gas
supply unit V9
A B Connection for gas connection to the GS500

gas supply unit
C Connection for Air compressed gas hose Air
B (FRESH GAS)
C D Connection for O2 compressed gas hose O2
(FRESH GAS)
D E Right device flap
E
014
Trolley 2 - 90 cm
A Mount for Infinity C300
A B Handle
C Trolley column
B D Hose hooks
E Alignment aid
C F Humidifier holder, can be swiveled
D
G Universal holder with standard rail
E
H Double castors with locking brake, set of 4
F
D
G
H
038

System overview
GS500 gas supply unit
Back panel
C C
A
B
C C
330
A Rating plate
B Gas connection
C Screws (to hold the side panels in place)

System overview
Range of functions
The functions described correspond to the overall – Diagnostics – measurement maneuver

functionality of Evita V300. Some functions are only – Intrinsic PEEP measurement
optional and may not be included in the individual – Occlusion pressure measurement
device configuration. Optional functions are shown – NIF measurement
in the separate list of accessories.
Therapy types:
– Invasive ventilation (Tube)
– O2 Therapy
Ventilation functions of Evita V300 – Non-invasive ventilation (NIV)
Ventilation modes:
– Volume-controlled ventilation: Additional information
– VC-SIMV For a detailed description of the ventilation modes
– VC-AC and the additional settings see page 314.
– VC-CMV Abbreviations see page 29.
– VC-MMV
– Pressure-controlled ventilation:
– PC-SIMV
Monitoring
– PC-BIPAP
– PC-AC
Patient monitoring is supported by the following
– PC-CMV
alarm limit settings:
– PC-APRV
– Maximum airway pressure Paw
– PC-PSV
– Expiratory minute volume MVe
– Support of spontaneous breathing:
– Inspiratory tidal volume VTi or VT
– SPN-CPAP/PS
– Apnea alarm time Tapn
– SPN-CPAP/VS
– Spontaneous respiratory rate RRspon
– SPN-PPS
– End-expiratory CO2 concentration etCO2
Additional settings for ventilation:
The inspiratory O2 concentration is monitored by
– Apnea Ventilation
automatically set limits.
– Flow trigger
– Inspiratory termination Evita V300 offers the following displays:
– Sigh – Curves
– AutoFlow – Graphic trends
– Volume Guarantee – Numeric trends
– ATC – Loops
– AutoRelease – Alarm history
– SmartCare/PS – Logbook
– Numeric parameters
Special functions:
– Preconfigured lists for measured values and set
– Maneuvers:
values
– Manual inspiration/hold
– Customized lists for measured values and set
– Exp. hold
values
– Suction maneuver
– Smart Pulmonary View
– Manual disconnection
– Medication nebulization

System overview
During non-invasive ventilation and O2 therapy, Attaching accessories

certain monitoring functions are switched off or can
be switched off. Accessories can be attached to the following
holders:
– Universal holder with standard rail (G93140)
Power supply – Humidifier holder, can be swiveled (G93111)
– Humidifier holder for the lateral standard rail
Evita V300 is designed for connection to the (8416325)
hospital's mains power supply of 100 to 240 V
Observe the permitted maximum distance to the
at 50/60 Hz.
trolley and the permitted maximum load, see
If mains power fails, operation is maintained either "Maximum loads of holders" on page 52.
via the internal battery of Evita V300 or via the
PS500 power supply unit.
Gas supply
Evita V300 features country-specific connections

for the gas supply with oxygen and medical
compressed air.
The Evita V300 may also be equipped with the
GS500 external gas supply unit. GS500 supplies
Evita V300 with compressed air.
Data transfer
A variety of interfaces can be used for transferring

data:
– USB port for data export and configuration
exchange using a USB storage medium
– USB port for installation of optional applications
via a SIM card reader and a SIM card
– RS232 port on Infinity C300 for data transfer
using the MEDIBUS or MEDIBUS.X protocol
Medication nebulizer
For medication nebulization a pneumatic

medication nebulizer can be connected.

System overview
Abbreviations
Abbreviation Explanation Abbreviation Explanation

% leak Leakage in percent CISPR Comité International Spécial des
%MVspon Spontaneous breathing portion of Perturbations Radioélectriques,
minute volume in percent International Special Committee
for Radio Interference
%PEF Percentage of the peak expiratory
flow cmH2O Unit of measurement for pressure
1 cmH2O = approx. 1 mbar
%PIF Percentage of the peak inspiratory
flow CO2 slope Increase of measured CO2 value
in phase III of the capnogram
Adult Adult patient category
Compens. Degree of tube compensation
Ah Ampere hours (output
specification for batteries) COPD Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary
Disease
Air Connection for Air compressed
gas hose (FRESH GAS) Cycles sigh Number of cycles during a sigh
phase (set value)
ALARM Acknowledging an alarm message
RESET that is no longer active ("Reset") DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol
Apnea Vent. Apnea ventilation
intPEEP Additional intermittent PEEP for
APRV Airway Pressure Release sigh (set value)
Ventilation
Psupp Pressure support relative (above
ATC Automatic Tube Compensation, PEEP) (set value)
compensation of the tube
resistance DSSS Direct-Sequence Spread
Spectrum
Audio paused Suppress acoustic alarm for
2 minutes with key DVI Digital Visual Interface
Special function for automatic E Elastance

optimization of inspiratory flow EIP End Inspiratory Pressure
BF Insulation class Body Floating EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
BTPS Body Temperature Pressure Emergency air Safety air inlet, inspiratory relief
Saturated, measured values intake valve (EMERGENCY AIR
based on the condition of the INTAKE)
patient's lungs, body temperature ESD Electrostatic Discharge
37 °C (98.6 °F), water vapor-
saturated gas, ambient pressure ET Endotracheal tube
and mean airway pressure etCO2 End-expiratory CO2 concentration
C Compliance ETSI European Telecommunications
C20/Cdyn Index of the last 20 % of Standards Institute
compliance in relation to the Exhaust Gas outlet (EXHAUST – NOT
dynamic total compliance FOR SPIROMETER)
Cdyn Dynamic compliance

System overview

Exp. Label on the device, Expiratory Insp. term. Termination criterion in % from the
port (GAS RETURN) peak inspiratory flow
Exp. Expiration Interval sigh Time between two sigh phases
Exp. term. Termination criterion in % from the (set value)
peak expiratory flow IP21 Degree of protection against
FCC Federal Communications ingress of liquids and particles
Commission, regulatory authority LAN Local Area Network
for communications devices in the mbar Millibar, unit of measurement for
U.S. pressure
FHSS Frequency-Hopping Spread 1 mbar = approx. 1 cmH2O
Spectrum MEDIBUS Dräger communication protocol
FiO2 Inspiratory O2 concentration (set for medical devices
value) MEDIBUS.X Dräger communication protocol
Flow Flow (set value) for medical devices with a data
Flow Assist Flow support in SPN-PPS (set definition which is standardized
value) across all devices
Flow max Maximum inspiratory flow during mmHg Unit of measurement for end-
NIV (Neo. patient category) expiratory CO2 concentration
Flow trigger Trigger threshold, sensitivity (set More... Show more alarms
value) MRI Magnetic resonance imaging
FRC Functional Residual Capacity MV Minute volume, leakage-corrected
GS500 Gas supply unit MV delay Duration of alarm suppression for
HME Heat Moisture Exchanger MV high and MV low
hPa Hectopascal, unit of measurement MV high Upper alarm limit for minute
for pressure volume
1 hPa = 1 mbar = approx. MV low Lower alarm limit for minute
1 cmH2O volume
I:E Ratio of inspiratory time to MVapn Minute volume during apnea
expiratory time (set value) ventilation
I:Espon I:E during spontaneous breathing MVe Expiratory minute volume, overall,
IEC/CEI Alarm tone in accordance with not leakage-corrected
IEC 60601-1-8 MVemand Mandatory expiratory minute
incl. PEEP Externally applied PEEP, is volume
contained in the intrinsic PEEP MVespon Spontaneous expiratory minute
Insp. Label on the device, Inspiratory volume
port (GAS OUTPUT) MVi Inspiratory minute volume, overall,
Insp. Inspiration not leakage-corrected
Insp. flow Inspiratory flow MVleak Leakage minute volume

Neo. Neonates patient category

System overview

NIF Negative Inspiratory Force, PC-PSV Pressure Control-Pressure
maximum inspiratory effort Support Ventilation, spontaneous
NiMH Nickel-metal hydride (battery breathing at continuous positive
technology) pressure level with pressure
support and back-up respiratory
NIV Non-Invasive Ventilation rate
NMI Nuclear magnetic imaging PC-SIMV Pressure Control-Synchronized
NMR Nuclear magnetic resonance Intermittent Mandatory Ventilation,
intermittent, triggered, pressure-
NO Nitric oxide
controlled ventilation
NTPD Normal Temperature Pressure
Ped. pat. Pediatric patient category
Dry, 20 °C (68 °F), 1013 hPa, dry
PEEP Positive end-expiratory pressure
O2 Connection for O2 compressed
gas hose (FRESH GAS) PEEPi Intrinsic PEEP
O2 suction Suction maneuver Phigh Upper pressure level in APRV (set
value)
P0.1 100 ms occlusion pressure
Pinsp Inspiratory pressure (set value)
Palv Alveolar pressure
PIP Peak Inspiratory Pressure
Paw Airway pressure
Plow Lower pressure level in APRV (set
Paw high Upper alarm limit for airway
value)
pressure
PmanInsp Pressure of the breath for manual
PC-AC Pressure Control-Assist Control,
inspiration during NIV (Neo.
assisted-controlled, pressure-
patient category, SPN-CPAP
controlled ventilation with back-up
ventilation mode)
respiratory rate
Pmax Maximum allowed airway
PC-APRV Pressure Control-Airway Pressure
pressure (set value)
Release Ventilation, spontaneous
breathing under continuous Pmax/Paw Linking the maximum airway
positive airway pressure with brief high autoset pressure to the alarm limit Paw
pressure releases high
PC-BIPAP Pressure Control-Biphasic Pmean Mean airway pressure
Positive Airway Pressure, Pmin Minimum airway pressure
spontaneous breathing under
continuous positive airway Pplat Airway pressure on the plateau
pressure with 2 different pressure PS Pressure Support
levels PS500 Power supply unit
PC-CMV Pressure Control-Continuous Psupp Pressure support absolute
Mandatory Ventilation, continuous
pressure-controlled ventilation Ptrach Pressure in the trachea
R Total resistance
r² Correlation coefficient for the
calculation method "Least Mean
Square" for R, C and TC

System overview

REF Material and revision number of SPN- Spontaneous-Continuous Positive
the medical device CPAP/VS Airway Pressure/Volume Support,
RF Radio Frequency spontaneous breathing with
continuous positive pressure level
RFID Radio Frequency Identification with or without volume support
Rpat Patient resistance, patient airway SPN-PPS Spontaneous-Proportional
resistance Pressure Support, spontaneous
RR Respiratory rate (set value) breathing with flow-proportional
and volume-proportional pressure
RR high Upper alarm limit for respiratory
support
rate
SpO2 Partial O2 saturation
RRapn Respiratory rate of apnea
ventilation (set value) STPD Standard Temperature Pressure
Dry, 0 °C (32 °F), 1013 hPa, dry
RRmand Mandatory portion of respiratory
rate Tapn Apnea alarm time (set value)
RRspon Spontaneous breathing portion of TC Time constant tau
respiratory rate TCe Time constant calculated from VTe
RRtrig Portion of mandatory triggered and the peak expiratory flow
breaths Tdisconnect Time for disconnection alarm (set
RSB Rapid Shallow Breathing, quotient value)
of spontaneous respiratory rate Te Expiratory time (set value)
and tidal volume
Te RC Expiratory time based on the
SIM Subscriber Identity Module, resistance and compliance
participant identification measurements
Slope Pressure rise time (set value) TGI Tracheal Gas Insufflation,
Smart Graphic display of lung tracheal gas insufflation
Pulmonary characteristics (Lung display) Thigh Time of upper pressure level in
View APRV (set value)
SN Device serial number Ti Inspiratory time (set value)
SPN-CPAP Spontaneous-Continuous Positive Ti RC Inspiratory time based on the
Airway Pressure, spontaneous resistance and compliance
breathing with continuous positive measurements
pressure level
Timax Maximum inspiratory time for flow
SPN- Spontaneous-Continuous Positive during pressure or volume support
CPAP/PS Airway Pressure/Pressure (set value)
Support, spontaneous breathing
with continuous positive pressure Tispon Inspiratory time during
level with or without pressure spontaneous breathing
support Tisupp Inspiratory time during pressure
support
Tlow Time of lower pressure level in
APRV

System overview

Tlow max Maximum expiratory time during Vol. Assist Volume support in
APRV (set value) SPN-PPS (set value)
TmanInsp Duration of the breath for manual VRLA Valve-regulated lead-acid (battery
inspiration during NIV (patient technology)
category Neo., ventilation mode VS Volume Support
SPN-CPAP)
VT Tidal volume, leakage-corrected
Tplat Time of inspiratory plateau
VT high Upper alarm limit for the
Trach. Tracheostomy tube inspiratory tidal volume
Tube Ø Inner diameter of tube (set value) VT low Lower alarm limit for the
TVS Transfer of Ventilaton Settings inspiratory tidal volume
UMDNS Universal Medical Device VTapn Tidal volume of apnea ventilation
Nomenclature System, (set value)
nomenclature for medical devices VTCO2 Amount of CO2 expired per breath
UN Rated voltage VTe Expiratory tidal volume, not
USB Universal Serial Bus, serial bus leakage-corrected
system VTemand Expiratory tidal volume during a
VC-AC Volume Control-Assist Control, mandatory breath
assisted-controlled, volume- VTespon Expiratory tidal volume during a
controlled ventilation with fixed spontaneous breath
inspiratory flow and backup
respiratory rate VTi Inspiratory tidal volume, not
leakage-corrected
VC-CMV Volume Control-Continuous
Mandatory Ventilation, continuous VTimand Inspiratory tidal volume during a
volume-controlled ventilation mandatory breath
VC-MMV Volume Control-Mandatory Minute VTispon Inspiratory tidal volume during a
Volume Ventilation, volume- spontaneous breath
controlled ventilation to ensure VTmand Tidal volume during a mandatory
minimum minute ventilation breath
V'CO2 Amount of CO2 expired per minute Vtrap Volume trapped in the lungs by
VC-SIMV Volume Control-Synchronized intrinsic PEEP, and not exhaled
Intermittent Mandatory Ventilation, during subsequent expiration
intermittent, triggered, volume- VTspon Tidal volume during a
controlled ventilation spontaneous breath
Vds Serial dead space, serial dead
space volume up to the CO2
cuvette
Vds/VTe Ratio of dead space volume to
expiratory tidal volume
VG Volume Guarantee, Volume
Guarantee

System overview
Symbols
Symbol Explanation Symbol Explanation

Temporarily suppress acoustic Batteries defective or no
alarm (Audio paused) information available on their
Group Views, screen displays charge state
Lower alarm limit
Group Trends/Data, information
on the course of ventilation Upper alarm limit
Group Special maneuvers Setting or access locked
Group Alarms Expiratory valve locked
Group Therapy, ventilation Setting or access unlocked
parameter settings
Expiratory valve unlocked
Group configuration, system
Exhaust Gas outlet (EXHAUST – NOT
settings, and settings for sensors
FOR SPIROMETER)
Group Start/Standby
Adult patient category (Adult)
Switch system on or off (at the key Pediatric patient category
on Infinity C300) (Ped. pat.)
Alarm limit off Neonates patient category (Neo.)
Configure trends Display additional information or
open Help
Save screen display
Hide additional information or
1 2 3 View 1 close Help
Scroll back in tables or lists
1 2 3 View 2
Scroll forward in tables or lists
1 2 3 View 3
Scroll forward in Help
Medication nebulizer
Scroll backward in Help
Charge state of batteries
90 to 100 % Close dialog window
Charge state of batteries Active test in the device check
60 to <90 %
Charge state of batteries Spontaneous breathing activity by
40 to <60 % the patient
Charge state of batteries NIV, non-invasive ventilation

20 to <40 %
Mains power supply (AC voltage)
Charge state of batteries <20 %
Power supply from batteries

System overview
Symbol Explanation Symbol Explanation

Caution: Observe important safety Serial interface (on Infinity C300)
information and precautions in the
LAN port (on Infinity C300)
Observe the instructions for use USB port (on Infinity C300)
DVI port (on Infinity C300)
Connection for potential
equalization Attention!
Protective earth
Warning! Strictly follow
Application part type BF
Label regarding intrahospital
Nurse call transport
Marking point on the trolley –

do not lean, press, push or pull
Nominal weight and maximum
against the trolley above the
nom. 58 kg (128 lbs) weight (for information, see
marking points max. 133 kg (293 lbs) chapter "Technical data")
ESD warning symbol
Temperature limitation during
storage
ESD warning symbol
Ambient pressure
Information on disposal
Relative humidity
Manufacturer
Use by
20XX Date of manufacture
Keep dry
Connection for the neonatal flow
sensor
Device ready for switch-on (only
the following symbol is used in the
instructions for use:
Device switched off (only the
following symbol is used in the
instructions for use:
Labeling for FCC approval
Labeling in accordance with
Directive 93/42/EEC concerning
medical products
Labeling in accordance with
Directive 1999/5/EC on radio
equipment and
telecommunications terminal
equipment


Operating concept
Operating concept
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Main screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Monitoring area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Main menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Dialog windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Therapy bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Therapy controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Color concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Day and night mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Calibrating the touch screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Selecting and setting parameters and

functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Selecting a control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Selecting a control and changing the setting . . 45
Canceling a setting or a change process . . . . . 46
Setting ventilation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Setting the ventilation parameters . . . . . . . . . . 46
Exceeding the set limit of a ventilation
parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Direct setting of ventilation parameters
(QuickSet). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Linked setting of ventilation parameters . . . . . . 47

Operating concept
Control and display unit
Infinity C300 is the central operating and display Rotary knob

unit.
The rotary knob is used to select and confirm
settings.
Rotating the rotary knob clockwise:
A – Increases a numeric value
– Scrolls down in a list
– Scrolls to the right during horizontal navigation
B Rotating the rotary knob counterclockwise:

– Decreases a numeric value
– Scrolls up in a list
– Scrolls to the left during horizontal navigation
Pressing the rotary knob:
C – Confirms the selected setting
F E D If the background lighting of the rotary knob is
510
yellow, an action must be confirmed by pressing the

A Alarm bar rotary knob.
B Screen
C key (Audio paused) key
D Rotary knob This key is used to switch Evita V300 on or off.

The LED in the key lights up when Evita V300 is
E key switched on.
F Ambient brightness sensor For additional information on switching on, see
"Switching on Evita V300" on page 74.
Alarm bar For additional information on switching off, see
The alarm bar (A) on the front and rear flashes "Ending operation" on page 133.
briefly during system startup as an indicator that the
alarm system is functioning properly. Ambient brightness sensor
In the event of an alarm, the alarm bar flashes: The ambient light sensor can automatically adjust
– Red for high-priority alarm messages the brightness of the screen to the brightness of the
– Yellow for medium-priority alarm messages surroundings. The function can be activated or
deactivated, see "Adjusting screen brightness"
key (Audio paused) on page 177.
Pressing this key pauses all acoustic alarm signals

for 2 minutes. For additional information, see
"Suppressing the alarm tone" on page 149.

Operating concept
LED displays
I
G H
511
LED Color and status of LED Description

G Mains power supply Does not light up No mains power available
Lights up green Mains power available
H Battery operation Does not light up No battery available
Lights up green Charge state of battery >80 %
Lights up yellow Charge state of battery 80 %
Flashes yellow Fault
I Operating status Does not light up System is turned off
Lights up green System is turned on

Operating concept
Screen
This chapter describes: D Therapy bar with the therapy controls for the
– Main screen ventilation parameters of the active ventilation
– Monitoring area mode, see page 43.
– Main menu bar
The main screen can be configured for direct
– Dialogs windows
access as a Main screen button in the main menu
– Therapy line
bar. See "Assigning functions to additional buttons"
– Therapy controls
on page 181.
– Color concept
– Day and night mode
– Touch screen, calibrating
Monitoring area
The view of the monitoring area can be adjusted for

Main screen
the user and saved as a screen view.
– Changing the display of the monitoring area,
The main screen displays the most important
see page 107.
ventilation information at a glance.
– Configuring the screen view, see page 178.
A
Curve field
1 2 3
Curves, loops, and trends can be displayed in the

curve field, see page 108.
B C
Parameter fields
The parameter fields display the parameters with
their measured values, their units, and, if
applicable, the alarm limits. Changing the display of
078_V300
D the parameter fields, see page 108.

A Header bar with the following fields:
– Patient category, see page 76 Scroll bars
– System data, e.g., state of charge of the
batteries, see page 136
– Therapy status: Therapy type (ventilation or
O2 Therapy), ventilation mode and
additional settings
– Alarms, messages and instructions for the
F E E F
user, see page 142
521
– Alarm status Additional areas can be displayed in lists using

B Monitoring area with curve field and parameter horizontal and vertical scroll bars:
fields E Buttons with a single arrow show the next or
C Main menu bar with buttons for opening dialog previous column or row.
windows and activating functions, see page 41.

Operating concept
F Buttons with two arrows show the next or D Sensors/ Parameters... for calibrating the
previous page. sensors and for activating or deactivating
monitoring, see page 159.
E System setup... for configuring the device
Main menu bar functions, see page 175.
The main menu bar contains fixed assigned and F Configurable Help button, factory setting which
configurable buttons. The buttons are assigned to can be assigned according to user
various groups. Touching a button opens the specifications, see page 181.
corresponding dialog window or activates the G Trends/Data... for displaying all the measured
corresponding function. Touching the group symbol and set values, logbook, trends and for
opens the associated quick access bar. exporting data, see page 151.
H Special maneuvers... for selecting additional
Fixed assigned buttons functions, e.g., suction maneuver,
see page 113, or medication nebulization,
A see page 116.
1 2 3 I Start/ Standby... for selecting standby mode or
B starting therapy, see page 131.
C Configurable buttons
D A maximum of two additional buttons for directly

accessing functions or dialogs can be configured.
These buttons are spatially assigned to the
E corresponding group. See "Assigning functions to
additional buttons" on page 181.
F
I
100_V300
A Alarms... for setting the alarm limits and

displaying the alarm logbook and listing all
active alarms, see page 142.
B Views... for switching to other configured
monitoring area views, see page 107.
C Ventilation settings... for setting the ventilation
mode and the ventilation parameters,
see page 96.

Operating concept
Quick access bar Group Additional buttons

The quick access bar (A) contains additional Man. insp./hold
buttons for direct access to functions or dialogs. A
specific quick access bar is assigned to each group Exp. hold
(B). Touching the corresponding group symbol (B) Manual disconnection
in the main menu bar opens the associated quick Nebulization
access bar.
P0.1
PEEPi
1 2 3
NIF
A
364_V300
The table shows the groups with the associated

buttons.
Group Additional buttons

Alarm volume
Day/Night
Trigger
Apnea Ventilation
Neonatal flow sensor
Flow sensor
O2 sensor
CO2 sensor
Applications
Help...
Trends table
Values
Logbook

Operating concept
Dialog windows Therapy controls
Dialog windows consist of one or several pages The therapy controls (A) are used to set the
which are displayed by touching the corresponding ventilation parameters.
horizontal or vertical tab. Dialog windows contain
Therapy controls are contained in the therapy bar of
elements for operating the device and informing the
the active ventilation mode and in the dialog
user on current settings. Dialog windows can be
window for the ventilation settings.
opened by touching a button in the main menu bar.
Ventilation settings
A D
B E F
C
B A
083
171
A Dialog window title

Start-up settings
B Tab to open a page
Arrows beside the scales on the therapy controls
C Opened page of the dialog window indicate the start-up values valid when Evita V300
D Message field for dialog-specific information is switched on. These start-up values can be
and instructions adjusted specifically as required by the hospital.
See "Configuring start-up settings for the ventilation
E Button for accessing additional information and parameters" on page 190.
the Help function (if available)
F Button for closing the dialog window Locking mechanism
The therapy controls in the therapy bar can be
locked against the ventilation parameters being
Therapy bar
changed by accident. See "Locking therapy
controls in the therapy bar" on page 183.
The therapy bar on the main screen contains the
therapy controls for the active ventilation mode.
A B
C
D
078
A Name of active ventilation mode

B Message field for specific messages on the
active ventilation mode
C Button for opening the dialog window for the
ventilation settings of the active ventilation
mode
D Therapy controls

Operating concept
Color concept
Colors denote alarms and identify the availability of

functions and controls.
Alarms
Three different colors are used to identify the
priority of an alarm.
Alarm priority Identification

High Red
Medium Yellow
Low Turquoise
For additional information, see "Alarm priorities"

on page 143.
Controls
The following controls are available:
– Tabs
– Therapy controls
– Buttons
The status of the controls and the availability of
functions are identified by colors.
Significance of colors:
Color Status
Dark green The control has been selected and
displays the current selection.
Light green The control is active and can be
selected.
Yellow The control has been selected but
an input or confirmation is required.
Gray The control is not available.

Operating concept
Day and night mode In standby mode:

1 Press and hold the rotary knob and the key
The screen can be used in day or night mode. The simultaneously for at least 15 seconds until the
luminance and the brightness of the screen are Calibrate touch screen dialog is displayed.
reduced in night mode. For additional information,
see "Adjusting illumination and brightness" During operation:
on page 177. 1 Press and hold the rotary knob and the key
simultaneously for at least 30 seconds until the
Calibrate touch screen dialog is displayed.
Calibrating the touch screen
2 Touch the Calibrate button or press the rotary
If there is no response to touching a control, the knob.
touch screen must be calibrated. The calibration screen is displayed.
NOTE 3 Touch the red dots that appear successively on
Curves are not displayed during calibration of the the screen.
screen. Therefore, the screen must not be To end calibration:
calibrated while monitoring a patient.
4 Press green check mark.
Selecting and setting parameters and functions
Parameters or functions are selected and set with Selecting a control and changing the
the following controls: setting
– Tabs
– Therapy controls 1 Touch the control.
– Buttons
The control turns yellow. With therapy controls, the
unit is also displayed. The background light of the
Selecting a control rotary knob is yellow.
2 To make the setting, rotate the rotary knob to
1 Touch the control. the right or to the left.
The control turns yellow. 3 Press the rotary knob to confirm.
2 Press the rotary knob to confirm. The setting is adopted, the control returns to light
The selection is adopted, the control returns to light green or dark green.
green or dark green.
Some buttons are active immediately without
confirmation. The button turns dark green
immediately.

Operating concept
Canceling a setting or a change process  Touch another control.

 Do not press the rotary knob. After 15 seconds
Prerequisite: The control is still yellow the change is discarded.
If a change is not wanted, the former setting can be
retained by performing one of the following steps:
 Touch the control again.
Setting ventilation parameters
This chapter describes: Exceeding the set limit of a ventilation

– Setting the ventilation parameters parameter
– Exceeding the set limit of a ventilation
parameter When a set limit of a parameter has been reached,
– Direct setting of ventilation parameters Evita V300 displays a message.
(QuickSet)
– Linked setting of ventilation parameters  Press the rotary knob to exceed the set limit.
The set limit can be exceeded.
Setting the ventilation parameters If the maximum set limit for a parameter has been
reached, e.g., when it is dependent on other
parameters, it is not possible to exceed the set limit.
 Press the rotary knob. Evita V300 adopts the
maximum possible set value.
128
1 Touch the therapy control. The color turns

yellow. The unit of the parameter to be adjusted
is displayed in parentheses.
2 Turn the rotary knob to set the value.
3 Press the rotary knob to confirm the value. The
color of the therapy control turns dark green.
The following chapters of the instructions for use
provide a simplified explanation of these steps:
"Use the rotary knob to set and confirm the value."

Operating concept
Direct setting of ventilation parameters Linked setting of ventilation parameters

(QuickSet)
The linked setting is possible for PEEP/Pinsp and
When a ventilation parameter is set directly, the for RR/Ti.
changes to a setting become immediately effective
for the patient. The user can immediately see the Linking PEEP/Pinsp
effect the changed setting has on the patient. The
finally chosen setting does not have to be Ventilation settings D
confirmed again.
Ventilation parameters can be set directly in all
ventilation modes and can be carried out in the
dialog window for the ventilation settings. Direct
settings are only possible in the therapy bar when C B A
the therapy controls are not locked.
085
O2 and Flow cannot be set directly. 1 Touch the PEEP (A) or Pinsp (B) therapy
control; the color turns to yellow.
Setting ventilation parameters directly The Link button (C) is displayed.
1 Touch the corresponding therapy control. 2 Touch the Link button (C).
2 Press the rotary knob and hold for The therapy control of the other parameter to be
approximately 3 seconds. linked (Pinsp or PEEP) turns yellow.
The therapy control changes to dark green with a 3 Turn the rotary knob to set the value for PEEP
yellow edge. The direct setting function is now and Pinsp. The other value is also
active. automatically changed so that the difference in
pressure remains constant.
4 Press the rotary knob to confirm the value.
Both therapy controls turn dark green.
Linking RR/Ti
087
Linking RR and Ti is done in the same way as

3 Press and hold the rotary knob and turn to set linking PEEP and Pinsp. The I:E ratio remains
the value. constant. If the respiratory rate is increased, the
inspiratory time is reduced. If the inspiratory time is
The set value is immediately effective.
increased, the respiratory rate is reduced.
Exceeding the set limit of a parameter with

Additional information
direct setting
If a condition is reached in which a parameter
When a set limit of a parameter has been reached,
cannot be changed anymore when setting linked
Evita V300 displays a message.
parameters, Evita V300 displays a corresponding
4 Release rotary knob for a short moment. message in the message field (D).
5 Press the rotary knob again and turn it.
The set limit can be exceeded.


Assembly and preparation
Safety information for assembly and

preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Preparing the trolley. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Safety information on the trolley . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Connecting the universal holder with
standard rail to the trolley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Connecting the humidifier holder to the
trolley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Securing accessories to the standard rail. . . . . 52
Securing the compressed gas cylinders to
the trolley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Preparing the Medical Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Positioning Infinity C300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Positioning Infinity C300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Connecting the system cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Using the MEDIBUS or the MEDIBUS.X
protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
LAN and USB interfaces of Infinity C300 . . . . . 57
Preparing the ventilation unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Preparing the expiratory valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Fitting the flow sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Safety information for the use of HMEs,
bacterial filters, and breathing circuits . . . . . . . 61
Preparing the breathing gas humidifier. . . . . . . 62
Connecting the breathing circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Installing a neonatal flow sensor . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Replacing the neonatal flow sensor insert . . . . 65
Installing a CO2 cuvette and CO2 sensor . . . . . 66
Connecting the mains power supply to
Evita V300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Power supply from batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Failure of the power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Connecting the gas supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Connecting the nurse call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Closing the flaps at the side of the device . . . . 71
Intrahospital transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Safety information for assembly and preparation
WARNING WARNING
Before each use, reprocess the device and all Do not place any containers with liquid on
accessories in accordance with the or above the device! Penetrating liquid may
instructions for use, see "Reprocessing list" cause malfunction of or damage to the device,
on page 251. Observe the hospital hygiene which may endanger the patient.
regulations!
WARNING
WARNING Failure to observe the permitted maximum
Securely mount Evita V300. Check for secure load and weight distribution may result in the
fit. Danger of damage to device or personal device toppling over. Danger of damage to
injury! device or personal injury! Observe the
permitted maximum load and weight
WARNING distribution, see "Maximum load"
on page 298.
Risk of tipping over
Do not tilt the device by more than 5°. CAUTION
When parking the device, lock all the double
castors of the trolley and check that the brakes
are working properly.
Preparing the trolley
Safety information on the trolley CAUTION

Connect all devices securely to the trolley. Check
WARNING for secure fit. Danger of damage to device or
Do not use the trolley in the event of visible personal injury!
damage, e.g., damaged double castors!
Contact DrägerService.
WARNING
Do not lean, press, push or pull against the
trolley above the marking points on the trolley.
The trolley could topple over.

Connecting the universal holder with Connecting the humidifier holder to the
standard rail to the trolley trolley
Attach the universal holder with standard rail to the The humidifier holder is attached to the front of the
front of the trolley. trolley. The humidifier holder can be fastened on
the left or right-hand side of the trolley column. The
Front of the attachment of the humidifier holder on the right-
trolley hand side is shown.
A
Front of the A
trolley C
C B
B
D
049
1 Unscrew the adjusting screw (A) completely.
192
2 Attach the right-hand side of the universal 1 Hold the humidifier holder at the desired height
holder to the right-hand side of the rail (B). on the guide (A) of the trolley column.
Make sure that the catch of the universal holder
2 Turn the clamping screw (B) to the left until the
is completely behind the alignment aid.
base (C) fits into the guide of the trolley column.
3 Align the universal holder (C) horizontally and
3 Turn the clamping screw (B) to the right until the
press the left-hand side of the universal holder
humidifier holder is secured firmly in the guide.
onto the left-hand side of the column.
4 Move the standard rail (D) to the desired
4 Tighten the adjusting screw (A). Make sure that
position.
the catch of the universal holder is completely
behind the alignment aid.
5 Check that the universal holder is fixed
securely.
Adjusting the height of the universal holder

1 Unscrew the adjusting screw (A).
2 Adjust the height of the universal holder (C).
3 Align the universal holder horizontally.
4 Retighten the adjusting screw (A).

Securing accessories to the standard

rail
Maximum loads of holders

The following information applies to the holders:
Holder Position of the holder Maximum Possible Maximum distance

load accessories to the lateral
standard rail
Universal holder On the front of the 10 kg Breathing gas –
with standard rail trolley (22 lb) humidifier,
(G93140) medication nebulizer
Humidifier holder, On the side of the trolley 5 kg Breathing gas –
can be swiveled (11 lb) humidifier
(G93111)
Humidifier holder On the lateral standard 5 kg2) Breathing gas 10 cm (3.9 in)
for the lateral rails of the ventilation (11 lb) humidifier
standard rail unit1)
(8416325)
IACS hinged arm On the lateral standard 1 kg Breathing hoses 100 cm (39.4 in)
(MP00690) rails of the ventilation (2.2 lb)
unit1)
1) Maximum load on the lateral standard rails of the ventilation unit: 5 kg (11 lb) on each lateral standard rail
2) If a hinged arm is attached to the lateral standard rails of the ventilation unit in addition to the humidifier holder (8416325),
the maximum load of 5 kg (11 lb) per lateral standard rail must be observed. The humidifier holder can then only support
4 kg (8.8 lb).
Securing the compressed gas cylinders WARNING

to the trolley Have the height of the upper holder adjusted
to the respective compressed gas cylinders
Only available with the cylinder holder option by service personnel. The height must be
adjusted so that the top half of the
WARNING compressed gas cylinders are secured by the
Securely attach the compressed gas cylinders hook-and-loop strap. Otherwise there is a risk
to the trolley, using both hook-and-loop of the trolley toppling over. Danger of damage
straps. Otherwise there is a risk of the trolley to device or personal injury!
toppling over. Danger of damage to device or
personal injury!

WARNING
The length of the hook-and-loop straps must
match the diameter of the compressed gas
cylinders to ensure that the hook-and-loop
straps can hold the cylinders securely. If
necessary have an appropriate hook-and-loop
strap fitted by service personnel. This is B
essential to ensure that the compressed gas
cylinders are properly secured. A A
Compressed gas cylinders with the following
dimensions can be secured:
B
Diameter: 80 to 176 mm (3.15 to 6.93 in)
A A
Length: 420 to 760 mm (16.54 to 29.92 in)
WARNING
Not every combination of compressed gas
cylinder diameter and length can be secured.
193
When used in combination with a pressure
reducer, the compressed gas cylinder must WARNING
not come into contact with the console of the Position the compressed gas cylinders fitted
trolley. The maximum diameter is 176 mm with pressure reducers in such a way to
(6.93 in) when the base of the compressed gas prevent the pressure reducers from being
cylinder is resting completely on the base damaged during transport. The lower part of
plate of the lower holder or is semi-spherical the trolley is designed to protect against
in shape. collisions. Take particular care when the
compressed gas cylinders being used extend
1 Place the cylinders into the mountings on the
beyond this collision protection.
trolley.
2 Secure each cylinder with 2 hook-and-loop
straps (A).
3 Secure the compressed gas hoses by hanging
them over the hose hooks (B).

Preparing the Medical Cockpit
Positioning Infinity C300 Positioning Infinity C300
Infinity C300 is suitable for positioning on the trolley

Tilting the position of Infinity C300
or on a standard rail.
Infinity C300 can be tilted down and up.
Positioning Infinity C300 on the trolley
A
A
B
011
1 Press and hold the tilt release button (A).
010
1 Hook the Infinity C300 holder (A) into the 2 At the same time, tilt Infinity C300 to the desired
mounting (B) on the trolley. working position.
2 Tighten the locking screw (C). 3 Release the button and make sure that it
engages securely.
3 Make sure that Infinity C300 is securely
attached to the trolley.
Turning Infinity C300
Positioning Infinity C300 on a standard rail Infinity C300 can be turned by a maximum of 180°
counterclockwise or 90° clockwise.
If Infinity C300 is connected to the trolley:
 Turn to the desired working position.
1 Unscrew the locking screw (C).
2 Lift Infinity C300 out of the mounting (B) on the
trolley. Connecting the system cable
3 Hook Infinity C300 into the standard rail.
The system cable is connected to Infinity C300 and
4 Tighten the locking screw. to Evita V300. The system cable is fixed in a clamp.
5 Make sure that Infinity C300 is securely
attached to the standard rail.

Connecting the system cable to Infinity C300 4 Insert the system cable connector (E) into the
socket until the connector audibly clicks into
place.
5 Insert the protective sleeve (C) into the
protective plate (F) at the same time.
6 Turn the protective sleeve (C) by approximately
90° until it clicks into place. The cable is
A secured.
7 Close the left-hand flap.
B Disconnecting the system cable from

Evita V300
357
1 Unscrew the cover from the socket (A). 1 Push the locking mechanism on the connector
(E) backwards and pull out the connector.
2 Insert the system cable connector (B) into the
socket (A). Ensure that the connector is 2 Turn the protective sleeve (C) by approximately
inserted with the correct orientation. 90° and withdraw it from the protective plate (F).
3 Screw the cover back on.

Fixing the system cable in the clamp (G)
Connecting the system cable to Evita V300

1 Open the flap on the left-hand side of
Evita V300.
2 Run the system cable between Evita V300 and H
the handle. G
F
188
1 Open the clamp cover (H).
2 Place the system cable into the clamp. Keep the
D E cable length short between the clamp and
C Evita V300.
3 Close the clamp cover (H) and engage. Ensure
003
that the cover engages securely.

3 Clip the protective sleeve (C) immediately after
the connector (E) onto the system cable (D). Removing the system cable from the clamp
Align the protective sleeve so that the slots of
the protective sleeve are facing downwards and 1 Open the clamp cover.
upwards. 2 Remove the cable from the clamp.
3 Close the clamp cover and engage.

Using the MEDIBUS or the MEDIBUS.X Connecting an external device for using
protocol MEDIBUS or MEDIBUS.X
WARNING
All data transferred via the MEDIBUS interface
are for information only and must not be used
as the sole basis for diagnostic or therapeutic
decisions. The MEDIBUS interface is not
intended for use with a distributed alarm
A
system conforming to IEC 60601-1-8:2012.
MEDIBUS and MEDIBUS.X are software protocols

for transferring data between Evita V300 and an
359_V300
external medical or non-medical device
(e.g., patient monitors or computers for data  Connect an external device to the COM 1
management systems). or the COM 2 (A) interface of Infinity C300.
Use MEDIBUS cable 8416326.
For MEDIBUS: Configuring the interface
"MEDIBUS for V and VN ventilators" (9039527) A description is given in chapter "Configuring

interfaces" on page 202.
"Dräger RS 232 MEDIBUS, Protocol Definition"
(9028258)
For MEDIBUS.X:
"MEDIBUS.X, Rules and Standards for
Implementation" (9052607)
"MEDIBUS.X, Profile Definition for Data
Communication V1.n" (9052608)

LAN and USB interfaces of Infinity C300
B
A B
360_V300
Use of the LAN interface (A) of Infinity C300 is only

permitted for service purposes.
Only connect the following to the USB port (B):
– USB storage medium
– USB SIM card reader
– Aerogen nebulizer
WARNING
Do not simultaneously touch the connectors
of the interfaces and the patient. Risk of
electric shock.
WARNING
Risk of voltage surges and device malfunction
Do not connect a device that has its own
power supply to the USB port, e.g., a printer or
external hard drive.

Preparing the ventilation unit
Preparing the expiratory valve Fitting the Infinity ID neonatal expiratory valve
The expiratory valve must be selected in

accordance with the patient category:
Adult Infinity ID expiratory valve

B
Ped. pat. Infinity ID expiratory valve or
Infinity ID neonatal expiratory
valve
Neo. Infinity ID neonatal expiratory
valve A
329
WARNING 1 Fit the diaphragm (A) onto the edge of the
Only use properly reprocessed expiratory expiratory valve housing. Make sure that the
valves which have been sufficiently dried. diaphragm is fitted properly.
Otherwise the proper functioning of the 2 If the muffler (B) has been removed, fit the
device may be impaired and the patient muffler.
endangered.
Only the Infinity ID expiratory valve is described in
The expiratory valve is mounted and then inserted the following sections. However, the Infinity ID
into the ventilation unit. neonatal expiratory valve is prepared using the
same method.
Fitting the Infinity ID expiratory valve
C
A
072
040
1 Fit the diaphragm (A) onto the edge of the 3 Fit the water trap container (C).
expiratory valve housing. Make sure that the
diaphragm is fitted properly.
2 If the flow sensor sleeve (B) has been removed,
fit the flow sensor sleeve.

Open the flap Fitting the flow sensor

Open the flap (D) before inserting the expiratory
valve. WARNING
Risk of fire
Residual vapors of easily flammable
disinfectants (e.g., alcohols) and deposits that
D were not removed during reprocessing can
ignite when the flow sensor is in use.
– Ensure particle-free cleaning and
disinfection.
– After disinfection, allow the flow sensor to
air for at least 30 minutes.
– Before inserting the flow sensor check for
visible damage and soiling, such as
residual mucus, medication aerosols, and
particles.
006
– Replace flow sensors when damaged,

 Open the flap (D) by lifting the lower edge soiled, or not particle-free.
upwards.
The flow sensor must be selected in accordance
with the patient category:
Inserting the expiratory valve into the
ventilation unit Adult Infinity ID flow sensor
Ped. pat. Infinity ID flow sensor or
neonatal flow sensor
Neo. Neonatal flow sensor
When using a neonatal flow sensor, see "Installing

E a neonatal flow sensor" on page 64.
073
1 Turn the locking ring (E) as far as possible to the

left.
2 Push the expiratory valve into the fitting.
3 Turn the locking ring (E) as far as it will go to the
right until it clicks audibly into place.
4 Check that it is properly secured by gently
pulling on the expiratory valve.

Fitting the Infinity ID flow sensor Closing the flap

Prerequisite: The flap is opened. If the Infinity ID expiratory valve and the Infinity ID
flow sensor or the Infinity ID neonatal expiratory
valve and the muffler are fitted, tilt the flap (D)
downwards.
A
B
074
1 Push the socket (A) all the way to the left.

2 Insert the flow sensor (B) with the plug facing
006
towards the device, into the socket and push it Leave the flap closed during ventilation.
fully into the socket.
C
075
3 Push the flow sensor to the right up to the stop

in the flow sensor sleeve (C) of the Infinity ID
expiratory valve.

Safety information for the use of HMEs, A higher breathing resistance leads to a greater
bacterial filters, and breathing circuits work of breathing and trigger effort. Under
unfavorable conditions, this can lead to an intrinsic
PEEP, which can be recognized by the fact that the
WARNING expiratory flow does not return to "baseline" at the
Increased resistance end of expiration. If the PEEP is unacceptably high,
Medication nebulization and active this is indicated by an alarm. For additional
humidification may increase the resistance of information, see "Automatic alarm limits"
additional components. on page 302.
Check the breathing circuit regularly for signs The breathing resistance in the patient connector
of increased resistance and replace additional cannot be monitored directly by Evita V300.
components if necessary. For this reason:
 Before starting ventilation, determine in standby
CAUTION mode inspiratory and expiratory breathing
Additional components in the breathing circuit resistance in the breathing circuit by means of
such as bacterial filters, HME or CO2 cuvettes the breathing circuit check.
may increase the dead space, compressible  Check the condition of the patient and the
volume, and resistance. device's measured values for volume and
Particular care and monitoring are required when resistance more frequently.
using additional components.  Observe the instructions for use for the HMEs,
Before checking the breathing circuit (see chapter bacterial filters and breathing circuits in use.
"Getting started"), attach all necessary additional
components up to the patient connector. Information on breathing circuits with variable
compliance
Additional components in the breathing circuit can
increase the inspiratory and expiratory breathing Some breathing circuits feature a position-
resistance and exceed standard requirements. dependent compliance. This results in an increased
Examples: Inspiratory and expiratory bacterial variability of hose compliance. Breathing circuits of
filters, HMEs, coaxial hoses. this type can increase the inaccuracy of volume
measurement under certain circumstances.
Evita V300 is designed to minimize the patient's
work of breathing. Operation does therefore not WARNING
require inspiratory or expiratory bacterial filters. When using breathing circuits with variable
The use of bacterial filters or HMEs requires compliance, volume-controlled ventilation is
particular care and monitoring by the user. restricted. After changing the hose length,
Especially during medication nebulization and immediately perform a check of the breathing
humidification, the resistance of the expiratory circuit to ensure that the hose compliance
bacterial filter may increase gradually. values are correct.
Evita V300 detects the changed ventilation

situation and generates the low-priority Volume
measurement inaccurate alarm message.
In these cases, switch to pressure-controlled
ventilation and use independent volume

monitoring. Correct entry of the breathing circuit Connecting the breathing gas humidifier to the
being used prevents Evita V300 from generating an humidifier holder of the trolley
alarm in the case of non-variable breathing circuits.
Preparing the breathing gas humidifier
 Prepare the Fisher & Paykel MR850 breathing

gas humidifier in accordance with the
corresponding instructions for use.
185
CAUTION
Do not use an HME together with a breathing gas  Connect the breathing gas humidifier to the
humidifier! This can lead to an increased humidifier holder of the trolley.
breathing resistance.  Tilt the breathing gas humidifier into the correct
position.
Connecting the Fisher & Paykel MR 850
breathing gas humidifier Attaching the breathing gas humidifier to the
The breathing gas humidifier can be connected in humidifier holder for the lateral standard rail
the following ways: If a compressor is used on the trolley, use the
– on the standard rail of the universal holder humidifier holder for the lateral standard rail. The
– on the humidifier holder of the trolley holder can be connected to the left-hand or right-
– on the humidifier holder for the lateral standard hand side of device.
rail
Connecting the breathing gas humidifier on the B

universal holder with standard rail
D C
194
A 1 Hook the holder on the lateral standard rail (B)

of Evita V300. Position the holder on the
standard rail so that the flap at the side of the
030
unit can still be opened.

 Clamp the breathing gas humidifier to the
standard rail (A) under the ventilation unit and 2 Turn the clamping screw (C) until the holder is
screw firmly into place. fixed securely on the rail.
3 Attach the breathing gas humidifier to the mount
(D).

Additional information CAUTION

For the order numbers of the holder for the Do not reverse the connections for inspiration (B)
breathing gas humidifier, see the list of and expiration (C). Humidification is ineffective if
accessories. the connections are reversed.
3 Turn the inspiratory port and expiratory port in

Connecting the breathing circuit the direction of hoses.
A water trap is required for the
WARNING Fisher & Paykel MR 850 breathing gas humidifier
Do not use antistatic or conductive breathing depending on the breathing circuit used.
hoses. The use of these materials increases 4 If a water trap is required, install the water trap
the risk of electric shock to the patient and of (D) in a vertical position.
fire in an oxygen-enriched environment.
5 Connect the Y-piece (E) to the breathing hoses.
CAUTION 6 Insert the Y-piece or the breathing hoses in the
The sterile packaging of disposable articles must opening of the hinged arm.
only be opened immediately before use.
Otherwise there is a risk of infection. Using the Infinity ID breathing circuit
1 Hang the hinged arm (A) on the lateral standard Evita V300 recognizes the use of an Infinity ID
rail of Evita V300 and tighten the screws. breathing circuit. The message Infinity ID
Depending on the desired position of the device breathing circuit detected. is displayed in the
in relation to the bed, the hinged arm can be header bar.
fitted to either side of Evita V300. The following Infinity ID functions are supported:
– Detection of reversed hoses
– Detection of non-compliance with the settings
for the breathing circuit, patient category or
A C B humidification type
– Automatic configuration of breathing circuit and
humidifier
– Transfer of ventilation settings
Automatic configuration of breathing circuits and
humidifiers, and transfer of ventilation settings are
only supported in standby mode.
E  Fit the Infinity ID breathing hoses in standby
D mode.
057
If accessories without RFID functionality are

2 Connect breathing hoses to the inspiratory port combined with Infinity ID accessories, Infinity ID
(B) and to the expiratory port (C). functions may be restricted or unavailable.
When using breathing hoses for ventilating
neonatal patients, the inspiratory hose is pushed
into the inspiratory port (B). The expiratory hose is
pushed onto the expiratory port (C).

Setting the breathing circuit The following neonatal flow sensors are available:
– Neonatal flow sensor ISO 15 (8411130)
Evita V300 supports the user in selecting the
– Neonatal flow sensor Y-piece (8410185)
breathing circuit on the Start/Standby > Br. circuit/
Humidifier page. If a neonatal flow sensor and HME are used in the
patient categories Neo. or Ped. pat., the HME must
 Set the breathing circuit according to the patient
be installed between the neonatal flow sensor and
category.
the patient connector.
Whenever the breathing hoses or the breathing

Installing a neonatal flow sensor ISO 15
gas humidifier have been changed
(8411130)
 Check the breathing circuit, see "Performing the
breathing circuit check" on page 84.
Transfer of ventilation settings, see page 90.
C
For the order numbers of the breathing circuits and B
the hinged arm, see the list of accessories.
A
300
1 Insert the neonatal flow sensor (A) into the
Installing a neonatal flow sensor
patient connector of the Y-piece (B).
2 Connect plug (C) of the flow sensor cable to the
WARNING
flow sensor.
Risk of fire
Residual vapors of easily flammable Installing a neonatal flow sensor Y-piece
disinfectants (e.g., alcohols) and deposits that (8410185)
were not removed during reprocessing can
disinfection.
E
residual mucus, medication aerosols, and
D
particles.
301

soiled, or not particle-free. 1 Connect Y-piece with integrated neonatal flow
sensor (D) to the breathing hoses.
A neonatal flow sensor must be used for the Neo. 2 Connect plug (E) of the flow sensor cable to the
patient category. flow sensor.
A neonatal flow sensor or the Infinity ID flow sensor
can be used for the Ped. pat. patient category.

Further procedure for both neonatal flow Replacing the neonatal flow sensor
sensors insert
3 Position patient connector of the Y-piece to
point approx. 45° downwards to prevent If Evita V300 displays the alarm message
condensation from forming on the neonatal flow Neonatal flow sensor?, the insert of the neonatal
sensor. flow sensor must be replaced.
4 Run the cables along the breathing hoses to the

device.
G F A C
303
1 Disconnect plug (A) of the flow sensor cable
from the neonatal flow sensor.
2 Gently press the knobs (B) on both sides while
302
pulling the insert (C) out of the flow sensor

5 Insert the connector (F) of the flow sensor cable housing.
into the socket (G) at the rear of Evita V300.
3 Push in new insert (C) until it engages.
4 Connect plug (A) of the flow sensor cable to the
neonatal flow sensor.
For the order numbers of the neonatal flow sensor,
5 Calibrate the neonatal flow sensor,
see the list of accessories.
see page 161.

Installing a CO2 cuvette and CO2 sensor Additional information

"Information on checking the CO2 sensor"
Do not carry out CO2 measurements on premature on page 168.
infants because the CO2 cuvette significantly
increases the dead space. For the order numbers of the accessories for the
"CO2 monitoring" application, see the list of
accessories.
A
054
1 Insert the cuvette (A) into the patient connector

of the Y-piece. The cuvette windows are facing
to the side.
2 Fit the CO2 sensor (B) on the cuvette. The cable
is facing towards the device.
C
D
180
3 Insert the connector (C) of the CO2 sensor into

the socket (D) at the rear of Evita V300.
4 Select the cuvette type, see page 167.

Connecting the mains power supply to 2 Position the power cable (C) in the clamp (D).
Evita V300 Fit the clamp into the housing (E). Tighten the
screw (F) (stress relief).
WARNING
Risk of electric shock and of device failure
F
If the device is connected to a power socket
with incorrect mains voltage or without a
protective ground, the user can be injured and C
the device damaged.
D
Only connect the power cable to power
sockets with a protective ground and the
correct mains voltage. Observe the technical
E
186
data.
 Insert the mains plug into the mains power
socket.
NOTE
The LED on Infinity C300 lights up green.
The mains power socket in use must be freely
accessible during operation.
Checking the toggle switch on Evita V300
The mains voltage must conform to the voltage
range specified on the rating plate (100 V to 240 V, CAUTION
50/60 Hz). Do not press the toggle switch during ventilation.
1 Plug the appliance socket (A) onto the
appliance connector (B). Prerequisite: The flap on the left-hand side of the
device is opened.
B
H
A
G
182
 Check whether the toggle switch (G) is set to

(on).
002
 If the toggle switch is set to (off), set it to

(on).
WARNING
Do not simultaneously touch the connectors
of the interfaces (H) and the patient. Risk of
electric shock.

Power supply from batteries Potential equalization
Charge the batteries completely before initial use. Differences in electrical potential between devices
can be reduced by potential equalization. Potential
If the mains power fails, operation is maintained
equalization does not replace the protective ground
either via the internal battery of Evita V300 or via
connection. During operation, the potential
the PS500 power supply unit.
equalization connections must be readily
accessible and must be removable without tools.
For additional information, see "Mains power Connecting the potential equalization cable
supply / DC power supply" on page 135.
1 Plug one end of the potential equalization cable
fully on to the potential equalization pin on
Evita V300.
Failure of the power supply
2 Connect the other end of the potential
If the mains power fails, operation is maintained via equalization cable to the hospital potential
batteries. equalization socket.
If the mains power fails and the batteries are
discharged, Evita V300 issues a power failure
alarm.
The following data are retained even in the event of
a power supply failure:
– Set values for ventilation
– Alarm limits
– Set values for monitoring
When the power supply is restored, the device
starts automatically with the previous values.

Connecting the gas supply 3 Position the compressed gas hoses over the
hose hooks (C).
WARNING The gas delivered through compressed gas hoses
Do not bring any oxygen supply components is used as fresh gas (FRESH GAS).
into contact with oil and grease. Danger of
explosion through spontaneous ignition! Additional information
For the order numbers of the compressed gas
WARNING
hoses, see the list of accessories.
Only use compressed gases approved for
medical use. The compressed gases must be
free of dust and oil particles and dry. Gas supply from cylinders
Otherwise the proper functioning of the If the central gas supply system fails or is not
device cannot be ensured. available, the gas can be supplied from cylinders.
Central gas supply Additional information

Prerequisite: The flap on the right-hand side of the Air supply from a gas supply unit (GS500), see
device is opened. "GS500 gas supply unit" on page 127.
A
B
C
C
021
1 Screw the Air compressed gas hose to the Air

(A) connection and the O2 compressed gas
hose to the O2 (B) connection of Evita V300.
2 Plug the probes into the wall terminal units of
the central gas supply system.

Connecting the nurse call Connecting the nurse call to the central hospital
alarm system
The nurse call is used for transmitting high-priority  The nurse call cable must be connected to the
alarm messages (warning) to a central hospital lead to the central hospital alarm system by
alarm system. service personnel.
Safety information for using the nurse call

White (NO)
WARNING
Risk of patient injury Brown (COM)
All data transferred via the nurse call are for
information only and must not be used as the Green (NC)
sole basis for diagnostic or therapeutic
029
decisions. The nurse call is not intended for
use with a distributed alarm system As soon as Evita V300 signals an alarm, the
conforming to IEC 60601-1-8:2012. connection between the white cable and the brown
cable (NO and COM) is closed and the nurse call is
CAUTION activated.
A fault in any of the components in the link
between the nurse call and the central hospital Connecting the nurse call to the ventilation unit
alarm system (e.g., in the unit's electronics for
Prerequisite: The flap on the left-hand side of the
nurse call, in the unit's power supply or in the
device is opened.
alarm generator of the central hospital alarm
system) can result in failure of the nurse call.
CAUTION
Connection of a nurse call does not relieve staff of B
their duty to check the monitoring on the device
screen at regular intervals. Screen displays must A
be checked regularly.
CAUTION
All alarms on Evita V300 must be checked
regularly even when the nurse call is connected.
Do not use nurse call as the sole source of alarm
022
information!
1 Plug the nurse call connector (A) into the socket
(B) until it engages audibly.
NOTE
The connector must engage audibly into the
socket to ensure all alarm messages are
transmitted properly.
2 Check the correct operation of connected nurse

call system.

Information on the nurse call Closing the flaps at the side of the device
High-priority alarm messages (warning) are
transmitted to a central hospital alarm system.  Close the lateral flaps of the device after
Medium-priority (caution) and low-priority (note) preparation.
alarm messages are not transmitted.
The nurse call is also activated when the internal
acoustic alarm generator in the device is defective.
If, in the event of an alarm, the key (Audio
paused) is pressed, the acoustic alarm on the
device and the nurse call are suppressed for
2 minutes.
023
For the order number of the nurse call cable, see
the list of accessories.
CAUTION
Keep both lateral flaps on the device closed
during operation to prevent accidental actuation
of the toggle switch or connections becoming
loose.
Intrahospital transport
Transport refers to any movement of the medical  If fitted, slide the bed coupling into its retracted
device without the patient that does not serve to position.
position the medical device.
 Grasp the trolley handle firmly and push the
device in longitudinal direction.
Increasing the tipping stability
The safety information regarding intrahospital
 Swivel the control and display unit (Medical patient transport also applies, see chapter
Cockpit) until it is centrally aligned with the "Intrahospital patient transport" on page 138.
ventilation unit.
 Set the hinged arms to minimum extension.
 Drain the water container of the breathing gas
humidifier.
 Secure the breathing gas humidifier to the
trolley, not to the lateral standard rails of the
ventilation unit.
 Do not attach any additional parts to the lateral
standard rails of the ventilation unit.


Getting started
Getting started
Safety information on getting started. . . . . . 74
Switching on Evita V300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Selecting a patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Using the settings of the previous patient. . . . . 75
Admitting a new patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Selecting the breathing circuit and the

breathing gas humidifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Checking readiness for operation . . . . . . . . 80

Safety information on the system check. . . . . . 80
Starting the system check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Performing the device check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Performing the breathing circuit check . . . . . . . 84
Checking the switch-over to battery
operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Checking the alarm signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Checking alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Test of the acoustic alarm system . . . . . . . . . . 88
Selecting the Tube or NIV application

mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Setting parameters for the tube . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Transfer of ventilation settings . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Selecting the therapy type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Starting the therapy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Displaying the status of accessories . . . . . . 93

Getting started
Safety information on getting started
WARNING CAUTION
Ventilation does not take place in standby Condensation may form when the device is
mode! The device must only be set to standby moved from a cold storage location to a warm
mode when no patient is connected to the environment. Do not switch on the device as
device. The patient may otherwise be otherwise its proper functioning may be adversely
jeopardized. affected. Wait until the condensation has dried.
Switching on Evita V300
Prerequisites: Start D
– Ventilation unit, Infinity C300, PS500, and
GS500 are reprocessed and assembled ready
for operation.
– The mains power supply and the gas supply are B
connected. C
– The Evita V300 toggle switch is set to (on).
 Press the key (A) on Infinity C300.
116
Evita V300 provides you with two options:
– Using the settings of the previous patient (B)
– Admitting a new patient (C)
If the Start dialog is closed using the X button (D),
Evita V300 adopts the settings of the previous
patient.
If a data loss occurs, the previous settings cannot
be recovered. The Current patient button (B) is not
displayed.
A
361
The system is started. The Start dialog is

displayed.

Getting started
Selecting a patient
Using the settings of the previous Admitting a new patient

patient
For a new patient, Evita V300 determines the
Prerequisite: The Start dialog is opened. ventilation parameters’ start-up settings based on
the patient category (factory setting) or the body
Start weight. The factory settings for the settings
dependent on patient category and weight can be
changed in the System setup dialog window.
The patient category or the body weight can only be
A changed when a new patient is admitted. In the
Adult and Ped. pat. patient categories, the body
height is entered and from that the ideal body
weight is determined. In the Neo. patient category,
the body weight is entered directly. The weight-
116
 Touch the Current patient button (A). dependent setting for a new patient is only possible
after selecting Weight in the System setup dialog
The last used patient-related settings including the window.
alarm limits, application mode and device status
are restored. O2 monitoring and flow monitoring are The alarm limit start-up settings are recalculated
switched on, see "Information on monitoring" according to the customized system configuration.
on page 160. When a new patient is admitted, the settings and
The Start/Standby page (B) is displayed. trend data of the previous patient are deleted.
Evita V300 is in standby mode. Prerequisite: The Start dialog is opened.
Start/Standby Start
B
D
A B C
C
116
1 Touch the following button for a new patient:

– New Adult (A) for new adult patients
092
– New Ped. pat. (B) for new pediatric patients

Evita V300 displays the ventilation parameter start- – New Neo. (C) for new neonatal patients
up settings (C). The Start ventilation button (D)
can be used to start the therapy. When the therapy The respective button turns yellow.
is started, the settings become effective. 2 Confirm with the rotary knob.
The Start/Standby page is displayed. Evita V300
is in standby mode.

Getting started
Ventilation parameter start-up settings by Ventilation parameter start-up settings by body

patient category height/body weight
The Start/Standby page (D) contains the buttons Prerequisite: In the System setup dialog window,
for the patient category: the Weight function was configured and a new
patient was admitted.
New Adult (E) In the Adult and Ped. pat. patient categories,
New Ped. pat. (F) the Start/Standby page (D) contains the button for
body height (I) and the field for the ideal body
New Neo. (G) weight (J).
Start/Standby
Start/Standby
D D
E F G
I J
H H
106
092
1 Touch the button for the body height (I).

1 Touch the button for the desired patient
category (E), (F) or (G). 2 Set the body height by turning the rotary knob
and push to confirm.
2 Confirm with the rotary knob.
Evita V300 determines the start-up values for VT,
The ventilation parameters displayed in the lower
RR, Slope and Flow trigger based on the ideal
part of the page (H) are the start-up settings for the
body weight calculated from the body height.
selected patient category.
The values for VT and RR are displayed in the
Determining the start-up settings can take up to lower part of the page (H). The other ventilation
5 seconds. No entries can be made during this parameters displayed in the lower part of the page
time. are start-up settings for the selected patient
category.

Getting started
In the Neo. patient category, the patient's body Setting the body weight during ventilation
weight is set directly. The Start/Standby page (D)
As a result of setting the ideal body weight in the
contains the button for this start-up body weight (K).
Adult and Ped. pat. patient categories or the
Start/Standby current body weight in the Neo. patient category,
measurements are displayed relative to the body
D weight, e.g., VT/kg BW.
Setting the body weight is only possible on the
Start/Standby page during ventilation.
K L In the Adult and Ped. pat. patient categories:
1 Touch the button for the ideal body weight.
H 2 Using the rotary knob, set the ideal body weight
319
and confirm the value.
In the Neo. patient category:
1 Touch the button for the start-up body
1 Touch the button for the current body weight.
weight (K).
2 Using the rotary knob, set the current body
2 Using the rotary knob, set the start-up
weight and confirm the value.
body weight and confirm the value.
The button for the current body weight (L) is
Whenever the patient category has been
displayed. After the patient has been admitted, the
changed
current body weight corresponds to the start-up
body weight. Check the breathing circuit, see chapter
"Performing the breathing circuit check"
Evita V300 determines the start-up values for VT,
on page 84.
RR, Slope and Flow trigger based on the start-up
body weight. The values for VT and RR are
displayed in the lower part of the page (H). The Additional information
other ventilation parameters displayed in the lower
The configuration for the ventilation parameter
part of the page are start-up settings for the
start-up values by body height/body weight or by
selected patient category.
patient category is entered on the System setup >
Determining the start-up settings can take up to Ventilation > Start settings page. See chapter
5 seconds. No entries can be made during this "Configuring start-up settings for the ventilation
time. parameters" on page 190.
For information on configuring customized alarm
limits, see chapter "Setting start-up values for alarm
limits" on page 184.
For information on starting the therapy, see chapter
"Starting the therapy" on page 92.

Getting started
Selecting the breathing circuit and the breathing gas humidifier
The breathing circuit and the breathing gas If the breathing circuit used is not included in
humidifier can only be selected in standby mode. the selection list
1 Touch the Start/ Standby... button in the main 1 Touch the button (B).
menu bar.
2 Select Other from the selection list.
2 Touch the Br. circuit/ Humidifier tab (A).
The page for selecting the breathing circuit and the
4 Select the humidification type (E):
breathing gas humidifier is displayed.
– Active humid., exp. unheated
Start/Standby – Active humid., exp. heated
A – HME/Filter
B – None
Touch the corresponding button.
C Using the user-defined breathing circuit

D
Prerequisite: The User-defined hose settings
function is enabled, see page 188.
1 Touch the button (B).
E
080
2 Select User-defined breathing circuit from

the selection list.
Selecting the breathing circuit from the
selection list
4 Select the humidification type (E).
3 Touch the button (B).
5 Perform the breathing circuit check,
4 Select the breathing circuit used from the
see page 84.
selection list.
6 Save the measured values for hose compliance
and hose resistance, see page 87.
To help with the selection, the selected breathing
circuit is displayed as a detailed representation (C)
and also described as text (D).
Evita V300 automatically selects the appropriate
humidification type based on the breathing circuit
selected (E). Some breathing circuits provide the
selection of HME/Filter and None.

Getting started
Infinity ID breathing circuits

When using Infinity ID breathing circuits, the
connected hose type as well as the corresponding
humidification type are set automatically.
If the message Infinity ID breathing circuit
detected. is not displayed when an Infinity ID
breathing circuit is connected, use a different
Infinity ID breathing circuit. If the message is still
not displayed, replace the Infinity ID expiratory
valve (for the Neo. patient category: Infinity ID
neonatal expiratory valve) or the inspiratory valve.
Whenever the breathing circuit or the breathing

gas humidifier have been changed
 Check the breathing circuit, see "Performing the
breathing circuit check" on page 84.

Getting started
Checking readiness for operation
The system check consists of the following Start/Standby

elements: A
– Device check
– Breathing circuit check B
– Battery check C
D
The battery check must be performed during initial
commissioning of the device. For further
information on the battery check, see page 266
and page 270. E
101
Safety information on the system check
Evita V300 displays the following on the Overview
page (B):
WARNING
– Last device check with date, time, and result (C)
Before using on the patient – Last breathing circuit check with date, time, and
– Perform the device check. If a malfunction the amount of leakage determined (D)
is detected, do not operate the device! – Battery check, result of the last battery check,
Patient hazard! and date for the next battery check (E)
– Perform the breathing circuit check to
ensure the pressure measurement
accuracy. Otherwise the airway pressure
may deviate from the set values.
Starting the system check
The system check is only possible in standby

mode.
1 Touch the Start/ Standby... button in the main
menu bar.
2 Touch the System check tab (A).

Getting started
Performing the device check Test steps in the device check

In the device check the following test steps are
The device check is only possible in standby mode. performed:
– Auxiliary acoustical alarm (Check of the
Keeping the test lung ready auxiliary alarm / power failure alarm)
There is no need for the user to test other parts
– Adult test lung (MP02400) for the adult of the alarm system, as they are tested in the
breathing circuit self-test.
– Pediatric test lung (8409742) for the pediatric – Breathing circuit connection (visual inspection
and neonatal breathing circuit of breathing circuit)
The test lung must only be inserted into the patient – Inspect humidifier (visual inspection of
connector of the Y-piece after instruction by breathing gas humidifier)
Evita V300. – Calibration of expiratory flow sensor
– CO2 sensor: Zero calibration
– Neonatal flow sensor: Calibration
Starting the device check – Neonatal flow sensor: Measurement
Prerequisites: The medication nebulizer is not – Test lung connection
connected. The System check page (A) is open. – Gas supply sensors: Calibration
– O2 supply
1 Touch the Device check tab (B). – Air supply
Start/Standby
– Gas supply unit (if the gas supply unit function
is activated)
A – Pressure sensor calibration valve
D – Expiratory valve (expiratory valve check)
B – Safety valve (safety function check)
– O2 sensor: Calibration
– Nebulizer (medication nebulizer control check)
C
102
Evita V300 displays the individual test steps in a list

(C). The size of the list depends on the available
applications.
2 Touch the Start button (D).

Getting started
Device check procedure Aborting the device check

Evita V300 guides the user in the form of a 1 Touch the Cancel button (J).
question/answer dialog through the respective test
step. The instruction field (E) displays the questions
or instructions how to carry out the test steps. The device check is also canceled when the
Device check page is closed. The device check
Start/Standby can be continued when the Device check page is
opened again.
J I 1 Touch the Repeat button (I).
E 2 Confirm with the rotary knob.
F G H
Test results
The test results obtained from the device check and
the calibration and zero-checking values of the
sensors remain stored until the next calibration,
even if the device is switched off.
102
The questions must be answered by touching the

Yes (F) or No (G) buttons. Incorrect test steps and remedies
The Next test button (H) can be used to skip the Errors in the following safety-relevant test steps
test steps. generate the medium-priority alarm message
A test step is also skipped if the necessary Device check failed:
prerequisites have not been met. – Pressure sensor calibration valve
– Expiratory valve
The test steps in the device check are displayed – Safety valve
with the following symbols:
The alarm cannot be acknowledged. Do not start
Rotating symbol Active test step ventilation!
Green dot Correct result Errors in non-safety-relevant test steps or test steps
that are not performed on account of a prerequisite
Red dot Incorrect result
generate the low-priority alarm message Device
Colorless dot Test step not performed check incomplete.
The alarm causes and their remedies are displayed
Repeating test steps in the device check on the Current alarms page.
1 Touch the Repeat button (I).
All test steps that have not yet been performed or
that were unsuccessful are repeated.

Getting started
The following table shows the remedies for

eliminating the errors during the device check:
Test step Remedy

Auxiliary acoustical Contact DrägerService.
alarm
CO2 sensor: Zero Check whether the CO2 sensor is connected.
calibration Wait for the CO2 sensor to complete its three-minute warm-up phase.
Check whether the CO2 sensor or the cuvette is soiled.
Neonatal flow sensor: Clean the flow sensor.
Calibration Seal the flow sensor during calibration.
Check whether the flow sensor cable is connected.
Gas supply unit Check whether the gas connection to the device is kinked.
Check whether the data cable is connected.
If GS500 is running continuously, shut down and switch off Evita V300 (toggle
switch to ).
Gas supply sensors: Check whether the compressed gas hoses are connected.
Calibration Shut down Evita V300 and switch it off (toggle switch to ).
O2 supply Check whether the O2 compressed gas hose is connected.
Air supply Check whether the Air compressed gas hose is connected.
Pressure sensor Connect the test lung. Check the breathing circuit for leaks.
calibration valve Check whether the compressed gas hoses are connected.
Check whether the expiratory valve is properly engaged.
Expiratory valve Check whether the water trap is connected.
Ensure that the flow sensor is correctly inserted (only for Adult and Ped. pat.
patient categories).
Safety valve Connect the test lung. Check the breathing circuit for leaks.
Check whether the compressed gas hoses are connected.
O2 sensor: Calibration Check whether the compressed gas hoses are connected.
Nebulizer Prerequisite: The medication nebulizer is not connected.
Check whether the compressed gas hoses are connected.
 Eliminate the causes of the error and repeat the

test step.
 If the test step still fails, contact DrägerService.

Getting started
Calibrating the gas supply sensors After the device check

The calibration of the gas supply sensors takes The user is requested in field (E) to perform the
approximately 2 minutes. This test step must be check of the breathing circuit.
performed every 3 months. If it is not necessary to
perform a test step, it can be skipped by pressing Start/Standby
No. The test step is still displayed as "successfully
completed" (green dot).
If the test step is skipped with Next test, the test
step is displayed as "not performed" (colorless dot).
E
If a complete calibration is necessary after
F G
3 months and the test step is skipped with Next
test, the test step is displayed as "failed" (red dot).
Calibrating the O2 sensor
102
The O2 sensor is calibrated during each device  Confirm with Yes (F).
check. The regular calibration of the O2 sensor
ensures the specified accuracy. The page for the breathing circuit check is opened.
If the test step is skipped with Next test and the O2

sensor is not calibrated for 3 months, the accuracy Performing the breathing circuit check
of the O2 sensor will be reduced. In the parameter
field for FiO2, a question mark will be displayed next
The check is only possible in standby mode.
to the measurement. After calibration during the
device check the sensor will work again with full The breathing circuit check must be performed
accuracy. The measured value is displayed in the after:
parameter field. – Device check
– Changing the breathing circuit
If the test step is skipped with Next test, the test
– Changing the breathing gas humidifier
step is displayed as "not performed" (colorless dot).
– Changing the patient category
If Evita V300 requires the O2 sensor to be
calibrated and the test step is still skipped with Next
Test steps during the breathing circuit check
test, the test step is displayed as failed (red dot).
The following test steps are performed:
CAUTION – Leakage of the breathing circuit
If the quality of the oxygen from the central gas – Compliance of the breathing circuit
supply system is inadequate, calibrate the O2 – Insp. Resistance
sensor with an appropriate calibration gas – Exp. Resistance
(100 % O2). Otherwise this may result in an An additional leakage test is required if a coaxial
incorrect calibration. breathing circuit is used, see "Testing a coaxial
breathing circuit" on page 86.

Getting started
Starting the breathing circuit check When using Infinity ID breathing circuits, the default
values of the breathing circuit detected are used.
Prerequisite: The System check page (A) is open.
The leakage measurement becomes invalid.
1 Touch the Breathing circ. check tab (B).
When the patient category is changed, the
Start/Standby breathing circuit that was last used in this category
is selected and the corresponding values for hose
A
compliance and hose resistance are used.
D
The leakage measurement becomes invalid when
E a new patient is admitted to the same patient
B category. The values for hose resistance and hose
F compliance are retained.
C It is recommended to perform the breathing circuit

check before commencing patient ventilation with a
newly started device.
103
The values of the last test are displayed (C). If a Canceling the breathing circuit check
valid measurement has not yet taken place, the
Start/Standby
standard values are displayed.
G
4 When requested by Evita V300 in the
instruction field (E): Seal the patient connection
port, e.g., with a sterile glove. Confirm with OK
(F).
5 When requested, open the patient connection
port. Confirm with OK (F).
103
The current leakage flow is displayed continuously
1 Touch the Cancel button (G).
throughout the test. A leakage flow of up to
300 mL/min at a pressure of 60 mbar (60 cmH2O) 2 Confirm with the rotary knob.
is acceptable.
The leakage measurement becomes invalid. The
After the leakage test, Evita V300 determines the values for hose resistance and hose compliance
compliance and the inspiratory and expiratory are reset to the default values.
resistance of the breathing circuit. Based on the
calculated compliance of the breathing circuit,
Evita V300 automatically corrects the volume-
controlled breaths as well as the measured flow
monitoring values.
When changing the breathing circuit and type of
humidifier, Evita V300 automatically resets the
values for hose compliance and hose resistance to
default values.

Getting started
Repeating the breathing circuit check Start/Standby

If the breathing circuit is changed after the
breathing circuit check, the humidification type or G
the patient category is changed, the breathing
circuit check will have to be repeated.
The breathing circuit check is also necessary when F
using Infinity ID breathing circuits.
Testing a coaxial breathing circuit

This test is only required for coaxial breathing
103
circuits. The test measures the leakage of the inner
5 If the displayed leakage value is permanently
hose.
below 120 mL/min, the OK button (F) turns light
Connect the coaxial breathing circuit: green.
Then touch the Cancel button (G). The check of
the coaxial breathing circuit is completed.
Continue with step 6.
J H If the displayed leakage value is unstable or is
permanently above 120 mL/min, touch the
I Cancel button (G). Remove the coaxial
breathing circuit from the device and dispose of
it. If required, perform a new test with a new
coaxial breathing circuit.
After the test:
6 Remove the patient connector of the breathing
hose, together with the coaxial test adapter,
232
from the expiratory port.

1 Fit the inspiratory connector of the coaxial
breathing circuit to the inspiratory port (H). 7 Remove the coaxial test adapter from the
patient connector of the coaxial breathing circuit
2 Insert the coaxial test adapter (I) into the patient and dispose of it.
connector of the coaxial breathing circuit.
8 Fit the expiratory connector of the coaxial
3 Fit the patient connector of the breathing hose, breathing circuit to the expiratory port (J).
together with the coaxial test adapter, to the
expiratory port (J). Perform the breathing circuit check, see "Starting
the breathing circuit check" on page 85.
Perform the test:
Prerequisite: The System check > Breathing circ.
check page is opened.
4 Start the breathing circuit check, see page 85.
The leakage test of the inner hose will be
performed.

Getting started
User-defined breathing circuit Display of results of the breathing circuit check

Prerequisite: The user-defined breathing circuit has Prerequisite: The System check page (A) is open.
been selected, see "Using the user-defined
 Touch the Check results tab (I).
breathing circuit" on page 78.
The values for hose resistance and hose Start/Standby
compliance can be saved and are then available A
when that breathing circuit is selected again.
J
Start/Standby K
L
I
M
104
The detailed results of the check are displayed.
– Compliance [mL/mbar] (J)
– Flow [L/min] (K)
369
– Inspiratory resistance [mbar/L/s] (L)

 Touch the Save button (H). – Expiratory resistance [mbar/L/s] (M)
Display of the results of the system check on

the Start/Standby page
After the system check, the results are displayed on
the Start/Standby > Start/ Standby page.
Start/Standby
N
O
366
– Result of device check (N)

– Result of breathing circuit check (O)

Getting started
Checking the switch-over to battery Low-priority alarm message

operation 1 Start ventilation.
1 Unplug the power plug. 2 In the Special maneuvers > Maneuvers dialog
window, touch and hold the Man. insp./hold
If there is a PS500 power supply unit present, the button until the Inspiratory hold interrupted
device switches over to the PS500 without alarm is triggered.
interruption. If there is no PS500 present or the
PS500 is discharged, the device switches over to
the internal battery without interruption. The Checking alarm limits
Battery activated alarm is displayed.
2 Plug the power plug back in. The alarm limits for a settable alarm can be
checked by setting the alarm limits appropriately.
The device switches back to mains operation. The When the alarm limit is exceeded, the
Battery activated alarm message goes out. corresponding alarm is triggered.
Additional information on setting alarm limits can be
Checking the alarm signaling found in chapter "Setting alarm limits" on page 146.
When the system check has been successfully

completed, the device is ready for operation. The Test of the acoustic alarm system
alarm signaling can be checked additionally.
The acoustic alarm system need not be tested by
The description of alarm signaling can be found in the user. The device tests the functions of the
chapter "Alarms." Additional information on alarm acoustic alarm system automatically during the
criteria can be found in chapter "Alarm – Cause – device check.
Remedy."
High-priority alarm message

1 Start ventilation.
2 After 2 minutes set the upper alarm limit for
MVe to a value below the measured value of
MVe.
The MV high alarm is triggered.
Medium-priority alarm message

1 Start ventilation.
2 Set the upper alarm limit for VT to a value below
the measured value of VT.
The VT high alarm is triggered.

Getting started
Selecting the Tube or NIV application mode
Evita V300 can switch between non-invasive Setting parameters for the tube
ventilation and tube ventilation.
The application mode can only be selected in The inner diameter of the tube and the tube type
standby mode. can be entered for the following functions:
– Display of Ptrach, independent of ATC
1 Touch the Start/ Standby... button in the main – Measurement of patient resistance Rpat and
menu bar. the index C20/Cdyn
2 Touch the Tube/NIV tab (A). If the inner diameter of the tube and the tube type
are entered, the measured value Rpat corresponds
Start/Standby
with the patient resistance. Only if the inner
A diameter of the tube and the tube type are entered
B C correctly, are Rpat and C20/Cdyn displayed
correctly. The measured value R always
corresponds with the total resistance.
Prerequisite: The Tube/NIV page (A) is open.
The Tube application mode has been selected.
Start/Standby
A
113
3 Touch the Tube (B) or NIV (C) button.

Observe the information on changing the B
application mode! C
D
CAUTION
Application mode NIV must not be activated with
intubated patients. 113
Activating or deactivating the calculation of

WARNING tracheal pressure
Alarm limits and ventilation settings must
1 Touch the appropriate button (B).
be checked or set again in order to ensure
complete monitoring of ventilation after 2 Confirm with the rotary knob.
changing from NIV application mode to Tube
If ATC is switched off, the calculation of tracheal
application mode.
pressure is always deactivated when a new patient
is admitted.
For information on using the NIV application
mode for non-invasive ventilation, see
"NIV – Non-invasive ventilation" on page 104.

Getting started
Selecting the tube type

The tube type can only be selected in the Adult and
Ped. pat. patient categories.
1 Touch the appropriate button (C).
Entering the inner diameter of the tube

1 Touch the button (D).
2 Set the value by turning the rotary knob and
push to confirm.
Transfer of ventilation settings
Infinity ID breathing circuits can store the patient's Start/Standby E

ventilation settings (TVS). When the Infinity ID
breathing circuit with the stored ventilation settings
A
is connected to Evita V300, Evita V300 displays
those ventilation settings. B
Transferring ventilation settings to Evita V300

Prerequisites: D
– Evita V300 is in standby mode. C
– Import of the ventilation settings is activated,
see "Configuring the import of ventilation
350
settings" on page 188.

– The Infinity ID breathing circuit has been used 2 Connect the Infinity ID breathing hoses.
on a device which supports TVS. The same Evita V300 displays the button (B) with the
system time must be set on both devices detected Infinity ID breathing circuit:
(transmitting device and receiving device).
Observe instructions for use of device. TVS Adult
– The ventilation settings stored to the Infinity ID
breathing circuit are no older than 120 minutes. TVS Ped
1 Touch the Start/ Standby... button in the main TVS Neo
menu bar.
The Start/Standby page (A) is displayed. The stored ventilation settings (C) and the device
(D) which has transferred the ventilation settings to
the Infinity ID breathing circuit are displayed in the
lower part of the page. Information is displayed in
the message field (E).

Getting started
WARNING Transferring ventilation settings to Infinity ID

breathing circuit
If incorrect ventilation settings are transferred
by the Infinity ID breathing circuit, the patient During therapy, all the ventilation parameters and
may be endangered. All the transferred alarm limits are transferred to the connected
ventilation settings must be checked by the Infinity ID breathing circuit on a regular basis. If the
user and adapted to the current patient last update took place more than 120 minutes ago,
situation before confirmation. the stored ventilation settings become invalid. If this
Infinity ID breathing circuit is then connected to a
3 Check the ventilation settings and confirm them device supporting TVS, no ventilation settings are
with the rotary knob. displayed.
4 Start the therapy, see page 92.
Selecting the therapy type
Evita V300 can choose between therapy types Additional information

Ventilation and O2 Therapy.
"O2 therapy" on page 128.
The therapy type can only be changed in standby
"Setting ventilation" on page 96.
mode.
menu bar.
The Start/Standby page (A) is displayed.
Start/Standby
A
B C
126
2 Touch the Ventilation (B) or O2 Therapy (C)

button.

Getting started
Starting the therapy
Before using on the patient

 Carry out a system check to ensure that
Evita V300 is operating correctly, see page 80.
 Check the therapy settings: Set the alarm limits,
see page 146. Set the ventilation modes and
ventilation parameters, see "Setting ventilation"
on page 96.
Starting ventilation or O2 therapy

menu bar.
The Start/Standby page (A) is displayed.
Start/Standby
A
B
C
092
2 Touch the Start ventilation button (B) and

confirm with the rotary knob.
Evita V300 starts the therapy with the set
ventilation parameters. The main page for
ventilation or O2 therapy is displayed.
The page for the ventilation settings can be opened
with the Ventilation settings... button (C).

Getting started
Displaying the status of accessories

menu bar.
2 Touch the Accessory status tab (A).
Start/Standby
A
B
368
In field (B) Evita V300 displays the time until it is

recommended to exchange the accessories.
Sterilization of the expiratory valve or inspiratory
valve may gradually impair the operation of RFID
transmission. This may mean that Infinity ID
breathing circuit functions may not work or may no
longer work reliably. The status of the Infinity ID
accessories is not displayed.
The time for the exchange interval can be
configured on the System setup > System status
> Exchange intervals page. See "Configuring
exchange intervals" on page 199.


Operation
Operation
Setting ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Required steps after medication nebulization . 122

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Fitting the Aeroneb nebulizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Opening the Ventilation settings dialog
Diagnostics – measurement maneuver. . . . 124
window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Selecting ventilation modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Setting ventilation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Occlusion pressure – P0.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
General settings for ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Intrinsic PEEP – PEEPi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Additional settings for ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Negative Inspiratory Force – NIF . . . . . . . . . . 126
NIV – Non-invasive ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . 104 GS500 gas supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Installing the bacterial filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Safety information when using NIV . . . . . . . . . 104 Using the gas supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Selecting NIV application mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Starting NIV ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 O2 therapy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Setting ventilation parameters for NIV . . . . . . . 105 Safety information for O2 therapy . . . . . . . . . . 128
Monitoring during NIV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Preparing O2 therapy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Switching on O2 therapy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Displaying curves and measured values . . . 107 Setting FiO2 and flow for O2 therapy. . . . . . . . 130
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Switching off O2 therapy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Changing the screen view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Changing the display of monitoring fields. . . . . 107 Standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Evaluating loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Activating standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Freezing waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Continuing the therapy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Smart Pulmonary View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Ending operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Disconnecting the device from the mains
Maneuvers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Storing Evita V300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Manual inspiration – Manual inspiration/hold . . 112
Expiratory hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Mains power supply / DC power supply . . . 135
Oxygen enrichment for suction maneuver . . . . 113
Components and terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Manual disconnection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Use of power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Battery operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Medication nebulization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Battery charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Safety information on medication Care and maintenance of the batteries . . . . . . 137
nebulization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Preparing the pneumatic medication Intrahospital patient transport . . . . . . . . . . . 138
nebulizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Installing the medication nebulizer into the
breathing circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Switching on medication nebulization. . . . . . . . 120
Aborting medication nebulization . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Operation
Setting ventilation
Overview The page for the active ventilation mode (D) with
the General settings (F) is displayed by default.
This chapter describes how to set ventilation The corresponding therapy controls (E) are
modes and general settings as well as additional displayed.
settings for ventilation parameters. The tab for Additional settings (G) can be used to
For a detailed description of the ventilation modes supplement the active ventilation mode with
and ventilation parameters, see chapters additional settings.
"Description of the ventilation modes" on page 314
and "Additional settings for ventilation"
on page 336. D
F
G
Opening the Ventilation settings dialog E
window
083
The Ventilation settings dialog window can be
opened as follows:
Selecting ventilation modes
 Touch the Ventilation settings... button (A) in
the main menu bar.
Prerequisite: The General settings page (A) is
 Touch the button (B) in the therapy bar. open.
 Touch the displayed ventilation mode (C) in the Ventilation settings
header bar.
B B B B C
C A
1 2 3
A
083
The Ventilation settings dialog window contains

5 tabs for selecting the ventilation modes. 4 tabs
(B) have ventilation modes permanently assigned
to them. The fifth tab (C) can be used to select
another ventilation mode, which can be selected
078_V300
B from the available ventilation modes.
Evita V300 opens the Ventilation settings dialog The following 4 ventilation modes are preset at the
window. factory:
– VC-AC
– PC-BIPAP
– VC-SIMV
– SPN-CPAP/PS

Operation
For information on changing the assignment of Setting ventilation parameters

ventilation modes, see "Configuring start-up
settings for the ventilation modes" on page 189. Prerequisite: The General settings page (A) is
open.
Selecting an additional ventilation mode in the
dialog window
Ventilation settings D
1 Touch the Other modes tab (D).
A
B
C D
C
E
131
1 Touch the corresponding therapy control, e.g.,
(B).
170
All the available ventilation modes (E) are push to confirm.

displayed. The additional ventilation parameters derived from
2 Touch the button for the corresponding the ventilation parameter are calculated by
ventilation mode. The color of the tab (D) turns Evita V300 and displayed in the setting assistance
yellow. field (C).
3 Confirm with the rotary knob. Information is displayed in the message field (D),
e.g., when the setting limit of a parameter has been
The additional ventilation mode is displayed in the reached.
fifth tab (C). The ventilation mode is active.
Setting ventilation parameters in the therapy

Changing the ventilation mode bar
Ventilation settings The ventilation parameters of the active ventilation
F mode can also be set with the therapy controls in
the therapy bar (E).
077
078_V300
1 Touch the corresponding tab, e.g., (F). The

E
color of the tab turns yellow.
2 Preset the ventilation parameters if necessary. Additional information
3 Confirm with the rotary knob. The color of the "Exceeding the set limit of a ventilation parameter"
tab turns dark green. on page 46.
The ventilation mode is active. The settings are "Direct setting of ventilation parameters
applied to the patient. (QuickSet)" on page 47.
"Linked setting of ventilation parameters"
on page 47.

Operation
General settings for ventilation
The general settings for the ventilation parameters

are listed in the following tables:
– Volume-controlled ventilation modes (only in
the Adult and Ped. pat. patient categories)
– Pressure-controlled ventilation modes
– Spontaneous breathing support
WARNING
Do not suction during volume-controlled
ventilation. Flow delivery is limited in this
form of ventilation. As a result, negative
pressures are possible. Patient hazard!
WARNING
In the Neo. patient category, always use the
neonatal flow sensor for ventilation in the
Tube application mode. Otherwise,
measurement accuracy will be impaired.
Patient hazard!
CAUTION
In volume-controlled ventilation modes for
pediatric patients with relatively low compliance,
deviations in VT and MV are possible. In such
cases, change to pressure-controlled ventilation.
WARNING
If flow measurement is deactivated for
SPN-CPAP, use a separate monitoring device.
CAUTION
Only remove the water trap of the expiratory valve
briefly during ventilation. Otherwise, ventilation
will be impaired.

Operation
Volume-controlled ventilation modes
Ventilation Ventilation mode

parameters VC-SIMV VC-CMV VC-AC VC-MMV
FiO2 X X X X
VT X X X X
Ti X X X X
RR X X X X
Slope X X1) X1) X
2) X2) X2) X2)
Pmax X
Flow X3) X3) X3) X3)
PEEP X X X X
Psupp X X
1) if AutoFlow is switched on
2) if Pmax/Paw high autoset is activated
3) if AutoFlow is switched off
Pressure-controlled ventilation modes

parameters PC-SIMV PC-BIPAP PC-AC PC-CMV PC-APRV PC-PSV
FiO2 X X X X X X
VT X1) X1) X1) X1)
Ti X X X X
RR X X X X X
Slope X X X X X X
Pmax X2) X2) X2) X2) X2) X2)
Pinsp X X X X X
PEEP X X X X X
Psupp X X
Timax X3)
Thigh X
Tlow X4)
Phigh X
Plow X
Tlow max X5)
Exp. term. X5)
1) if VG is switched on
2) if Pmax/Paw high autoset is activated and ATC or Apnea Ventilation or VG is switched on
3) in the Neo. patient category in the Tube application mode, or in the Adult and Ped. pat. patient categories in the NIV
application mode
4) if AutoRelease is switched off
5) if AutoRelease is switched on

Operation
Spontaneous breathing support

parameters SPN-CPAP/PS SPN-CPAP/VS SPN-CPAP1) SPN-PPS
FiO2 X X X X
VT X
Timax X2) X2) X2)
Slope X X X
Pmax X3) X 3)
X3)
PEEP X X X X
Psupp X
Vol. Assist X
Flow Assist X
TmanInsp X
PmanInsp X
1) only available in the Neo. patient category in the NIV application mode
2) in the NIV application mode or in the Neo.patient category
3) if Pmax/Paw high autoset is activated

Operation
Additional settings for ventilation
Overview of possible supplementary settings

The ventilation modes can be combined with
additional settings to optimize ventilation. The table
shows the possible additional settings for the
respective ventilation mode.
Ventilation Additional settings

mode
Apnea Trigger Insp. Sigh AutoFlow ATC Volume Auto
Ventilation term. Guarantee Release
VC-SIMV X X X X X X
VC-CMV X X X
VC-AC X X X X
VC-MMV X X X X X
PC-SIMV X X X X X X
PC-BIPAP X X X X X
PC-AC X X X X
PC-CMV X X X
PC-APRV X X X
PC-PSV X X X X X
SPN-CPAP/PS X X X X
SPN-CPAP/VS X X X X
SPN-PPS X X X X
Setting the supplementary settings The page for setting the corresponding parameters
is opened.
Prerequisite: The page with the active ventilation
mode is open. Ventilation settings
1 Touch the Additional settings tab (A).
The additional settings of the active ventilation
mode are displayed. C C
D D D
098
B 3 Use the buttons (C) to activate or deactivate the

A additional setting.
4 Touch the corresponding therapy control (D).
084
2 Touch the tab of the respective additional push to confirm.

setting (B).

Operation
The Trigger and Apnea Ventilation additional

settings can be configured as buttons in the main
menu bar to enable direct access. See "Assigning
functions to additional buttons" on page 181.
The Trigger and Apnea Ventilation buttons are
located in the quick access bar.
Ventilation parameters for the additional settings
CAUTION
High trigger sensitivity may lead to auto-triggering
of the ventilator.
Additional settings Ventilation parameters Dependencies, information

Apnea Ventilation On/Off
VTapn
RRapn
Pmax If Pmax/Paw high autoset is configured
PEEP In PC-APRV
Flow trigger In PC-APRV
Slope In SPN-PPS
For configuration of the Automatic return from
Apnea Ventilation function, see "Configuring general
settings" on page 194. For a description, see
"Automatic return from apnea ventilation"
on page 338.
Trigger/ Termin. Flow trigger
Insp. term.
Can be configured on the System setup >
Ventilation > Start settings > General settings
page
Sigh On/Off
intPEEP
Interval sigh
Cycles sigh
AutoFlow On/Off
Slope If not adjustable on the General settings page

Operation
Additional settings Ventilation parameters Dependencies, information

ATC On/Off See chapter "Configuration" on page 175.
Tube type (ET/Trach.) The tube type cannot be selected in the Neo. patient
category.
Tube Ø Inner diameter of the tube
Compens. Degree of compensation:
Compens. = 100 % – airway pressure regulation to
trachea level
Volume Guarantee On/Off See chapter "Configuration" on page 175.
VT
Pinsp If VG is switched off
AutoRelease On/Off
Exp. term.
Tlow If AutoRelease is switched off
Tlow max If AutoRelease is switched on
For a detailed description of the additional settings,
see chapter "Additional settings for ventilation"
on page 336.

Operation
NIV – Non-invasive ventilation
Overview Automatic tube compensation (ATC) which is

activated in Tube application mode is ineffective in
Evita V300 can be used for the ventilation of NIV application mode.
intubated patients (Tube application mode) and for
non-invasive ventilation (NIV application mode).
Selecting NIV application mode
This chapter describes the use of non-invasive
ventilation in the NIV application mode.
The application mode can only be selected in
In the Adult and Ped. pat. patient categories, all standby mode.
the ventilation modes may be selected in the NIV
application mode. In the Neo. patient category, only
menu bar.
the SPN-CPAP and PC-CMV ventilation modes
may be selected. Evita V300 opens the Start/Standby dialog
window. The Start/Standby page is displayed by
default.
Safety information when using NIV 2 Touch the Standby button and confirm with the
rotary knob.
CAUTION
Evita V300 is in standby mode.
NIV application mode must not be activated with
intubated patients. 3 Touch the Tube/NIV tab (A).
Start/Standby
CAUTION A
Use of masks increases the dead space. Observe
the mask manufacturer's instructions! B
NOTE
Use suitable masks. Otherwise excessive
C
leakages may occur.
WARNING
Avoid high airway pressures. Danger of
365
aspiration!
4 Touch the NIV button (B) and confirm with the
rotary knob.
WARNING
Alarm limits and ventilation settings must be Evita V300 is in NIV application mode. In the
checked or set again in order to ensure header bar Evita V300 displays the symbol .
complete monitoring of ventilation after In the Neo. patient category, flow monitoring is
changing from NIV application mode to Tube deactivated.
application mode.

Operation
Limiting the inspiratory flow in the Neo. patient Setting ventilation parameters for NIV
category
In the Neo. patient category the inspiratory flow can  Set the ventilation parameters as described
be limited with the Flow max setting. The base flow under "Setting ventilation parameters"
and the nebulizer flow (if active) are not affected by on page 97.
this setting. If the NIV application mode is selected,
the setting is reset to the maximum value. Therapy control Timax
To limit the maximum flow: The therapy control Timax (A) limits the maximum
 Touch the Flow max button (C). Set the value duration of supported breaths (Pressure Support,
by turning the rotary knob and push to confirm. Volume Support, PPS) because the inspiratory
termination criterion may be ineffective with very
high leakages.
Starting NIV ventilation Ventilation settings
Prerequisite: The Start/Standby dialog window is

opened.
A
1 Touch the Start/Standby tab (A).
Start/Standby
A
105
B  Set the value for Timax by turning the rotary
knob and push to confirm.
Therapy controls TmanInsp and PmanInsp

Prerequisite: The Neo. patient category and the
SPN-CPAP ventilation mode are set.
367

B
Evita V300 starts the therapy with the set
ventilation parameters. The main screen for
C
339
ventilation is displayed.
During manual inspiration, the duration of the
mandatory breath is determined by the TmanInsp
therapy control (B).
During manual inspiration, the pressure of the
mandatory breath is determined by the PmanInsp
therapy control (C).
 Set and confirm the relevant values using the
rotary knob.

Operation
Monitoring during NIV
The following settings are necessary in order to

avoid false alarms and ensure monitoring:
 Adjust both alarm limits for MVe in line with the
current value.
 Use additional monitoring, e.g., external SpO2,
if necessary.
The following alarm limits may be deactivated in
order to avoid artefacts:
– MV low
– VT high
– VT low
– Tapn
WARNING
Alarm limits may only be deactivated if the
safety of the patient is not jeopardized by the
absence of an alarm!
A message is displayed in the header bar if an

alarm limit has been deactivated.
A delay time Tdisconnect between 0 and
60 seconds can be set for the lower alarm limit for
the airway pressure.
"Setting alarm limits" on page 146.

Operation
Displaying curves and measured values
Overview The fields can be standard or double in size. The

information that can be displayed depends on the
This chapter describes how curves and measured size of the fields:
values are displayed on the main screen as well as Parameter fields
how to change the screen views during operation.
Standard size Single parameter
Two parameters
Changing the screen view
Double size Single parameter
Evita V300 displays a preconfigured view on the Battery
main screen.
Three hospital-defined views can be created in the Curve fields
System setup dialog window.
Standard size Single curve
Displaying other views Trend for measured values
 Touch the
1 2 3
Views... button in the main menu Trend for set values
bar. Double size Single curve
The screen displays the second view .
1 2 3
Single loop
 Touch the Views... button. Double loops
1 2 3
The screen displays the third view

1 2 3
. Trend for measured values
Trend for set values
Lung display (Smart
Changing the display of monitoring Pulmonary View)
fields
A 1 2 3
B
115_V300
The parameters can be displayed in parameter

fields (A) and in the curve field (B).

Operation
Selecting the display of parameter fields Selecting the display of curve fields
1 Touch the parameter field. 1 Touch the curve field.
The selected parameter field is highlighted. The selected curve field is highlighted. Evita V300
Evita V300 opens the dialog for the contents of the opens the dialog for the contents of the curve field.
parameter field.
2 Proceed as described under "Selecting the
display of parameter fields".
Content
E
"Configuring the screen view" on page 178.
"Factory-set screen views" on page 373.
F
C D
107
Selecting the field size

2 Touch the 1x button (C) for standard size or 2x
(D) for double size.
Selecting the display format

3 Touch the button (E).
The selection list for the display of parameters is
displayed according to the selected size of the
parameter field.
4 Select the display format and confirm with the
rotary knob.
Selecting the parameter

5 Touch the button (F).
The selection list for the displayable parameters is
displayed.
6 Select the parameter and confirm it with the
rotary knob.
Closing the dialog

7 Touch the button X. The dialog is closed.

Operation
Evaluating loops Additional information

A grid only appears if loops are displayed in the
500.0 complete curve field.
450.0
A
C
400.0
350.0 B Freezing waveforms

300.0 D E
250.0
The Freeze waveforms function can be configured
200.0
as a button in the main menu bar to enable direct
access. See "Assigning functions to additional
150.0
buttons" on page 181.
100.0
50.0  Touch the Freeze waveforms button in the

0.0 main menu bar.
-5.0 0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 112
Displaying a reference loop

 Touch the Ref. button (A).
A
A loop is recorded and displayed as a reference
loop.
The date and the time of the loop appear beside the
button (A). The reference loop is drawn in black.
The reference loop remains displayed until the Ref.
button (A) is touched again.
145
Recording the current loop in order to freeze,
display and save it afterwards The current curves are immediately frozen. The
cursor (A) displays the time of "freezing" and the
 Touch the Capture loop button (B). value at the cursor position.
The current loop is frozen. The loops are drawn in To display a measured value at a certain moment in
blue. After "freezing", a cursor (C) is displayed time:
which can be moved with the rotary knob. The
respective values are displayed (D).  Position the cursor on the time with the rotary
knob.
Recording up to 10 loops of mandatory or The measured value or the measured value pair
spontaneous breaths are displayed above the curve.
1 Touch the Draw button (E). To cancel the Freeze waveforms function:
2 Set how many loops should be recorded with  Touch the Freeze waveforms button in the
the rotary knob and push to confirm. main menu bar again.
The set number is displayed in the button.

Operation
Smart Pulmonary View Smart Pulmonary View must be calibrated for each
new patient. If the measured values for Rpat and
Smart Pulmonary View is a graphic display of the Cdyn are outside the current display range, a red
compliance and resistance as well as of the line appears and calibration is required. Evita V300
spontaneous and mandatory minute volume. displays the following information:
Touch "Take reference".
A double-size curve field must be configured in
order to display Smart Pulmonary View. See Calibrating Smart Pulmonary View:
"Configuring the screen view" on page 178.  Touch the Take reference (E) button.
The display range is adapted to the current
measured values. The measured values from the
last calibration are displayed as a broken line.
B
E Additional information
For a detailed description, see "Smart Pulmonary
C View" on page 355.
A
316
A The movement of the diaphragm indicates

synchronized mandatory breaths, supported
(triggered) breaths, or spontaneous breaths.
B The blue line around the trachea indicates the
resistance Rpat. The higher the resistance, the
thicker the line. The value is also displayed.
C The blue line around the lungs indicates the
compliance Cdyn. The higher the compliance,
the thinner the line. The value is also displayed.
D Diagram displaying the relationship between
spontaneous breathing and mandatory
ventilation. The following parameters are
displayed in different colors:
– VTspon and RRspon
– VTmand and RRmand

Operation
Help
WARNING Closing Help

Risk of operating error.  Touch the button (F).
The Help function is not a substitute for the
instructions for use. The instructions for use
Opening Help in the dialog window
must be observed to ensure safe operation.
The Help function can also be opened in the
The Help function can be configured as a button in following dialog windows:
the main menu bar to enable direct access. See – Ventilation settings
"Assigning functions to additional buttons" – Special maneuvers > Nebulization
on page 181. – Special maneuvers > Maneuvers
The Help... button is located in the quick access Ventilation settings
bar. GH
Opening Help
 Touch the Help... button in the main menu bar.
Help
F
171
A B C D E  Touch the button (G) in the dialog window.
The appropriate section of the Help is displayed.
Closing Help
 Touch the (G) or the (H) button in the dialog
window.
318
The following buttons are available in the Help

dialog window:
– Home (A) to open the start page
– (B) to scroll back
– (C) to scroll forward
– Content (D) to open the table of contents
– Index (E) to open the index
 Touch the appropriate button.

Operation
Maneuvers
Overview 2 Touch the Maneuvers tab (A) if the page is not

already preset.
Evita V300 permits the following measurement
Special maneuvers
maneuvers on the Special maneuvers >
Maneuvers page: A
– Manual inspiration – Manual inspiration/hold
B
– Expiratory hold
– Oxygen enrichment for suction maneuver
– Manual disconnection
081_V300
Manual inspiration – Manual
inspiration/hold
Triggering manual inspiration
The Manual inspiration/hold maneuver can be
activated in all ventilation modes and offers the  Briefly touch the Man. insp./hold button (B).
following options:
– Between two mandatory breaths, a breath can Manually extending inspiration
be manually started and held. The pattern of the
 Touch and hold the Man. insp./hold button (B)
manually started breath corresponds to the
for the desired inspiratory time.
ventilation pattern of the currently active
automatic ventilation mode. Evita V300 triggers an extended breath or extends
an already triggered mandatory breath.
– Regardless of the start time, a mandatory
breath can be prolonged. Evita V300 automatically ends inspiration:
– After a maximum of 40 seconds in the Adult
1 Touch the Special maneuvers... button in the
and Ped. pat. patient categories
main menu bar.
– After a maximum of 5 seconds in the Neo.
Evita V300 opens the Special maneuvers dialog patient category
window.
WARNING
The Manual inspiration/hold maneuver must
not be used during endotracheal suction.
Otherwise negative pressure may jeopardize
the patient.

Operation
Additional information Additional information

The Manual inspiration/hold maneuver can be Displaying NIF, see "Negative Inspiratory Force –
configured as a Man. insp./hold button in the main NIF" on page 126.
menu bar to enable direct access. See "Assigning
For a detailed description, see "Negative
Inspiratory Force – NIF" on page 353.
The Man. insp./hold button is located in the quick
The Exp. hold maneuver can be configured as a
access bar.
button in the main menu bar to enable direct
Expiratory hold
The Exp. hold button is located in the quick access
Expiratory hold can be activated in all ventilation bar.
modes. The maneuver is required for determining
the measured NIF factor for weaning. This
maneuver is not available in the Neo. patient Oxygen enrichment for suction
category. maneuver
main menu bar. Overview
Evita V300 opens the Special maneuvers dialog To avoid hypoxia during endotracheal suction,
window. Evita V300 offers a function for oxygen enrichment.
2 Touch the Maneuvers tab (A) if the page is not For the Adult patient category, the O2
already preset. concentration is increased to 100 Vol%. For the
Ped. pat. and Neo. patient categories, the O2
Special maneuvers
concentration is increased to the current inspiratory
A O2 concentration, multiplied by a factor. The factor
can be configured, see page 194.
After oxygen enrichment is started, Evita V300
B ventilates the patient with an increased O2
concentration for an initial oxygen enrichment
phase of 180 seconds max. During this time,
Evita V300 waits for a disconnection.
When the device is disconnected for suction,
081_V300
Evita V300 interrupts ventilation. During the suction

phase, the acoustic alarms are suppressed so that
3 Touch and hold the Exp. hold button (B) for the the suction maneuver is not disturbed.
desired expiratory time. Expiration is ended by
After suction and automatically recognized
Evita V300 after a maximum of 45 seconds in
reconnection, Evita V300 delivers an increased O2
the Adult patient category and 30 seconds in
concentration for the final oxygen enrichment
the Ped. pat. patient category.
phase of 120 seconds.
WARNING During suction and for 120 seconds afterwards, the
Expiratory hold must not be used during lower alarm limit for the minute volume is switched
endotracheal suction. Otherwise negative off.
pressure may jeopardize the patient.

Operation
Initial and final oxygen enrichment are only 3 Touch the O2 suction button (B) and confirm
possible with a fully functioning flow sensor and if with the rotary knob.
flow monitoring is switched on!
The oxygen enrichment program is started.
WARNING Evita V300 ventilates in the set ventilation mode
Select an appropriate suction catheter for with an increased O2 concentration:
suction. Otherwise this may result in a too
high negative pressure. Adult patient : 100 Vol% O2
category
WARNING Ped. pat. and Neo. : 1 to 2 times the current FiO2
Do not suction during volume-controlled patient categories concentration
ventilation. Flow delivery is limited with this
form of ventilation and therefore a high If PEEP is not set to more than 4 mbar (4 cmH2O),
negative pressure may occur. a PEEP of 4 mbar (4 cmH2O) will be applied
automatically. This PEEP allows Evita V300 to
detect disconnection. The other ventilation
WARNING
parameters remain unaffected.
Risk of patient injury during suction in a
closed breathing circuit Screen display:
Using closed suction systems produces C

negative pressure in the patient's airways.
This leads to impaired ventilation and
078_V300
1 2 3
therefore to impaired gas exchange.

Observe patient condition. The field (C) in the header bar continuously
displays the initial oxygen enrichment phase with
the remaining time in seconds.
Before suction
Initial oxygen enrichment lasts for a maximum of
180 seconds. During this time Evita V300 waits for
main menu bar.
a disconnection for suction. Evita V300 terminates
Evita V300 opens the Special maneuvers dialog the oxygen enrichment if there is no disconnection
window. after the 180 seconds have elapsed.
2 Touch the Maneuvers tab (A) if the page is not After disconnection for suction, Evita V300 delivers
already preset. a minimal flow for the duration of disconnection in
order to detect automatically the end of the
Special maneuvers
disconnection phase. 120 seconds are available for
A suctioning. In the header bar, the disconnection
phase with the remaining time available for suction
is displayed continuously in seconds (C).
B
081_V300

Operation
Automatic termination of oxygen enrichment 2 Touch the Maneuvers tab (A) if the page is not
already preset.
If there is no reconnection when the time available
(120 seconds) has elapsed, the oxygen enrichment Special maneuvers
is terminated. All alarms are immediately active A
again. Evita V300 continues to ventilate
immediately in the set ventilation mode.
After reconnection
After reconnection, Evita V300 continues
ventilating in the set ventilation mode, except that
for 120 seconds an increased O2 concentration will
continue to be delivered for final oxygen B
081_V300
enrichment.
In the header bar, the remaining time available for
the final oxygen enrichment phase is displayed Activating manual disconnection
continuously in seconds.
 Touch the Manual discon. button (B) and
Terminating oxygen enrichment prematurely
 Touch the O2 suction button again and confirm Additional information
with the rotary knob.
The Manual disconnection maneuver can be
configured as a Manual discon. button in the main
Additional information menu bar to enable direct access. See "Assigning
The suction maneuver can be configured as a O2
suction button in the main menu bar to enable The Manual discon. button is located in the quick
direct access. See "Assigning functions to access bar.
Manual disconnection
When the Manual disconnection maneuver is

activated, Evita V300 reduces flow delivery. The
patient can be disconnected within the next
10 seconds. When the patient is reconnected,
Evita V300 resumes ventilation in the set
ventilation mode.
main menu bar.
Evita V300 opens the Special maneuvers dialog
window.

Operation
Medication nebulization
Safety information on medication CAUTION

nebulization If no pneumatic medication nebulizer is
connected, switch off the nebulization function.
WARNING Otherwise, Evita V300 will deliver a tidal volume
Risk of fire that is too low.
The flow sensor can ignite medications or

CAUTION
other substances based on highly flammable
substances. Ventilation impaired
– Do not nebulize medications or other If unapproved pneumatic medication nebulizers
substances that are easily flammable or are used, the tidal volume and O2 concentration
spray them into the device. actually delivered may deviate from the displayed
– Do not use substances containing alcohol. values.
– Do not allow flammable or explosive
Only use the medication nebulizers listed in the
substances to enter the breathing system
current list of accessories.
or the breathing circuit.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Ventilation impaired
During medication nebulization, do not use a heat
and moisture exchanger (HME) at the Y-piece. Aerosols may impair the functional integrity of the
The medication will not be appropriately expiratory valve.
administered to the patient.
When using medication nebulization, shorten the
reprocessing cycles for the expiratory valve.
CAUTION
Do not place a bacterial filter on the nebulizer
outlet during nebulization! Bacterial filters may Failure of the Air supply
increase the flow resistance and impair If the Air supply fails during medication
ventilation. nebulization, the medication nebulizer will continue
to operate with 100 Vol% O2. In this case,
CAUTION deviations in the inspiratory O2 concentration are
Remove the medication nebulizer after use. possible.
Accidental medication nebulization may impair
ventilation.
CAUTION
Surplus nebulized medication can affect the
ambient air.

Operation
Air supply from the GS500 gas supply unit O2 concentration of up to ±4 Vol% are possible. For
respiratory rates above 12/min, refer to the graph
If Evita V300 is supplied with Air from the GS500
on page 349.
gas supply unit and O2 is supplied from the central
gas supply system, the medication nebulizer CAUTION
operates with O2 only.
For respiratory rates of less than 12/min, major
The measured value FiO2 indicates the O2 deviations in O2 concentration may occur in
concentration of the gas supplied at the inspiratory extreme cases. Such deviations cannot be
port and not the O2 concentration reaching the detected by the device's internal monitoring of O2
patient. For deviations, see page 350. concentration.
For this reason, do not use the medication
Using a pneumatic medication nebulizer in the nebulizer at respiratory rates of less than 12/min!
Adult patient category
Medication nebulization may be used in all CAUTION
ventilation modes. The inspiratory tidal volume displayed may be
considerably higher or lower than the actual
Evita V300 applies the medication aerosol in
inspiratory tidal volume applied to the patient on
synchronization with the inspiratory flow phase and
account of tolerances in the nebulizer flow.
maintains a constant minute volume.
Pressure-controlled ventilation is therefore
If Evita V300 is supplied with Air and O2 from the recommended during nebulization.
central gas supply system, the medication
nebulizer is operated with mixed gas at the set O2 Compare the current measured values for minute
concentration. Small deviations in the inspiratory and tidal volumes with the measured values before
O2 concentration of up to ±4 Vol% are possible. To nebulization.
avoid greater deviations, Evita V300 automatically
If the VT and MV values differ significantly, the
switches off medication nebulization at inspiratory
ventilation pressure can be used for assessment of
flows below 14 L/min.
the ventilation. VT and MV values can be assessed
by comparing the difference between PEEP and
Using a pneumatic medication nebulizer in the plateau pressure before and during nebulization.
Ped. pat. patient category (with Infinity ID flow
In order to avoid false alarms and ensure
sensor)
monitoring:
Medication nebulization is possible in the pressure-
 Adjust both alarm limits for MVe in line with the
controlled ventilation modes. In volume-controlled
current value.
ventilation modes, nebulization is only possible
while using the AutoFlow ventilation mode  Use additional monitoring, e.g., external SpO2,
extension. if necessary.
The medication nebulizer nebulizes continuously.
The aerosol generated during expiration does not
reach the lungs, however.
If Evita V300 is supplied with Air and O2 from the
nebulizer is operated with mixed gas at the set O2
concentration. Small deviations in the inspiratory

Operation
Using a pneumatic medication nebulizer in the Installing the medication nebulizer into
Neo. and Ped. pat. patient categories (with the breathing circuit
neonatal flow sensor)
Medication nebulization is possible in the pressure- For use in the Adult patient category
controlled ventilation modes. In the Ped. pat.
patient category, medication nebulization is also
possible in volume-controlled ventilation modes in B
conjunction with AutoFlow.
The medication nebulizer nebulizes continuously.
The aerosol generated during expiration does not C
reach the lungs, however. A
If Evita V300 is supplied with Air and O2 from the
065
nebulizer is operated with mixed gas at the set O2 1 Connect the medication nebulizer (A) to the
concentration. Small deviations in the inspiratory inspiratory side of the Y-piece.
O2 concentration of up to ±4 Vol% are possible. For 2 Connect the inspiratory hose (B) to the
respiratory rates above 12/min, refer to the graph medication nebulizer.
on page 349.
3 Place the medication nebulizer in the vertical
In order to avoid false alarms and ensure position.
monitoring:
4 Using clamps, run the nebulizer hose (C) back
 Use additional monitoring, e.g., external SpO2, to Evita V300 along the inspiratory hose.
if necessary.
For use in the Ped. pat. and Neo. patient

Preparing the pneumatic medication categories
nebulizer
F E D
Only use pneumatic medication nebulizer 8412935
(with white body core). If other pneumatic
medication nebulizers are used, there may be
major deviations in tidal volume and inspiratory O2
concentration!
024
CAUTION 1 Insert the catheter connector (D) in the inlet port

If medication nebulization is performed using an of the medication nebulizer.
incorrect medication chamber, there is a danger 2 Insert the adapter (E) in the outlet port of the
of considerable deviations in the tidal and minute medication nebulizer.
volumes.
3 Fit the corrugated hose (F), length 0.13 m
 Prepare the medication nebulizer in accordance (5.1 in) to the adapter (E).
with the corresponding instructions for use.

Operation
When using without incubator

F D G
025
4 Remove the corrugated hose of the breathing
circuit (G) from the inspiratory port of the
Y-piece and connect it to the catheter connector
(D).
322
5 Connect the free end of the corrugated hose (F) 1 Press the inlet port or the outlet port of the
to the inspiratory port of the Y-piece. medication nebulizer into one side of the clip
and the expiratory hose into the other.
Additional information 2 Place the medication nebulizer in the vertical
position.
The catheter connector (D) and adapter (E) can be
ordered under order number 8411031, see the list
of accessories. Connecting the nebulizer hose
WARNING
When using on the incubator
The nebulizer port (H) must be used for
nebulization only! Otherwise the proper
functioning of the device may be disrupted
and the patient endangered.
 Connect the nebulizer hose (I) to the nebulizer

port (H).
321
 Push the inlet port or the outlet port of the

medication nebulizer into the upper hose guide
of the incubator.
I
064

Operation
 Fill the medication nebulizer in accordance with Special maneuvers

the corresponding instructions for use. A
CAUTION
Check the correct functioning of the medication C D
nebulizer. Check whether aerosol is generated. A
medication nebulizer fault is not detected by
Evita V300.
323_V300
Switching on medication nebulization  Touch the Off button (D) and confirm with the
rotary knob.
main menu bar.
Removing the neonatal flow sensor from the
2 Touch the Nebulization tab (A). breathing circuit
Special maneuvers In the instruction field (E) Evita V300 requests the
A user to remove the neonatal flow sensor from the
breathing circuit.
B ∞
Special maneuvers
A
086_V300
E
3 Touch the button for the desired nebulization
time (B).
327_V300
Nebulization can be set to 5, 10, 15, or 30 minutes
or to continuous nebulization. WARNING
In the Adult and Ped. pat. patient categories (with Risk of fire
Infinity ID flow sensor), the nebulization starts. See
The measuring wires of the neonatal flow
"During medication nebulization" on page 121.
sensor are very hot and may ignite deposits of
Additional operating steps are necessary when medication aerosols during nebulization.
using the neonatal flow sensor. – Before medication nebulization, remove
the complete ISO 15 neonatal flow sensor,
or remove the sensor insert from the
Deactivating flow monitoring with neonatal flow
neonatal flow sensor Y-piece and insert a
sensor
sealing plug.
When the neonatal flow sensor is used, Evita V300 – Use additional monitoring since otherwise
requests the user in the instruction field (C) to the minute volume is not monitored and
switch off flow monitoring. apnea monitoring is limited.

Operation
When using the neonatal flow sensor Y-piece  Replace or clean the neonatal flow sensor if
(8410185): there is visible soiling. See "Dismantling the
neonatal flow sensor" on page 246.
After removing the neonatal flow sensor
Special maneuvers
F
G
L
306
1 Disconnect plug (F) of the flow sensor cable
from the neonatal flow sensor (G).
327_V300
 Touch the Done button (L).
H
I During medication nebulization
Evita V300 starts nebulization. The symbol
and the remaining nebulization time is displayed in
the screen header bar.
Evita V300 automatically switches off the
medication nebulizer after the set nebulization time
305
has elapsed.
2 Remove the insert (H).
A message indicating that nebulization has been
3 Insert the sealing plug (I) (8411024).
ended appears in the screen header bar.
The sealing plug is a component of the
medication nebulizer.
When using the neonatal flow sensor ISO 15
(8411130): In the Ped. pat. patient category (with neonatal flow
sensor), further medication nebulization begins
when the nebulization time is entered, if flow
monitoring with neonatal flow sensor has already
been switched off.
In the Neo. patient category, removal of the
neonatal flow sensor must be confirmed again.
J
K
304
1 Remove the flow sensor (J) from the tube and

the Y-piece.
2 Connect the tube (K) to the Y-piece.

Operation
During continuous medication nebulization Required steps after medication

The Continuous nebulization in progress. nebulization
message is displayed in the screen header bar.
After medication nebulization in the Adult patient
Medication nebulization is interrupted every category, the Infinity ID flow sensor is automatically
30 minutes and the flow sensor is calibrated. cleaned by heating and calibrated.
After the flow sensor has been calibrated,
medication nebulization is continued. 1 Remove any residual medication. Observe the
instructions for use of the medication nebulizer.
When continuous medication nebulization is used
in the Neo. or Ped. pat. patient category and the 2 If a bacterial filter is used to protect the
neonatal flow sensor has therefore been removed, expiratory valve, exchange or remove the
medication nebulization is not interrupted. bacterial filter.
If the parameter field for continuous nebulization When using the neonatal flow sensor, the following
Cont. neb. has been configured for display, the steps are also required:
duration of medication nebulization is displayed. 3 Reconnect the neonatal flow sensor.
When using the neonatal flow sensor Y-piece
Aborting medication nebulization (8410185):
 Remove the sealing plug and push the
Special maneuvers insert back in.
 Reconnect plug of the flow sensor cable.
A When using the neonatal flow sensor ISO 15
(8411130):
 Re-insert the neonatal flow sensor in the
Y-piece.
343_V300
4 Activate flow monitoring with neonatal flow

sensor, see page 165.
 Touch the Cancel button (A). 5 Calibrate the neonatal flow sensor,
see page 161.
The Nebulization maneuver can be configured as
a Nebulization button in the main menu bar to
enable direct access. See "Assigning functions to
The Nebulization button is located in the quick
access bar.
Nebulization may lead to increased deposits.
Consequently, it may be necessary to change the
following compnents more often:
– Flow sensor
– Expiratory valve

Operation
Fitting the Aeroneb nebulizer After nebulization with Aeroneb

1 If a bacterial filter is used to protect the
 Observe the instructions for use of the Aeroneb expiratory valve, exchange or remove the
nebulizer. bacterial filter.
 Observe the "Safety information for the use of 2 Calibrate the Infinity ID flow sensor,
HMEs, bacterial filters, and breathing circuits" see page 163. Aerosols distort the flow
on page 61. measurement!
 Observe the "Safety information on medication When using the neonatal flow sensor, the following
nebulization" on page 116. steps are also required:
 Do not switch on the Nebulization maneuver 3 Reconnect the neonatal flow sensor.
on Evita V300 as the Aeroneb nebulizer does
not require a nebulizer flow from Evita V300. When using the neonatal flow sensor Y-piece
(8410185):
Before nebulization with Aeroneb  Remove the sealing plug and push the
insert back in.
When using the neonatal flow sensor, the following
steps are also required:  Reconnect plug of the flow sensor cable.
1 Deactivate flow monitoring with neonatal flow When using the neonatal flow sensor ISO 15
sensor, see page 165. (8411130):
2 Remove the neonatal flow sensor from the  Re-insert the neonatal flow sensor in the
breathing circuit, see page 120. Y-piece.
4 Activate flow monitoring with neonatal flow
WARNING
sensor, see page 165.
Risk of fire
5 Calibrate the neonatal flow sensor,
The measuring wires of the neonatal flow see page 161.
sensor are very hot and may ignite deposits of
medication aerosols during nebulization.
– Before medication nebulization, remove Additional information
the complete ISO 15 neonatal flow sensor,  For the order number of the Aeroneb nebulizer,
or remove the sensor insert from the see the list of accessories.
neonatal flow sensor Y-piece and insert a
sealing plug.
– Use additional monitoring since otherwise
the minute volume is not monitored and
apnea monitoring is limited.

Operation
Diagnostics – measurement maneuver
Overview Starting the measurement maneuver

Evita V300 permits the following measurement main menu bar.
maneuvers on the Diagnostics page:
– Occlusion pressure – P0.1 2 Touch the Diagnostics tab (A).
– Intrinsic PEEP – PEEPi 3 Touch the P0.1 tab (B) if the page is not already
– Negative Inspiratory Force – NIF preset.
The measurement maneuvers are not available in
Special maneuvers
the Neo. patient category.
A
For a detailed description of the measurement
maneuvers, see chapter "Diagnostics – D E B
C
measurement maneuver" on page 351.
C
F
The Diagnostics page can be configured as the C
Diagnostics button in the main menu bar for direct
G
access. The individual diagnostic functions can be C
117_V300
configured for direct access as P0.1, PEEPi and
NIF buttons in the main menu bar. See "Assigning
Evita V300 displays the P0.1 values of the
4 previous measurements (C).
The P0.1, PEEPi and NIF buttons are located in the
quick access bar.
Performing a measurement manually
Occlusion pressure – P0.1 2 Confirm with the rotary knob.
Evita V300 starts the P0.1 measurement with the
General next spontaneous inspiration.
The occlusion pressure P0.1 characterizes the
negative pressure during a short occlusion Cancel measurement
(0.1 seconds) at the start of spontaneous
inspiration.  Touch the Cancel button (E).
This measurement maneuver can be used in all

ventilation modes at regular intervals in order to
check the respiratory drive of a spontaneously
breathing patient or to assess the amount of
spontaneous breathing during controlled
ventilation.

Operation
Using automatic P0.1 measurement Evita V300 displays the following values for the
4 previous measurements (C):
1 Touch the On button (F).
– PEEPi (intrinsic PEEP)
2 Set the time interval. Touch the button for the – incl. PEEP (intrinsic PEEP taking the set PEEP
time interval (G). Set the value by turning the into account)
rotary knob and push to confirm. – Vtrap
– Date and time of the measurement
The remaining time until the next measurement is
displayed. 4 Touch the Start button (D) and confirm with the
rotary knob.
To observe the therapy success, record the
measured value P0.1 as a trend. Evita V300 starts the PEEPi measurement.
The measurement can be aborted with Cancel (E).
Intrinsic PEEP – PEEPi
General
Intrinsic PEEP is the actual end-expiratory
pressure inside the lungs.
This special procedure can be performed in all
ventilation modes. Breathing activity by the patient
during this maneuver can distort the measured
values.
Starting the measurement maneuver

main menu bar.
2 Touch the Diagnostics tab (A).
3 Touch the PEEPi tab (B).
Special maneuvers
A
D E
B
C
118_V300

Operation
Negative Inspiratory Force – NIF
General
The Negative Inspiratory Force Index (NIF)
measures a patient's maximum inspiratory effort
after exhaling. The breathing circuit is closed during
measurement of the NIF. The NIF value is also
known as the Maximum Inspiratory Pressure (MIP).
As a result of the inspiratory effort during manual
expiration, the patient generates a negative
pressure in relation to PEEP. Evita V300
determines the NIF value during manual expiration.
Starting the measurement maneuver

main menu bar.
2 Touch the Diagnostics tab (A).
3 Touch the NIF tab (B).
Special maneuvers
A
D
C
B
C
C
119_V300
Evita V300 displays the NIF values of the last

measurements, including the time and date (C).
4 Touch and hold the Exp. hold button (D) for the
desired expiratory time. Expiration is ended by
Evita V300 after a maximum of 45 seconds in
the Adult patient category and 30 seconds in
the Ped. pat. patient category.

Operation
In order to ensure continuous Air supply, Switching on the gas supply unit for
Evita V300 can be equipped with the GS500 gas intrahospital patient transport
supply unit. If Evita V300 is connected to the central
gas supply system, GS500 ensures the supply of
main menu bar.
Air to the device in the case of failure of the central
gas supply system and during intrahospital patient 2 Touch the Transport tab (A).
transport.
3 Touch the On button (B).
Special maneuvers
Installing the bacterial filter A
B C
325_V300
A 4 Pull out the probe of the Air compressed gas
hose from the wall terminal unit of the central
gas supply system.
342
If the probe of the Air compressed gas hose has not

 Fit the bacterial filter (A) onto the inspiratory been pulled out within 5 minutes of the gas supply
port. unit being switched on, Evita V300 switches off the
gas supply unit.
5 Pull the probe of the O2 compressed gas hose
Using the gas supply unit
out from the wall terminal unit of the central gas
supply system and provide a replacement O2
Prerequisite: Functionality of the gas supply unit is
supply if necessary.
activated, see "Configuring supply units"
on page 204.
Switching off the gas supply unit
If Evita V300 is not connected to the central gas
supply system, GS500 starts the supply of Air  Touch the Off button (C).
automatically.
In the event of failure of the central Air supply, or if Additional information
the probe of the Air compressed gas hose becomes
 Deactivating functionality of the gas supply unit,
detached from the wall terminal unit of the central
see "Configuring supply units" on page 204.
gas supply system, Evita V300 displays an alarm
message. The gas supply unit starts the supply of
Air using GS500 after 4 seconds at the latest.

Operation
O2 therapy
Safety information for O2 therapy Preparing O2 therapy
During O2 therapy, only the O2 concentration and

Attaching breathing hoses
the inspiratory pressure are monitored.
WARNING
CAUTION
Do not use antistatic or conductive breathing
Only use oxygen masks for the O2 therapy. Do not
hoses. The use of these materials increases
use masks for non-invasive ventilation (NIV). Use
the risk of electric shock to the patient and of
of unsuitable masks may jeopardize the patient.
fire in an oxygen-enriched environment.
CAUTION
Internal monitoring is deactivated. Airway Preparing a system with a Fisher & Paykel MR
pressure and ventilation parameters, e.g., flow, 850 breathing gas humidifier
minute volume or apnea are not monitored. Use
external SpO2 monitoring for patients who are
dependent on an increased defined O2
concentration. Otherwise a worsening of the
A
patient's condition cannot be detected.
NOTE
If the pressure needed for the set flow exceeds
30 mbar (30 cmH2O), the device issues an alarm
and the safety valve is opened. The cause may be
B
a kinked breathing hose or a blocked mask or B
nasal cannula. 037
Observe the specified flows and sizes of the

1 Hang the hinged arm (A) on the rail and tighten
particular accessories.
the screws. Depending on the desired position
of the device in relation to the bed, the hinged
arm can be fitted to either side of the device.
2 Fit the breathing hoses (B) for inspiration.
The expiratory ports on the device and on the
Y-piece remain open!
3 Switch on Evita V300. See page 74.
4 Switch Evita V300 to standby. See page 131.
5 Activate O2 monitoring. See page 166.
The alarm limits for VT, MVe, RR, Paw, Tapn are
not active. The alarm limits for O2 monitoring are
automatically set by the device.

Operation
Switching on O2 therapy O2 therapy is switched on. Evita V300 displays the

main screen with the therapy bar (E) for O2 therapy.
O2 therapy can only be switched on in standby The message O2 Therapy is displayed in the
mode. header bar (F).
1 Touch the Start/ Standby... button in the main F
menu bar.
Evita V300 opens the Start/Standby dialog 1 2 3
window. The Start/Standby page (A) appears by

default.
2 Touch the Standby button (B) and confirm with
the rotary knob.
Evita V300 is in standby mode.
109_V300
Start/Standby D E
A
B During O2 therapy, the screen display on the main
screen cannot be customized.
C
108
3 Touch the O2 Therapy button (C).

The message field (D) displays the information to
use specific masks for O2 therapy.
4 Connect the mask for the O2 therapy.

Operation
Setting FiO2 and flow for O2 therapy
1 2 3
A B
109_V300
D
1 Touch the corresponding therapy control in the
therapy bar:
– FiO2 (A)
– Flow (B)
push to confirm.
The FiO2 concentration is represented graphically
(C).
Setting O2 and flow in the dialog window

The O2 and flow can also be set in the Ventilation
settings dialog window.
 Touch the Ventilation settings... button.
Or
 Touch the button (D).
Switching off O2 therapy
1 Touch the Start/ Standby... button.

Evita V300 opens the Start/Standby dialog
window. The Start/Standby page is displayed by
default.
2 Touch the Standby button and confirm with the
rotary knob.
Evita V300 is in standby mode. O2 therapy is
switched off. The therapy type can be switched to
ventilation.

Operation
Standby mode
Switch to standby mode for the following actions: The message Standby mode activated is
– Keep Evita V300 ready for operation while the displayed in the header bar.
patient is absent
3 Touch the ALARM RESET button in the header
– Change the therapy type between ventilation
bar and confirm with the rotary knob.
and O2 therapy
– Change the patient category Evita V300 is in standby mode. Standby is
– Change the application mode displayed in field (C).
– Perform the device and breathing circuit check
– Query the status of accessories
– Switch off Evita V300
1 2 3
WARNING
Ventilation does not take place in standby C
mode! The device must only be set to standby
mode when no patient is connected to the
device. The patient may otherwise be
jeopardized.
363_V300
Activating standby mode

menu bar.
Evita V300 opens the Start/Standby dialog
window. The Start/Standby page (A) appears
by default.
Start/Standby
A
B
367
2 Touch the Standby button (B) and confirm with

the rotary knob.

Operation
Continuing the therapy
1 Check the ventilation settings (A) of the current

patient.
Change the ventilation settings if necessary. Touch
the Ventilation settings button (B). Evita V300
opens the corresponding page.
Start/Standby
A A
B
367
2 Touch the Start ventilation button (C) and

The main screen is displayed; Evita V300
continues ventilating.
If the patient category or the body weight is
changed, Evita V300 determines new start-up
values for ventilation. See "Admitting a new patient"
on page 75.
For information on changing ventilation settings,
see "Setting ventilation" on page 96.

Operation
Ending operation
1 Switch Evita V300 to standby mode: Touch the As soon as the screen is completely dark
Start/ Standby... button in the main menu bar.
 Disconnect the mains plug from the mains
Touch the Standby button and confirm with the
power socket.
rotary knob.
 Pull the probe of the Air compressed gas hose
and the probe of the O2 compressed gas hose
out from the wall terminal units of the central
gas supply system.
CAUTION
Disconnect the compressed gas hoses from the
central gas supply system. Otherwise minute
internal leaks could contaminate the central gas
supply system through the reverse flow of supply
gases.
A
If Evita V300 cannot be switched off on account
361
of a device malfunction
2 Press the key (A) on Infinity C300.
1 Open the device flap on the left side of
Evita V300 opens the Shut down device dialog.
Evita V300.
Shut down device 2 Set the toggle switch to (off).
Once the toggle switch has been pressed and the
mains plug is disconnected, Evita V300 cannot be
B C switched on.
Placing back into operation

1 Insert the mains plug into the mains power
114
socket.
3 Touch the OK button (B) and confirm with the
2 Open the device flap on the left side of
rotary knob.
Evita V300.
Evita V300 ends operation.
3 Set the toggle switch to (on).
To return to standby mode:
4 Switch on Evita V300: Press the key on
 Touch the Cancel button (C). Infinity C300.
When Evita V300 is not in standby mode and the
key (A) is pressed, the Start/Standby page is
opened.

Operation
Disconnecting the device from the mains

voltage
In the event of device malfunctions or other

hazards, the device must be completely
disconnected from the mains voltage.
When the toggle switch is at (off), only parts of
the device are disconnected from the mains
voltage. The batteries continue to be charged. To
completely disconnect the device from the mains
voltage, unplug the mains plug.
Storing Evita V300
Switch Evita V300 to energy-saving mode if storing

for longer periods.
1 End operation. See "Ending operation"
on page 133.
2 Set the toggle switch on the left side of
Evita V300 to (off) immediately after
switching off the device.
3 Disconnect the mains plug from the mains
power socket.

Operation
Mains power supply / DC power supply
Components and terms Display of power supplies

The power supply is displayed on the Infinity C300
Mains power supply operating and display unit.
The device is supplied with mains power via the
power cable. Information on voltage ranges and
mains power characteristic values can be found in
chapter Technical Data, Operating data.
Internal battery
The internal battery is supplied with the device. A B
358
PS500 power supply unit A LED for mains power:
In addition to the internal battery, the device can – Lights green when mains power is applied
optionally be equipped with the PS500 power and the toggle switch is in the position.
supply unit. – If the LED does not light up, the device is
disconnected from the mains power.
B LED for the internal battery:
Use of power supplies – Lights green when the battery charge is
greater than approx. 90 %.
The device is supplied with electric power from the – Lights yellow when the battery charge is
following sources in the order stated: between approx. 10 % and 90 %.
– Mains power – Does not light if the internal battery is faulty,
– Batteries in the PS500 (if present) discharged or device is switched off with the
– Internal battery toggle switch (energy-saving mode).
The switch-over between these sources takes
NOTE
place without interruption to operation according to
the following rules: The LED indicates only the battery charge
– If the mains voltage is sufficient, the power is of the internal battery, even when the PS500 is
supplied from the mains. present.
– If the mains voltage is not sufficient or during a
battery check, the power is supplied from the
batteries.

Operation
Battery operation Battery charging
Alarm messages during battery operation

Switch-over to the batteries is indicated with the
alarm message Battery activated. The alarm
priority can be configured, see "Setting the priority A B C
373
of the battery alarms" on page 186. The batteries are charged when the device is
Alarm messages are displayed corresponding to supplied with mains voltage. The symbol (A) is
the remaining battery capacity in order to warn displayed in the screen header bar.
against the complete discharge of the battery. The batteries are charged in the following order:
Alarm messages, see chapter "Alarm – Cause – – Internal battery
Remedy." – Batteries in the PS500 (if present)
 Reestablish the mains power supply
immediately to avoid interruption of the Charging times
ventilation functions.
For information on the charging times,
When battery supply is no longer needed, recharge see page 297.
the batteries, see chapter "Battery charging".
Battery charge indication on the screen

Operating time during battery operation
The battery charge is indicated by the symbol (B) in
The operating time depends on the following the header bar on the screen. The battery charge
battery factors: indication applies to both charging and discharging.
– Age When the batteries are being charged, the last
– Utilization (frequency, duration, and power segment in the battery symbol flashes white.
consumption)
– Battery charge Symbol Battery charge
– Ambient temperature
90 to 100 %
For operating times when batteries are fully
60 to <90 %
charged and new, and ventilation is typical, see
chapters "Battery ageing" on page 363 and 40 to <60 %
"Batteries" on page 296. 20 to <40 %
Observe the maintenance intervals. <20 %, flashes light and dark red in
1-second pulses
Batteries faulty or no information
available on the battery charge
The battery charge indication applies to both

charging and discharging.
The battery charge indication always shows the
total battery charge that is available. If there is a
PS500 present, the battery charge available from
the internal battery and the PS500 will be
displayed.

Operation
A flashing symbol (C) indicates the following: Care and maintenance of the batteries
– The battery check is running.
– The interval for the battery check has expired. Take note of the following to limit premature ageing
– The last battery check failed. of the battery:
– Battery replacement is recommended. – Operate the device under the stated ambient
conditions
Battery parameter field – Avoid storing the device with discharged or
partially discharged batteries
In addition to the battery charge indication, the – Connect the device to the mains power supply
Battery parameter field can be configured. after battery operation
– Avoid shocks and vibrations
Battery – Perform the recommended battery checks
A
PS500
B
C
Internal
D
375
The Battery parameter field contains the following

information:
– PS500 (if present)
– Operating time in minutes (value
corresponds to the operating time when the
battery is used at the present power
consumption) (A)
– Battery charge in percent (B)
– Internal (internal battery)
– Operating time in minutes (value
corresponds to the operating time when the
battery is used at the present power
consumption) (C)
– Battery charge in percent (D)
NOTE
Ageing and use of the batteries can result in a
shorter operating time compared with new
batteries.
Depending on the battery used, the battery
charge is indicated to the nearest 5 or 10 minutes.
It is always the minimum calculated operating
time that is displayed.

Operation
Intrahospital patient transport
WARNING When transporting a patient within the hospital, the

user must ensure that the patient is monitored at all
Do not tilt the device by more than 10°. Failure
times.
to observe this may result in the device
toppling over. Danger of damage to device or When transporting the patient within the hospital,
personal injury! grasp the trolley handle firmly and push the device
in longitudinal direction.
WARNING
The device must not be placed on the bed Using Evita V300 with a safety bar
while transferring a patient within the hospital.
The device could topple over or fall down. CAUTION
Danger of damage to device or personal During intrahospital patient transport, Evita V300
injury! must be used with a safety bar (A) in order to
prevent accidental disconnection of the breathing
WARNING hoses or damage to the inspiratory port and the
Do not lean, press, push or pull against the expiratory port.
trolley above the marking points on the trolley.
The trolley could topple over.
WARNING
Do not move trolley faster than at a walking
pace. There is an increased danger of the
trolley toppling over at thresholds, uneven
surfaces and ramps. Reduce the speed of
transport further. Danger of damage to
equipment!
A
020
WARNING
Two people are always required to move the
device. Otherwise there is an increased risk of Increasing the toppling stability during
the device toppling over. intrahospital patient transport
To ensure that the equipment cannot topple over,
WARNING the accessories must be moved to the most
Make sure to securely hold onto the handle of advantageous position:
the trolley whenever moving or positioning 1 Hinged arm set to minimum deflection.
the device. Otherwise there is an increased
risk of the device toppling over. 2 Hoses and cables hooked as close as possible
to the trolley.
WARNING 3 Humidifier secured to the trolley, not to the
Patient hazard due to discharged batteries. lateral rails of Evita V300.
Only start transporting patients when the
batteries are sufficiently charged.

Operation
Air supply from the GS500 gas supply unit, see
"GS500 gas supply unit" on page 127.
Power supply, see "Mains power supply / DC power
supply" on page 135.
For the order number of the safety bar, see the list
of accessories.


Alarms
Alarms
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Display of alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Alarm priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Optical alarm signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Acoustic alarm signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Displaying information on alarms. . . . . . . . . 144

Displaying current alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Displaying the cause and remedy for an
alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Acknowledging an alarm message that is no
longer active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Acknowledging all alarm messages that are
no longer active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Alarm history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Setting alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

How to set an alarm limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Deactivating alarm limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Response to power failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Display of alarm limits in the parameter field . . 147
Setting the volume of the alarm tone . . . . . . 148
Suppressing the alarm tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Position of the user to the alarm system . . . 149
Failure of the acoustic alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Alarms
Overview
Alarms are issued acoustically and visually.

The alarm tone can be suppressed for 2 minutes.
The Alarms dialog window provides the following
functions for selection:
– Setting alarm limits
– Displaying current alarms
– Alarm history
– Alarm settings
Display of alarms
In the event of an alarm, the system displays the

relevant alarm message in the alarm message field
(A). If the parameter field (B) is configured to
display an individual parameter, the parameter field
(B) of the parameter triggering the alarm flashes.
The alarm bar (D) flashes in the color of the
corresponding alarm priority.
C A
1 2 3
B
376_V300
If the alarm message field (A) contains more alarms

than can be displayed, the More... button (C)
appears in the header bar. Touching this button
opens the page containing all the active alarms.

Alarms
Alarm priorities
A certain priority, indicating the urgency, is

assigned to each alarm.
The following table shows the differences between
the alarm priorities with respect to identification and
the action required.
Alarm priority Identification Action required

High Red !!! Immediate action is necessary in order to avert an acute danger
Medium Yellow !! Prompt action is necessary in order to avert a danger
Low Turquoise ! Attention is necessary, but a delayed response is sufficient
Optical alarm signals
The following optical alarm signals are displayed in

the event of an alarm.
Alarm priority
High Medium Low
Alarm message field Alarm message on a red Alarm message on a Alarm message on a
background yellow background turquoise background
Parameter field Flashes red Flashes yellow –
Alarm bar Flashes red Flashes yellow –
If several alarms occur at the same time, the two

most urgent alarms are displayed first.
High-priority alarm messages that are no longer
active are displayed in the background color of the
alarm message field.
In the tables for Current alarms and Alarm history
the priority of the alarm messages is also indicated
by exclamation marks.
Acoustic alarm signals
Evita V300 generates different alarm tone

sequences to indicate alarms acoustically. The
alarm tone sequences can be configured, see
"Selecting alarm tone sequences" on page 186.

Alarms
Displaying information on alarms
Displaying current alarms Acknowledging an alarm message that

is no longer active
To display the current alarms, proceed as follows:
1 Touch the alarm message in the header bar. After the fault has been eliminated, the alarm tone
is silenced. Medium- and low-priority alarm
Or messages expire automatically. High-priority alarm
1 Touch the Alarms... button in the main menu messages continue to be displayed for information
bar. after the cause of the alarm has been eliminated
and need to be acknowledged.
2 Touch the Current alarms tab (A).
A
Alarms C
A 1 2 3
078_V300
B 1 Touch the ALARM RESET button (A) in the
header bar.
082
Acknowledging all alarm messages that

All the current alarm messages are displayed are no longer active
chronologically with the corresponding duration,
priority and alarm message text in the list (B). Prerequisite: The Current alarms page (A) is
open.
Displaying the cause and remedy for an Alarms

alarm A
B
1 Touch the alarm message or select it in the list
(B) with the rotary knob.
2 Touch the (C) button.
This displays the cause and remedy for the alarm
message selected.
082
3 Eliminate the fault.

1 Touch the Reset all button (B).
Additional information 2 Confirm with the rotary knob.
For a list of causes and remedies, see chapter The acknowledgeable messages are deleted in the
"Alarm – Cause – Remedy" on page 205. header bar and in the list containing the current
alarms. However, Evita V300 records all alarm
messages in the alarm history.

Alarms
Alarm history
The alarm history records all alarm messages in

chronological order.
The entries in the alarm history are also retained
after the device has been switched off and on again
or following a power supply failure.
The alarm history is part of the logbook. The length
of the alarm history depends on the number of
logbook entries.
When the logbook reaches its maximum size, the
oldest entry in the logbook is deleted as each new
entry is logged.
Switching the device off and on are not recorded in
the logbook.
1 Touch the Alarms... button in the main menu
bar.
2 Touch the Alarm history tab (A).
Alarms
A
B
094
3 Use the buttons (B) to scroll in the alarm history.

Alarms
Setting alarm limits
 Touch the Alarms... button in the main menu Additional information

bar.
The start-up values for the alarm limits can be
The Limits page (A) appears by default. configured specifically as required by the hospital
concerned, see page 184.
Alarms
The alarm limits are displayed depending on the
A ventilation parameter in the parameter field.
B
C Deactivating alarm limits
D
WARNING
Alarms must only be deactivated if the safety
of the patient is not jeopardized by the
096
The alarm limit settings and the current measured absence of an alarm!
value are displayed.
The following alarm limits can be deactivated:
(B) : Upper alarm limit
Patient Invasive Non-invasive
(C) Current value : Current measured value category ventilation ventilation
(D) : Lower alarm limit Adult RR high MV low
VT high RR high
VT low Tapn
How to set an alarm limit – VT high
Prerequisite: The Limits page (A) is open. – VT low

Ped. pat. RR high MV low
1 Touch the corresponding button for the alarm
limit. VT high RR high
2 Set the value by turning the rotary knob and VT low Tapn
push to confirm. – VT high
– VT low
WARNING
The alarm limits must be set to meet the needs Neo. MV low –
of the therapy required by the current patient. RR high RR high
The patient may otherwise be jeopardized.
Tapn Tapn
Setting extreme alarm limits can render the
alarm system useless. VT high –
VT low –

Alarms
How to deactivate an alarm limit

1 Touch the corresponding button for the alarm
limit.
2 Continue turning the rotary knob until Off is
displayed instead of the value.
The alarm limit is deactivated. Evita V300 displays
the symbol in the header bar and the
deactivated alarm limit. The header bar can display
up to 5 deactivated alarm limits.
Response to power failure
Alarm limits are also retained in the event of a

power failure, e.g., caused by a defective internal
battery.
Display of alarm limits in the parameter

field
If the alarm limits are assigned to a ventilation

parameter, the alarm limits are displayed in the
parameter fields for single parameters (standard
and double size).
The following assignments have been defined:
Alarm limits Measured values

MV high, MV low MVe
VT high, VT low VT, VTi
Paw high PIP
RR high RR

Alarms
Setting the volume of the alarm tone
WARNING Additional information

Unnoticed alarms in loud environments The Settings page can be configured for direct
access into the main menu bar as the Alarm
Alarm situations are not recognized.
volume button. See "Assigning functions to
Set the volume of the alarm tone so that additional buttons" on page 181.
alarms can be heard.
The Alarm volume button is located in the quick
access bar.
1 Touch the Alarms... button in the main menu
bar.
2 Touch the Settings tab (A).
Alarms
A
B
095
3 Touch the (B) button.

4 Set the volume of the alarm tone by turning the
rotary knob and push to confirm.
During the automatic switch-over between day and
night modes, the alarm tone volume setting is
overwritten by the volumes defined for these times.
An automatic increase in volume can be activated.
See "Setting the alarm tone" on page 186.
The lower value for the volume of the alarm tone is
limited by the configured minimum volume of the
alarm tone. The minimum volume can be
configured on the System setup > Alarms >
Alarm vol./tone page, see "Setting the alarm tone"
on page 186.

Alarms
Suppressing the alarm tone
The alarm tone can be suppressed for a maximum  Press the (Audio paused) key (A).
of 2 minutes.
This suppresses the acoustic alarm for 2 minutes.
Evita V300 displays the symbol in the header
bar and the remaining time for the suppressed
alarm tone.
If an alarm with a higher priority appears during this
time, the alarm tone sounds once.
If the fault triggering the alarm is not eliminated
after 2 minutes, the alarm tone sounds again.
Reactivate the alarm tone before the suppression
time has elapsed:
 Press the (Audio paused) key (A) again.
A
362
Position of the user to the alarm system
The optical alarm signals are designed as follows:

– At a distance of 4 m (157 in) it is possible to
recognize which device is generating an alarm.
– At a distance of 1 m (39 in) the alarm message
can be read clearly.
The alarm volume can be set so that the acoustic
alarm signals can be heard in the vicinity of the
device, see "Setting the alarm tone" on page 186.

Alarms
Failure of the acoustic alarm
If the loudspeaker for acoustic alarm signaling

(main alarm) fails on account of a defect, an
intermittent tone will be generated by the
loudspeaker for the auxiliary alarm.
This intermittent tone is also used for the power
failure alarm.
Additional information on the power failure

alarm
See "Failure of the power supply" on page 68.

Trends and data
Trends and data
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Displaying trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Graphic trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Apnea trend, apnea ventilation trend . . . . . . . . 154
Tabular trend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Displaying data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Displaying hospital-specific data . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Displaying all measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Displaying set values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Displaying the logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Data export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Trends and data
Overview
Evita V300 saves measured value and trend data. The Trends/Data dialog window provides the
Trends are displayed in the form of a graphic or a following functions for selection:
table. The following can be displayed: current – Display trends
measured values, settings and hospital-specific – Display data
combinations of measured and set values. The – Logbook
logbook can save up to a maximum of 5000 entries. – Data export
Data can be exported with a USB storage medium.
Displaying trends
Trends are displayed as a graphic or a table. Displaying an additional graphic trend

Trends are recorded for up to 7 days.
Prerequisite: The Trends page (A) is open.
In graphic trends, measured values are displayed
 Touch the Graphics 2 tab (C).
in blue and set values in green. In the apnea trend,
the number of the apneic events that occurred per Each page contains 2 graphic trend displays (D).
minute is represented as a histogram.
In tabular trends, measured values are displayed in
blue lettering and set values in green lettering.
Graphic trends
1 Touch the Trends/Data... button in the main

menu bar.
Evita V300 opens the Trends page (A) with the
Graphics 1 page (B).
Trends/Data
A
E B
D C
D E
076

Trends and data
Selecting parameters for the graphic trend The dialog for the group selected is closed.
display
The selected parameters are displayed in the trend
Prerequisite: The Graphics 1 or Graphics 2 page display. The Setup dialog is closed.
is open.
1 Touch the button (E). Deselecting a parameter in the trend display
The Setup dialog is displayed with the buttons for Touch the parameter to be deselected in the
Meas. (F) and Settings (G). parameter type dialog. The button turns pale green.
Setup
Selecting a time interval for the graphic trend
F G display
Prerequisite: The Graphics 1 or Graphics 2 page
is open.
Trends/Data
L
M
138_V300
The measurements (F) are divided into the N

following parameter types:
– Pressures
K
076
– Minute vol. 1 Touch the button for the time interval (K).
– Volume/Flow
– Gases 2 Select the time interval from the selection list
– Timing/Cycl. (2, 4, 8, 12 hours; 1 day, 7 days).
– Others
– Events Displaying the value of a parameter at a certain
The settings (G) are divided into the following moment in time
parameter types:  Position the cursor (L) on the time by turning the
– Pressures rotary knob or touching the time.
– Volume/Flow
– Gases The parameter value and the marked time are
– Timing/Cycl. displayed (M).
– Others The marked time in the trend display also
2 Touch the appropriate button for measurements corresponds with the marked row of this time in the
or settings. logbook.
Another dialog containing all the parameters of the

selected parameter type is displayed. Changing the displayed time period
3 Touch the desired parameter.  Touch the buttons in the scrollbar (N) or turn the
rotary knob.

Trends and data
Apnea trend, apnea ventilation trend
In the apnea trend, the number of the apneic events

that occurred per minute is represented as a
histogram. The number per minute is represented
as a bar height. If an apnea lasts longer than one
minute, the apnea is only counted once in the
period of occurrence.
In the apnea ventilation trend, the system displays
whether or not apnea ventilation is activated.
Prerequisite: The Graphics 1 or Graphics 2 page
is open.
1 Touch the button.
2 In the Setup dialog under Meas., touch the
Events parameter type.
3 Select the Apnea or Apnea Vent.. event.
Trends/Data
B
315
A Apnea trend
B Apnea ventilation trend
The apnea trend is only recorded when apnea
ventilation is switched off.
The duration of an apnea is displayed only in the
alarm history.

Trends and data
Tabular trend Displaying the value of a parameter at a certain

moment in time
Evita V300 displays the trends of all parameters in  Position the cursor (E) on the time by turning
a table. The parameters that are first displayed the rotary knob or touching the time.
correspond with the parameters configured
specifically for the hospital. These are followed by
all measured values, and then all set values. Additional information
1 Touch the Trends/Data... button in the main "Configuring the display of hospital-specific
menu bar. measured values and settings" on page 180.
2 Touch the Table tab (A). The Table page can be configured as the Trends
table button in the main menu bar for direct access.
Trends/Data See "Assigning functions to additional buttons"
on page 181.
B C The Trends table button is located in the quick
F access bar.
A
E F
D
097
The trend values for the parameters (B) with the

units are displayed in 7 to 8 time columns (C). Use
the buttons (F) to scroll in the trend table.
Selecting a time interval for the tabular trend

display
1 Touch the button for the time interval (D).
2 Select the time interval from the selection list
(5, 10, 30 minutes; 1, 2, 6, 12 hours; 1 day).
The tabular trends are available for the following
times according to the selected time interval:
Time interval Availability

5, 10, 30 minutes 1 day
1 hour 2 days
2, 6, 12 hours, 1 day 7 days

Trends and data
Displaying data
The following data can be displayed: Displaying all measured values

– Hospital-specific data
– Measured values 1 Prerequisite: The Values page (A) is open.
– Measured values 2
– Set values  Touch the Values 1 (B) or Values 2 tab (C).
Measured values are displayed on a blue Trends/Data

background and set values on a green background. A
B
Displaying hospital-specific data C
menu bar.
2 Touch the Values tab (A).
Trends/Data
139
A
B
Displaying set values
C C Prerequisite: The Values page (A) is open.

 Touch the Settings tab (B).
Trends/Data
A
099
Evita V300 opens the page containing the current,

hospital-specific measured and set values (B).
B
Evita V300 displays the hospital-specific measured
and set values (C) selected in the system setup.
140
"Configuring the display of hospital-specific

measured values and settings" on page 180.

Trends and data
The Values page can be configured as the Values
button in the main menu bar for direct access. See
"Assigning functions to additional buttons"
on page 181.
The Values button is located in the quick access
bar.
Displaying the logbook
The logbook records changes, events and alarms Displaying the setting parameters at another
in chronological order. A maximum of 5000 logbook moment in time
entries is possible. Events include, for example,
 Select the row by turning the rotary knob or
use of the medication nebulizer or flow calibration.
touching the row.
For alarms only the occurrence of the alarm
condition is recorded, not its termination. With the button (D) the cursor will be moved
backwards or forwards by at least 24 hours.
The entries in the logbook are also retained after
the device has been switched off and on again or
following a power supply failure. Additional information
1 Touch the Trends/Data... button in the main The Logbook page can be configured as the
menu bar. Logbook button in the main menu bar for direct
2 Touch the Logbook tab (A).
Trends/Data The Logbook button is located in the quick access
A bar.
B
D
C
090
Evita V300 opens the logbook. The cursor (B)

marks a row in the logbook. The marked row
corresponds with the cursor position in the trend
display.
For the marked row Evita V300 displays all the set
values of the ventilation mode effective at this time
in the field (C).

Trends and data
Data export
The data export takes place via a USB storage After the data export
medium. A maximum of 5000 logbook entries from
 Remove the USB storage medium from the
the last 7 days can be exported.
USB port after waiting at least 2 seconds.
1 Insert the USB storage medium into the USB
port of Infinity C300.
If data export was not successful
If data export fails owing to the USB storage
menu bar.
medium being full, the buttons are deactivated.
3 Touch the Export data tab (A).
 Remove the USB storage medium from the
Trends/Data H USB port and use a different USB storage
A medium.
I B
C
D The buttons are deactivated when a USB storage
E medium is not connected.
F The exported files can only be viewed with a
G Unicode-enabled editor and a Unicode font.
An import into word processors or spreadsheets is
possible.
127
The following data can be exported:

– Current settings and measured values (B)
– Results obtained from the device check (C)
– Results obtained from the breathing circuit
check (D)
– Logbook 1 day or 7 days (E)
– Alarm history 1 day or 7 days (F)
– Trends 1 day or 7 days (G)
4 Touch the appropriate button for the export of
the related data.
5 For the export of all the data, touch the All data
button (I).
The data is exported to the USB storage medium.
After the successful completion of the data export,
Evita V300 displays a message in the message
field (H).

Monitoring
Monitoring
Information on monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Possible displays for measured values . . . . . . 160
Information on the sensors used . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Flow monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Information on flow monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Calibrating the neonatal flow sensor . . . . . . . . 161
Calibrating the Infinity ID flow sensor . . . . . . . . 163
Deactivating or activating flow monitoring . . . . 164
O2 monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Calibrating the O2 sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Deactivating or activating O2 monitoring . . . . . 166
CO2 monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Information on CO2 monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Selecting the cuvette type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Information on checking the CO2 sensor . . . . . 168
Information on the alarm messages issued
during CO2 monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Checking the CO2 zero indication . . . . . . . . . . 169
Performing a CO2 zero calibration . . . . . . . . . . 169
Checking the calibration of the CO2 sensor
with a test filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Checking the calibration of the CO2 sensor
with test gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Performing the calibration of the CO2 sensor. . 172
Deactivating or activating CO2 monitoring . . . . 173

Monitoring
Information on monitoring
Monitoring is activated at the factory. Each Information on the sensors used

monitoring function can be deactivated separately.
O2 monitoring and flow monitoring are switched on Evita V300 uses the following sensors for
after the device is switched on. In the Ped. pat. measurement and monitoring purposes:
patient category, the flow monitoring is switched on – Neonatal flow sensor in the Neo. and Ped. pat.
according to the flow sensor and expiratory valve patient categories
used. The unused flow monitoring is switched off. – Infinity ID flow sensor in the Adult and Ped.
pat. patient categories
– O2 sensor
– Pressure sensor
Possible displays for measured values
– CO2 sensor
Instead of a measured value, the following displays CAUTION
are possible in the parameter fields or tables:
Regular calibration is essential to ensure that the
Display Cause sensors deliver reliable and accurate results.
Otherwise the proper functioning of the device
Off Monitoring deactivated by user may be impaired.
ERR Sensor error
Automatic calibration of the pressure sensors takes
CAL Calibration active, no measured
place immediately and an hour after the device has
value display possible
been switched on, afterwards every 12 hours.
Measured Reduced sensor accuracy
value? For calibrating or checking the other sensors, see:
– "Calibrating the neonatal flow sensor"
No measured Prerequisites for measurement on page 161
value or calculation currently not met – "Calibrating the Infinity ID flow sensor"
+++ Measured value above specified on page 163
measurement range – "Calibrating the O2 sensor" on page 166
– "Information on checking the CO2 sensor"
--- Measured value below specified
on page 168
measurement range
The calibration or zero-checking values of the
sensors that were last determined remain stored
Display of etCO2 measurements until the next calibration or zero check, even if the
The measured value for etCO2 can be displayed in device is switched off.
Vol%, kPa or mmHg. The display is configurable,
see "Configuring units" on page 201.

Monitoring
Flow monitoring
Information on flow monitoring Flow monitoring in the Ped. pat. patient

category
The following flow sensors are used for flow If the neonatal flow sensor is present and functional
monitoring in accordance with the patient category: in the Ped. pat. patient category, flow monitoring is
performed using that sensor.
Adult Infinity ID flow sensor
If the neonatal flow sensor is faulty or if flow
Ped. pat. Infinity ID flow sensor or
monitoring with the neonatal flow sensor is
neonatal flow sensor
deactivated, flow monitoring is performed using the
Neo. Neonatal flow sensor Infinity ID flow sensor present in Evita V300.
Volume-controlled ventilation continues to be
The measured values for MVe and VTe are not possible.
leakage-corrected and are therefore lower than the
actual minute and tidal volumes applied to the CAUTION
patient if a leakage occurs. When leakage Do not use neonatal flow sensors for bigger
compensation is activated, the measured volume pediatric patients with serious infections and
and flow values as well as the curves for flow and severe coughing. Coughed-up secretions can
volume are displayed with leakage correction. cause corrosion in the neonatal flow sensor. Use
Evita V300 compensates leakages up to 100 % of the Infinity ID flow sensor present in Evita V300
the set tidal volume VT. Pressure-controlled for flow monitoring.
ventilation is recommended in the case of larger
leakages.
Calibrating the neonatal flow sensor
In order to avoid false alarms and assure proper
monitoring, the following settings are required:
Calibration of the neonatal flow sensor corresponds
 Adjust both alarm limits for MVe in line with the to a zero calibration.
current value.
Manual calibration of the neonatal flow sensor is
 Use additional monitoring, e.g., external SpO2, necessary:
if necessary. – During the device check and before use
– At least once a day
– After replacing the neonatal flow sensor
Flow monitoring with neonatal flow sensor in
– After medication nebulization
the Neo. patient category
Recalibration is not necessary if the neonatal flow
CAUTION sensor has been unplugged only briefly.
Before each manual calibration, whether started
Use additional external monitoring during from the device check or from the
ventilation with very low tidal volumes. Sensors/Parameters dialog window, Evita V300
automatically cleans the neonatal flow sensor by
heating.

Monitoring
WARNING Removing the neonatal flow sensor

Risk of fire 4 Remove the tube connector.
disinfectants (e.g., alcohols) and deposits that I J
disinfection.
307
5 Put on a sterile glove.
residual mucus, medication aerosols, and 6 Seal the neonatal flow sensor ISO 15 (I) or
particles. neonatal flow sensor Y-piece (J).
This ensures that the requirement for calibration
soiled, or not particle-free.
(flow = 0) is met.
Starting calibration of the neonatal flow sensor Performing calibration

1 Touch the Sensors/ Parameters... button in the 7 Press the rotary knob.
main menu bar.
Evita V300 calibrates the neonatal flow sensor.
Evita V300 opens the Sensors/Parameters dialog
window. The Neonatal flow sensor page (A) Evita V300 displays calibration information in the
appears by default. message field (C).
At the completion of calibration, the Start button (B)
Sensors/Parameters C
turns light green.
A
B D
G H Canceling calibration of the neonatal flow
sensor
E  Touch the Cancel button (D).

F
K
After calibration of the neonatal flow sensor
8 Connect the tube connector.
308
Select the sensor type being used:

Setting the flow trigger
2 Touch the Y flow sensor (E) or ISO-15 flow
 Touch the Trigger button (K).
sensor (F) button.
Evita V300 opens the page for setting the flow
3 Touch the Start button (B).
trigger. For additional information, see "Additional
The instruction field (G) displays the instructions for settings for ventilation" on page 101.
performing calibration. Button (H) is preselected.

Monitoring
Additional information WARNING

The Neonatal flow sensor page can be configured Risk of fire
as the Neonatal flow sensor button in the main
menu bar for direct access. See "Assigning
disinfectants (e.g., alcohols) and deposits that
The Neonatal flow sensor button is located in the ignite when the flow sensor is in use.
quick access bar. – Ensure particle-free cleaning and
disinfection.
Calibrating the Infinity ID flow sensor air for at least 30 minutes.
Calibration of the Infinity ID flow sensor in the visible damage and soiling, such as
device corresponds to a zero calibration. residual mucus, medication aerosols, and
Calibration of the Infinity ID flow sensor takes place particles.
automatically: – Replace flow sensors when damaged,
– At the start of ventilation soiled, or not particle-free.
– Every hour during ventilation or if deviations are
detected Starting calibration of the Infinity ID flow sensor
– After flow sensor replacement
– After medication nebulization 1 Touch the Sensors/ Parameters... button in the
main menu bar.
Manual calibration of the Infinity ID flow sensor is
necessary: Evita V300 opens the Sensors/Parameters dialog
– During the device check window.
Before each manual calibration, whether started 2 Touch the Flow sensor tab (A).
from the device check or from the
Sensors/Parameters dialog window, Evita V300
Sensors/Parameters E
cleans the Infinity ID flow sensor automatically by A
heating. This heating is performed 30 minutes after B F
switching on the device at the earliest, or D
30 minutes after replacement of the Infinity ID flow C
sensor at the earliest. Following medication
nebulization, the device automatically cleans the G
Infinity ID flow sensor by heating and performs
calibration.
110
3 Touch the Start button (B).

4 The device displays information about the
calibration in the notification field (C). Button (D)
is preselected. Confirm with the rotary knob.
Evita V300 uses the next inspiratory phase for
calibration of the Infinity ID flow sensor. Short
inspiratory times are extended to approximately
1 second.

Monitoring
Evita V300 displays calibration information in the WARNING

message field (E).
No apnea monitoring takes place when flow
At the completion of calibration, the Start button (B) monitoring is deactivated. Use an
turns light green. independent apnea monitoring.
Canceling calibration of the Infinity ID flow WARNING

sensor If flow monitoring with the Infinity ID flow
sensor is not available, disconnection cannot
 Touch the Cancel button (F).
be reliably detected.
Setting the flow trigger CAUTION

 Touch the Trigger button (G). Neither volume-controlled nor patient-triggered
ventilation is possible when flow monitoring with
Evita V300 opens the page for setting the flow
the Infinity ID flow sensor is deactivated.
trigger. For additional information, see "Additional
settings for ventilation" on page 101. Patient-triggered ventilation is not possible when
flow monitoring with the neonatal flow sensor is
deactivated.
The Flow sensor page can be configured for direct Flow monitoring can be deactivated, e.g.:
access into the main menu bar as the Flow sensor – If medication nebulization is being performed
button. See "Assigning functions to additional – To permit ventilation in the event of major tube
buttons" on page 181. leakage
– If the flow sensor has failed but cannot be
The Flow sensor button is located in the quick replaced immediately.
access bar. A defective or disconnected flow sensor can
The Infinity ID flow sensor can be reused as long as lead to deviations in the minute and tidal
automatic calibration is possible. volumes or to auto-triggering.
In the Neo. patient category, Evita V300
deactivates flow monitoring when changing to the
Deactivating or activating flow NIV application mode.
monitoring
The ventilation functions and ventilation monitoring

are limited when flow monitoring is deactivated.
Flow monitoring with the Infinity ID flow sensor
cannot be fully substituted by external monitoring.
Set the minute volume alarm limits of the substitute
monitoring accordingly.
WARNING
If flow and volume monitoring is deactivated,
ensure that appropriate substitute monitoring
is available immediately. The patient may
otherwise be jeopardized.

Monitoring
Deactivating flow monitoring with neonatal flow Deactivating flow monitoring with the Infinity ID
sensor flow sensor
1 Touch the Sensors/ Parameters... button in the 1 Touch the Sensors/ Parameters... button in the
main menu bar. main menu bar.
2 Touch the Neonatal flow sensor tab (A). 2 Touch the Flow sensor tab (E).
Sensors/Parameters C Sensors/Parameters G
A E
H F
D B
110
308
3 Touch the Off button (F) and confirm with the

3 Touch the Off button (B) and confirm with the rotary knob.
rotary knob.
Evita V300 displays the following information in the
Evita V300 displays the following information in the message field (G): External monitoring must be
message field (C): External monitoring must be used!
used!
Flow monitoring is deactivated. Evita V300 displays
Flow monitoring with the neonatal flow sensor is the symbol Flow in the header bar. The
deactivated. Evita V300 displays the symbol measured values are no longer displayed. The
Flow in the header bar. The measured values alarm function is deactivated.
are no longer displayed. The alarm function is
deactivated.
Activating flow monitoring with the Infinity ID
In the Ped. pat. patient category, flow monitoring is flow sensor
only deactivated if no Infinity ID flow sensor is
Reactivate flow monitoring after replacing the
present in Evita V300 or if flow monitoring with this
Infinity ID flow sensor or as soon as possible.
flow sensor is deactivated.
Prerequisite: The Flow sensor page (E) is open.
Activating flow monitoring with neonatal flow  Touch the On button (H) and confirm with the
sensor rotary knob.
Reactivate flow monitoring after exchanging the Flow monitoring is activated.
neonatal flow sensor or as soon as possible.
Prerequisite: The Neonatal flow sensor page (A)
is open.
 Touch the On button (D) and confirm with the
rotary knob.
Flow monitoring is activated.

Monitoring
O2 monitoring
Calibrating the O2 sensor Deactivating or activating O2 monitoring
The O2 sensor is calibrated during the device WARNING

check. Regular calibration during the device check
If O2 monitoring is deactivated, ensure that
ensures the specified accuracy. If the O2 sensor is
appropriate substitute monitoring is available
not calibrated for 3 months, the accuracy of the O2
immediately. The patient may otherwise be
sensor will be reduced. The parameter field for the
jeopardized.
O2 concentration displays a question mark in
addition to the measured value.
O2 monitoring can be replaced by appropriate
substitute monitoring. Set the O2 alarm limits for the
FiO2 Vol%
substitute monitoring according to the set value for
22?
FiO2:
FiO2 <60 Vol% –> O2 ±4 Vol%

FiO2 ≥60 Vol% –> O2 ±6 Vol%
141
Deactivating O2 monitoring
After calibration during the device check the sensor
will work again with full accuracy. 1 Touch the Sensors/ Parameters... button in the
main menu bar.
2 Touch the O2 sensor tab (A).
CAUTION
If the quality of the oxygen from the central gas Sensors/Parameters C
supply system is inadequate, calibrate the O2 A
sensor with calibration gas (100 % O2). Otherwise
this may result in an incorrect calibration.
Additional information D B
"Performing the device check" on page 81.
The O2 sensor page can be configured for direct
111
access into the main menu bar as the O2 sensor

3 Touch the Off button (B) and confirm with the
button. See "Assigning functions to additional
rotary knob.
Evita V300 displays the following information in the
The O2 sensor button is located in the quick
message field (C): External monitoring must be
access bar.
used!
The O2 sensor is deactivated in standby mode.
O2 monitoring is deactivated. Evita V300 displays
When the therapy is started, the O2 concentration
the symbol FiO2 in the header bar.
is not displayed until after about 5 seconds.
The measured values are no longer displayed.
The corresponding alarm function is deactivated.

Monitoring
Activating O2 monitoring
Reactivate O2 monitoring as soon as possible.
Prerequisite: The O2 sensor page (A) is open.
rotary knob.
O2 monitoring is activated.
CO2 monitoring
Information on CO2 monitoring 1 Touch the Sensors/ Parameters... button in the

main menu bar.
The CO2 sensor page can be configured for direct 2 Touch the CO2 sensor tab (A).
access into the main menu bar as the CO2 sensor
button. See "Assigning functions to additional The Zero calib. on/off page (B) appears by default.
Sensors/Parameters
The CO2 sensor button is located in the quick
A
access bar. B
Selecting the cuvette type

C D
The following cuvettes can be used:
– Reusable cuvettes
142
– Disposable cuvettes
The cuvette type used must be selected on the 3 Touch the Reusable (C) or Disposable (D)
Zero calib. on/off page. button.
If the selected cuvette does not correspond to the
CAUTION cuvette used, the alarm message Check CO2
The cuvette windows of the reusable cuvette have cuvette is displayed.
different optical properties to the cuvette windows
of the disposable cuvette.
The cuvette type used must therefore be selected
correctly on the Zero calib. on/off page.
Otherwise the zero point will be shifted by up
to 8 mmHg CO2.

Monitoring
Information on checking the CO2 sensor Information on the alarm messages

issued during CO2 monitoring
The CO2 sensor is factory-calibrated and can be
used on any Evita V300. This information refers to the alarm messages
which are generated due to a soiled cuvette or
Information on checking the zero indication and sensor.
zero calibration
When checking the zero indication or performing Alarm message Clean CO2 cuvette
zero calibration, the CO2 concentration in the If the Clean CO2 cuvette message is displayed,
cuvette or in the cuvette slot of the sensor must not the following panes may be soiled:
be higher than the background concentration in – Cuvette (disposable or reusable cuvette)
rooms of approximately 0.4 mmHg or 0.05 Vol%. – CO2 sensor
For this reason, do not breathe on or into the
cuvettes or into the cuvette slot. 1 Clean the cuvette or use another cuvette.
– When using reusable cuvettes, insert a
The following checks are required for the CO2 clean reusable cuvette.
sensor: – When using disposable cuvettes, insert a
new disposable cuvette.
Check When required?
2 Clean the CO2 sensor.
Check CO2 zero Required before
indication in measurement and when
ambient air changing the CO2 sensor to Alarm message CO2 zero calibration?
another ventilation unit. If the CO2 zero calibration? message is displayed
Perform a CO2 If the CO2 zero indication in or if incorrect measured values are suspected, e.g.,
zero calibration ambient air is not between etCO2 values too low or inspiratory values too high,
0 and 1 mmHg (or 0 and then proceed as follows:
0.1 Vol%, or 0 and 0.1 kPa).
1 Check whether the cuvette windows are soiled.
Check calibration Required in intervals of one
of the CO2 sensor month. 2 Clean the soiled windows. Or, if a reusable
with a test filter cuvette was used previously, use a clean
reusable cuvette. If a disposable cuvette was
Check calibration When the test values are not used previously, use a new disposable cuvette.
of the CO2 sensor adhered to during the
with test gas calibration check with test If the cuvette windows are extremely soiled, e.g.,
filter. from deposits due to medication nebulization, this
may result in a zero shift. The CO2 measured
Performing the When the test values are not
values may be incorrect even before insufficient
calibration of the adhered to during the
measuring light causes the Clean CO2 cuvette
CO2 sensor calibration check with test
message to appear.
gas.
If the CO2 zero calibration? message does not
Zero calibration in ambient air, calibration check disappear or if the measured CO2 values remain
with test filter or test gas and calibration of the CO2 suspect, a zero calibration must be performed.
sensor can be performed during ventilation.

Monitoring
Checking the CO2 zero indication Starting zero calibration

1 Touch the Sensors/ Parameters... button in the
The check of the CO2 zero indication in ambient air main menu bar.
is performed with a clean CO2 sensor that is placed
on the cuvette used for measurement. 2 Touch the CO2 sensor tab (A).
Prerequisite: Evita V300 is switched on and at least The Zero calib. on/off page (B) appears by default.
the three-minute warm-up phase for the CO2
Sensors/Parameters
sensor has elapsed. After 3 minutes, the measured
CO2 values will be inside the specified tolerance A
range. B
C
1 Fit the CO2 sensor on the cuvette.
2 Select the cuvette type, see page 167.
3 To display the CO2 measured value as a curve,
see "Changing the display of monitoring fields"
on page 107.
142
4 Remove the CO2 sensor with the cuvette from 3 Touch the Start button (C).
the breathing circuit and hold it in ambient air. When requested by Evita V300:
Do not breathe on or into the cuvette.
Instead of the cuvette from the breathing circuit,
another clean cuvette of the selected type D
(disposable or reusable) can be used.
5 Observe the measured CO2 value. If 0 to
1 mmHg (or 0 to 0.1 Vol% or 0 to 0.1 kPa) is not
displayed in the ambient air, perform a zero
calibration. E
179
4 Remove the CO2 sensor (D) from the cuvette
Performing a CO2 zero calibration (E).
Zero calibration is performed in ambient air and
with a clean CO2 sensor which is removed from the Evita V300 performs the zero calibration and
cuvette. displays the message Calibration in progress.
Prerequisite: Evita V300 is switched on and at least
sensor has elapsed. After 3 minutes, the measured
CO2 values will be inside the specified tolerance
range.

Monitoring
If zero calibration was successful 2 Remove the sensor from the cuvette and
connect it to the test filter (E) on the sensor
After approximately 5 seconds, Evita V300 reports
cable.
Zero calibration successful..
 Fit the CO2 sensor (D) back on the cuvette (E).
If zero calibration was not successful

Evita V300 reports Zero calibration failed.
 Repeat zero calibration.
E
177
If zero calibration is still impossible 3 Touch the Filter check button (C) and confirm
1 Check whether the sensor is soiled and clean it with the rotary knob.
if necessary. If the sensor is faulty, replace it. Evita V300 starts the check and displays the
2 Repeat zero calibration. progress and result of the check in the message
field (D).
Checking the calibration of the CO2 If the check was successful

sensor with a test filter Evita V300 displays the message Filter check
successful. The test value is within the permissible
Perform the calibration check of the CO2 sensor tolerance.
with a test filter at intervals of one month.
 Fit the CO2 sensor back on the cuvette.
Before the check
If the check was not successful
the three-minute warm-up phase for the CO2 Evita V300 displays the message Filter check
sensor has elapsed. failed. The test value is outside the permissible
tolerance.
 Perform CO2 zero calibration in ambient air.
 Check the CO2 calibration with test gas.
Starting the calibration check of the CO2 sensor
with a test filter
Prerequisite: The CO2 sensor page (A) is open.
1 Touch the Check sensor tab (B).
Sensors/Parameters D
A
C B
143

Monitoring
Checking the calibration of the CO2 4 Read the CO2 concentration of the test gas
sensor with test gas from the test gas cylinder (A).
5 Open the test gas cylinder (E) and set the test
Perform the check when the test values are not gas flow to 0.1 L/min.
within the permitted tolerance during the calibration
check of the CO2 sensor with test filter.
Starting the calibration check of the CO2 sensor
CAUTION with test gas
For the check and calibration only use a test gas Prerequisite: The CO2 sensor page (F) is open.
which consists of CO2 and N2! Otherwise display
deviations of ±0.5 Vol% CO2 may occur. 1 Touch the Check sensor tab (G).
Sensors/Parameters
Before the check F
G
sensor has elapsed. H I
 Perform CO2 zero calibration in ambient air.
Connecting the test gas supply
143
The test gas must consist only of CO2 and N2! 2 Touch the Gas check button (H).
1 Use the reusable cuvette from the calibration Evita V300 displays the measured CO2
set! concentration (I).
At the start of the check with test gas, Evita V300 About 1 minute after the test gas flow has been set,
automatically sets the cuvette type to Reusable. the measured CO2 value must match the CO2
content of the test gas read from the test gas
cylinder with a tolerance of ±0.2 Vol%.
Evita V300 terminates the check with test gas
approx. 1 minute after the start.
D
3 Close the test gas cylinder again.
E If the test value is outside the permitted tolerance,
C the CO2 sensor must be recalibrated with test gas.
B
A
176
2 Connect the test gas cylinder (A) and the

cuvette (B) of the calibration set to the hose (C).
3 Fit the CO2 sensor (D) on the cuvette (B) from
the calibration set.

Monitoring
After the calibration check of the CO2 sensor

with test gas
The cuvette type is automatically reset to the
previously set cuvette type. D
 Fit the CO2 sensor back on the cuvette in the
breathing circuit. E
C
Performing the calibration of the CO2 B
sensor A
The CO2 sensor must be calibrated if the test
176
values are not within the permitted tolerance during
2 Connect the test gas cylinder (A) and the
the calibration check with test gas.
cuvette (B) of the calibration set to the hose (C).
CAUTION 3 Fit the CO2 sensor (D) on the cuvette (B) from
For the check and calibration only use a test gas the calibration set.
which consists of CO2 and N2! Otherwise display 4 Read the CO2 concentration of the test gas
deviations of ±0.5 Vol% CO2 may occur. from the test gas cylinder (A).
5 Open the test gas cylinder (E) and set the test
Before calibration gas flow to 0.1 L/min.
the three-minute warm-up phase for the CO2 Starting calibration of the CO2 sensor with test
sensor has elapsed. gas
 Perform CO2 zero calibration in ambient air. Prerequisite: The CO2 sensor page (F) is open.
1 Touch the Calibration tab (G).
Connecting the test gas supply
The test gas must consist only of CO2 and N2!
Sensors/Parameters J
F
1 Use the reusable cuvette from the calibration
set! I
At the start of calibration, Evita V300 automatically H G
sets the cuvette type to Reusable.
K
144
2 Touch the CO2 sensor therapy control (H).

Enter the value for the CO2 concentration in the
test gas with the rotary knob and confirm.
3 About 1 minute after setting the test gas flow,
touch the Start button (I) and confirm with the
rotary knob.

Monitoring
Evita V300 starts the calibration of the CO2 sensor Resetting the calibration of the CO2 sensor
and displays the progress and result of the
If problems occurred during calibration, the sensor
calibration in the message field (J).
can be reset to the delivery default values.
4 Close the test gas cylinder again.
Prerequisite: The Calibration page is opened.
1 Touch the Reset calibration button (K) and
If calibration was successful
Evita V300 displays the message CO2 sensor
After approximately 5 seconds, the factory-set
calib. with test gas successful.
calibration value is effective again and must be
The cuvette type is automatically reset to the checked with the test filter.
previously set cuvette type.
2 Check the calibration of the CO2 sensor with
 Fit the CO2 sensor back on the cuvette in the test filter, see page 170.
breathing circuit.
If calibration was not successful Deactivating or activating CO2

monitoring
Evita V300 displays the message Calibration of
CO2 sensor with test gas failed. Deactivate CO2 monitoring when a defective CO2
If calibration failed, the following causes are sensor cannot immediately be exchanged or the
possible: CO2 measured values are currently not needed.
Cause Remedy Deactivating CO2 monitoring

The CO2 Check the CO2
1 Touch the Sensors/ Parameters... button in the
concentration entered concentration entered
main menu bar.
does not match the and repeat calibration of
value on the test gas the CO2 sensor. 2 Touch the CO2 sensor tab (A).
cylinder.
3 Touch the Zero calib. on/off tab (B) if the page
The test gas cylinder Use a new test gas is not already preset.
is empty. cylinder and repeat
calibration of the CO2 Sensors/Parameters
sensor. A
The CO2 sensor is Clean the CO2 sensor and B
soiled. repeat calibration of the
CO2 sensor.
The CO2 sensor is Replace the CO2 sensor
faulty. and check the CO2 zero
indication. D C
142
4 Touch the Off button (C) and confirm with the

rotary knob.
CO2 monitoring is deactivated. Evita V300 displays
Off in the CO2 parameter field. The measured
values are no longer displayed. The alarm function
is deactivated.

Monitoring
Activating CO2 monitoring

Prerequisite: The Zero calib. on/off page (B) is
open.
rotary knob.
CO2 monitoring is activated.

Configuration
Configuration
Information on configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Configuring the screen display. . . . . . . . . . . 176

Adjusting illumination and brightness . . . . . . . . 177
Configuring the screen view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Configuring the display of hospital-specific
measured values and settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Assigning functions to additional buttons . . . . . 181
Selecting parameters for the graphic trend
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Locking therapy controls in the therapy bar . . . 183
Configuring alarm settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Setting start-up values for alarm limits . . . . . . . 184
Setting the alarm tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Configuring the ventilation settings . . . . . . . 187

Configuring start-up settings for the patient
category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Configuring start-up settings for the
ventilation modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Configuring start-up settings for the
ventilation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Configuring general settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Setting a maneuver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Importing and exporting configurations . . . 195
Installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
System status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Displaying general status information. . . . . . . . 198
Configuring exchange intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Selecting country-specific settings . . . . . . . . . . 200
Configuring units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Configuring interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Configuring supply units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Service dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Configuration
Information on configuration
The System setup dialog window provides the To prevent unauthorized adjustments, the following
user with the following configuration options: pages are password-protected:
– Screen layout – Screen layout > Views
– Alarms – Alarms
– Ventilation – Ventilation
– Config. exchange (Importing and exporting – Config. exchange
configurations) – Applications
– Applications – Exchange intervals
– System status
The password only needs to be entered once as
– Exchange intervals
long as the System setup dialog window remains
– System
open.
For additional information on the password,
see page 381.
Configuring the screen display
The following settings can be configured on the

System setup > Screen layout page:
– General settings (General settings)
– Views
– Customized data (Customized data)
– Config. buttons (Configurable buttons)
– Trends graphic 1
– Trends graphic 2
– Therapy bar
The customized settings for Trends graphic 1 and
Trends graphic 2 become effective with the
admission of a new patient. The other customized
screen display settings are immediately effective.
 Touch the System setup... button.
Evita V300 opens the System setup dialog
window. The Screen layout page is displayed by
default.

Configuration
Adjusting illumination and brightness The Day/Night button is located in the quick
access bar.
Prerequisite: The Screen layout page (A) is open.
1 Touch the General settings tab (B). Adjusting screen brightness
System setup The screen brightness can be adjusted

automatically or manually.
A
Activating automatic brightness adjustment:
C D
E : F G : H B  Touch the Automatic button (I).
Adjusting brightness manually:
I J K 1 Touch the Manual button (J).
L M N 2 Touch the button (K).
push to confirm.
132
Automatic changeover of day and night mode Adjusting automatic screen dimming
If the automatic changeover of day and night mode Automatic dimming of the screen can be set for
is switched on, the system will automatically standby mode and battery operation.
change over the following settings: 1 Touch the On button (L).
– Illumination of the screen
– Volume of the alarm tone 2 Touch the button (N).
– Automatic increase of the alarm tone volume 3 Set the value by turning the rotary knob and
 Touch button On (C) or Off (D). push to confirm.
Switching off automatic screen dimming:
Selecting the time period for screen  Touch the Off button (M).
illumination at night
The illumination of the screen is reduced with a
dark background color for the time period entered.
Hours (E): minutes (F) to hours (G): minutes (H).
1 Touch the appropriate button.
2 Set the time by turning the rotary knob and push
to confirm.
If the automatic changeover for the illumination of
the screen is switched on, the system will change
over at the times entered.
The Day/Night button in the main menu bar can be
configured to enable direct access to the reduced
screen illumination mode that uses a dark
background color, see page 181.

Configuration
Configuring the screen view Locking the view against overwriting

 Touch the button (E).
The selected view is locked and cannot be
1 Touch the Views tab (B). changed. The display of the monitoring fields
2 Enter password and confirm with Enter. cannot be changed on the main page.
The Views page is displayed.

Deactivating the lock
System setup
 Touch the button (F).
A
C Saving the view
F E D
G B 1 Touch the button (G).
The current view for the selected view (View 1 to
View 3) is saved.
H
133_V300
I Resetting the current view

Each view can be reset individually, either to factory
Selecting the view or saved settings. The view must not be locked.
3 Touch the button (C). Loading factory settings
Evita V300 opens the selection list for the views. 1 Touch the Dräger default button (H).
Three views can be configured (View 1 to View 3).
4 Select the respective view by turning the rotary
knob and push to confirm. For information on the factory settings for the
views, see chapter "Factory-set screen views"
on page 373.
Adjusting the selected view
Loading saved settings
The adjustment can only be performed if the
selected view is not locked. The button (F) is dark 1 Touch the Load button (I).
green. 2 Confirm with the rotary knob.
5 Touch a field in the view (D).
The dialog for the field contents is displayed.
6 Select the parameter, display format and
display size for curves and parameter fields.
See "Changing the display of monitoring fields"
on page 107.

Configuration
Overview of format templates

Each view is assigned to a format template, which
cannot be altered.
View 1: L
K
View 2: L
K
View 3:
L
M
089_V300
L
The (K), (L) and (M) fields can be configured with
customized settings. All fields can also be
configured without contents. The following settings
are possible:
K L M
Field size 1x Field size 2x Field size 1x Field size 2x
Waveform Waveform Single parameter Single parameter Single parameter
Trends (meas.) Loop Double parameter Battery Double parameter
Trends (settings) Double loop Waveform
Trends (meas.) Loop
Lung display Double loop
(Smart Pulmonary
Trends (meas.)
View)
Trends (settings)
Lung display (Smart
Pulmonary View)

Configuration
Configuring the display of hospital- Configuring the display of hospital-specific set

specific measured values and settings values
Prerequisite: The desired row is marked.
A maximum of 20 measured and set values can be
grouped together. The hospital-specific measured 1 Touch the Settings button (E).
and set values are displayed on the Trends/Data > 2 Select the parameter from the selection list with
Values > Customized data page. the rotary knob and push to confirm.
Prerequisite: The Screen layout page (A)is open.
1 Touch the Customized data tab (B). Additional information
Measured values are displayed in the list with a
System setup
blue background color and set values with a green
A background color.
D
C E
B
134
Selecting a row in the list

 Turn the rotary knob until the desired row is
marked in column 1 or 2 (C) or touch the row.
Configuring the display of hospital-specific

measured values
Prerequisite: The desired row is marked.
1 Touch the Values button (D).
2 Select the parameter from the selection list with
the rotary knob and push to confirm.

Configuration
Assigning functions to additional Selecting parameters for the graphic

buttons trend display
Additional buttons can be assigned in the main The graphic trend display for the Trends/Data >
menu bar to enable direct access to a function or to Trends > Graphics 1 and Graphics 2 pages can
directly open a page. The buttons are spatially be configured. The settings become effective with
assigned to the corresponding group. the admission of a new patient.
Prerequisite: The Screen layout page (A)is open. Prerequisite: The Screen layout page (A) is open.
1 Touch the Config. buttons tab (B). 1 Touch the Trends graphic 1 (B) or Trends
graphic 2 tab (C).
System setup
A System setup
A
C D E
D
B
E
D B
C
135_V300
137
Two additional buttons can be selected for the main Each page contains 2 graphic trend displays (D).
menu bar with buttons (C) and (D).
2 Touch the button.
3 Select the desired button from the selection list
with the rotary knob and push to confirm.
Evita V300 displays the selected button in the main
menu bar.
For information on the display of additional buttons
and their location in the main menu bar, see "Main
menu bar structure" on page 369.

Configuration
Configuring the trend display Evita V300 opens another dialog containing all the
parameters of the selected parameter type
1 Touch the button (E).
(example Volume/Flow).
Evita V300 opens the Setup dialog with the buttons
for Meas. (F) and Settings (G). Volume/Flow
Setup VT Flow
F G
146_V300
3 Touch the parameter. The button turns dark
green.
The dialog for the parameter type is closed.
The selected parameters are displayed in the trend
display. The Setup dialog is closed.
Selecting a time interval

138_V300
System setup
The measured values (F) are divided into the

following parameter types:
– Pressures
– Minute vol.
– Volume/Flow
– Gases
– Timing/Cycl.
– Others
– Events
L
137
The settings (G) are divided into the following

parameter types:  Touch the button (L). Select the time interval
– Pressures from the selection list: 2, 4, 8, 12 hours, 1 day,
– Volume/Flow 7 days.
– Gases
– Timing/Cycl.
– Others
2 Touch the appropriate button for measured
values or set values.

Configuration
Locking therapy controls in the therapy

bar
The therapy controls in the therapy bar can be

locked to prevent accidental changes from being
made to the ventilation parameters.
1 Touch the Therapy bar tab (B).
System setup
A
C D
B
136
2 Touch the On button (C).

The therapy controls in the therapy bar are locked.
The ventilation parameters can only be changed in
the Ventilation settings dialog window.
Canceling the lock

 On the Therapy bar page, touch the Off button
(D).

Configuration
Configuring alarm settings
The customized settings for the start-up values of Evita V300 displays the start-up values used for the
the alarm limits become effective with the alarm limits.
admission of a new patient. The customized alarm
tone settings are effective immediately depending (C) upper alarm limit
on the time of day. The selection of the alarm tone
(D) lower alarm limit
sequence is effective immediately.
1 Touch the System setup... button in the main 2 Touch the relevant button for the alarm limit.
menu bar.
2 Touch the Alarms tab. push to confirm.
3 Enter password and confirm with Enter. The start-up values for the alarm limits can be
Evita V300 displays the following configurable adjusted specifically as required by the hospital.
alarm settings in the overview:
– Start-up values for alarm limits Selecting the factory settings
– Alarm volume and alarm tone
 Touch the Dräger default button (E) and
Setting start-up values for alarm limits The Dräger default button also resets other start-
up settings on the Ventilation page and the
CAUTION Alarms page to the factory settings.
If several devices of the same type are used on a
ward, the alarm defaults must be configured
identically on all devices. The patient may
otherwise be jeopardized.
Prerequisite: The Alarms page (A) is open.

1 Touch the Preset limits tab (B).
System setup
A
C B
D
E
148

Configuration
Table of alarm limits

The following table lists the alarm limits with the
setting range and the factory-set start-up values
(Dräger default).
Parameter Setting range Factory-set start-up value

(Dräger default)
MVe 1 to 100 % (VT x RR) +50 %
MVe Off, 1 to 100 % (VT x RR) –20 %
MV delay 0 to 30 seconds 0 seconds
MV delay 0 to 30 seconds 0 seconds
VT 1 to 100 %, Off VT +99 %
VT Off, 1 to 100 % VT –50 %
Paw 7 to 105 mbar 30 mbar (30 cmH2O)

(7 to 105 cmH2O)
RR 1 to 100 %, Off RR +20 %
Tapn 5 to 60 seconds 15 seconds
etCO2 0.1 to 13.1 Vol% 8.0 Vol%

1 to 98 mmHg 60 mmHg
0.1 to 13.3 kPa –
etCO2 0 to 13.0 Vol% 4.0 Vol%
0 to 97 mmHg 30 mmHg
0 to 13.2 kPa –
The alarm limits for the minute volume are set as a
percentage of the start-up value (VT x RR). To
configure VT and RR, see "Configuring start-up
settings for the ventilation parameters"
on page 190.
For an overview of the device's internal alarm limits,
see chapter "Automatic alarm limits" on page 302.

Configuration
Setting the alarm tone Setting the volume for day or night
4 For the day setting, touch the button (D).
WARNING
5 Set the value for the sound level by day by
Unnoticed alarms in loud environments turning the rotary knob and push to confirm.
Alarm situations are not recognized. 6 For the night setting, touch the button (E).
Set the volume of the alarm tone so that 7 Set the value for the sound level by night by
alarms can be heard. turning the rotary knob and push to confirm.
Prerequisite: The Alarms page (A) is open.
Activating the automatic sound level increase
1 Touch the Alarm vol./tone tab (B).
The Auto increase function can be set separately
System setup for day and night.
A  Touch the appropriate Auto increase button
C (F).
D F
E F B
Selecting alarm tone sequences
G H Evita V300 offers the following alarm tone

sequences:
I J
K L (G) IEC/CEI as per IEC 60601-1-8
M N (H) Dräger usual alarm tone sequences
149
ventilation of Dräger ventilators

Setting the minimum alarm volume
 Touch the appropriate button.
Configuring the minimum alarm volume sets the
lower limit of the factory setting for the volume of
the alarm tone (10 to 100 %). This allows the Setting the priority of the battery alarms
setting range to be adjusted to the acoustical The device offers the following priorities for battery
situation at operation site. alarms:
2 Touch the (C) button.
(I) IEC/CEI Priority of the battery alarm
3 Set the value for the minimum volume by in accordance with
turning the rotary knob and push to confirm. IEC 60601-2-12,
ISO 80601-2-12
(J) Dräger Priority of the battery alarm
ventilation according to Dräger
The Battery activated alarm message indicating

the changeover to battery operation can be
configured as a high- or medium-priority alarm
when Dräger ventilation is selected.
 Touch the Medium (K) or High (L) button and
confirm.

Configuration
Depending on the setting (IEC/CEI or Dräger

ventilation), alarm messages have the following
priority:
Alarm message Priority IEC/CEI Priority Dräger ventilation

Battery activated Low-priority alarm message High-priority or medium-priority alarm
message
Battery low Medium-priority alarm message High-priority alarm message
Battery discharged High-priority alarm message High-priority alarm message
Configuring the confirmation prompt

The display of messages and alarms requesting
confirmation of ventilation settings can be switched
on (M) or off (N).
 Touch the appropriate button and confirm.
Configuring the ventilation settings
The following ventilation configurations are

possible:
– Configuration of patient category for start-up
– Configuration of main ventilation modes
– Configuration of start-up ventilation settings
– Configuration of general settings for ventilation
– Configuration of settings for maneuvers
The customized ventilation settings become
effective with the admission of a new patient.
1 Touch the System setup... button in the main
menu bar.
2 Touch the Ventilation tab.
3 Enter password and confirm with Enter.

Configuration
Configuring start-up settings for the Configuring a user-defined breathing circuit

patient category When the User-defined hose settings function is
activated, a user-defined breathing circuit can be
Prerequisite: The Ventilation page (A) is open. selected on the Start/ Standby... > Br. circuit/
1 Touch the Patient category tab (B). Humidifier page.
System setup
Activating a user-defined breathing circuit:
A  Touch the On button (D).

Deactivating a user-defined breathing circuit:
C B  Touch the Off button (E).
D E Additional information
Using the user-defined breathing circuit, see
F G page 78.
150
Configuring the import of ventilation settings

2 Touch the button (C).
When import of ventilation settings is activated, the
Evita V300 opens the selection list. The following ventilation settings stored on the Infinity ID
patient categories are available for selection: breathing circuit are transferred to Evita V300.
– Adults only
Activating import of ventilation settings:
– Pediatric patients only
– Adults, pediatric patients  Touch the On button (F).
– Adults, ped. patients, neonates
Deactivating import of ventilation settings:
– Pediatric patients, neonates
– Neonates only  Touch the Off button (G).
3 Select the patient category with the rotary knob
and push to confirm. Additional information
Evita V300 displays the buttons for the selected Transfer of ventilation settings, see page 90.
patient category on the Start and Start/Standby
pages.

Configuration
Configuring start-up settings for the The button with the active ventilation mode is
ventilation modes highlighted in gray and cannot be changed. The
button assignment can only be changed when
another ventilation mode is activated in the
CAUTION Ventilation settings dialog window.
If the ventilation start-up values are configured
differently to the Dräger standard values, this Depending on configuration, the number of
configuration must be identical on all Evita V300 displayed ventilation modes can vary between
belonging to a ward. The patient may otherwise 1 and 4.
be jeopardized.
Prerequisite: The Ventilation page (A) is open.

1 Touch the Modes tab (B).
System setup
A
C
D B
D
D
E
151
Evita V300 displays the start mode (C) and

3 ventilation modes (D). These ventilation modes
are displayed in the Ventilation settings dialog
window after Evita V300 has been started.
The ventilation mode (E) configured under Other
modes is displayed as an additional mode for
information purposes and can be changed in the
Ventilation settings dialog window.
2 Touch the appropriate button.
Evita V300 opens the ventilation mode selection
list.
3 Select the mode with the rotary knob and push
to confirm.
If --- is configured for a ventilation mode, the
corresponding page is not available in the
Ventilation settings dialog window.
The same ventilation mode cannot be configured
on 2 buttons.

Configuration
Configuring start-up settings for the After the start of ventilation, Evita V300 begins
ventilation parameters ventilation with the start-up values, dependent on
the patient category set on the Start/Standby
Prerequisite: The Ventilation page (A) is open. page.
1 Touch the Start settings tab (B). Setting start-up values depending on the body
height/weight
System setup
Prerequisite: The VT, RR, Trigger page (C) is
A open.
C 1 Touch the Weight button (F) and confirm with
D the rotary knob.
B System setup
E
C
F
147
Evita V300 displays the following pages for the

ventilation start-up settings: G
– VT, RR, Trigger
– Pressures, O2, I:E
– Other settings H
163
– ATC
Evita V300 displays the start-up values for the
The VT, RR, Trigger page (C) appears by default. different body weights (G).
2 Touch the appropriate button (G).
Setting start-up values for VT, RR, Slope, and
Flow trigger 3 Set the value by turning the rotary knob and
push to confirm.
Depending on the patient category or the patient's
weight, these start-up values can be set: After the start of ventilation, Evita V300 begins
– VT ventilation with the start-up values, depending on
– RR the body height set on the Start/Standby page and
– Slope the ideal body weight derived from that, or with the
– Flow trigger set start-up body weight in the Neo. patient
category.
Setting start-up values depending on the
patient category
1 If not yet preset, touch the Patient button (D)
and confirm with the rotary knob.
Evita V300 displays the start-up values for the
different patient categories (E).
2 Touch the appropriate button (E).
push to confirm.

Configuration
Selecting the factory settings

 Touch the Dräger default button (H) and
The Dräger default button also resets other start-
Alarms page to the factory settings.
Tables for start-up values

The following tables show the factory-set start-up
values (Dräger default) for VT, RR, Slope and
Flow trigger.
The following table applies to the selection of start-
up values depending on the patient category:
Factory-set start-up value

Patient category VT RR Slope Flow trigger
(mL) (1/min) (s) (L/min)
Neo. 5.0 60 0.1 0.3
Ped. pat. 50 29 0.2 1.0
Adult 500 12 0.2 2.0
The following table applies to the selection of start-

up values depending on the body weight according
to the Radford nomogram:
Factory-set start-up value

Weight VT RR Slope Flow trigger
(kg) (mL) (1/min) (s) (L/min)
0.5 3.0 100 0.05 0.2
5 36 32 0.2 1.0
15 110 26 0.2 1.0
75 520 12 0.2 2.0

Configuration
Setting start-up values for pressures, FiO2 Selecting the factory settings
and I:E
 Touch the Dräger default button (G) and
Prerequisite: The Start settings page (A) is open. confirm with the rotary knob.
1 Touch the Pressures, O2, I:E tab (B). The Dräger default button also resets other start-
System setup
Alarms page to the factory settings.
Parameter Factory-set start-up value

B
(Dräger default)
C
PEEP 5 mbar (5 cmH2O)
D A Psupp 0 mbar (0 cmH2O)
Pinsp 15 mbar (15 cmH2O)
Pmax 40 mbar (40 cmH2O)
E G Plow 5 mbar (5 cmH2O)
F
152
Phigh 15 mbar (15 cmH2O)

2 Touch the corresponding button for the FiO2 21 Vol%
parameters:
– Pressures (C) I:E 1:2
– APRV pressures (D)
– FiO2 (E) Defining the start-up setting of the additional
– I:E (F) settings
3 Set the value by turning the rotary knob and Prerequisite: The Start settings page (A) is open.
push to confirm.
1 Touch the Other settings tab (B).
System setup
B
C
D A
E
F
153
The following settings can be switched on or off:

– Volume Guarantee (C)
– AutoFlow (D)
– Apnea Ventilation (E)
2 Touch button On or Off.

Configuration
A start-up value can be set for the expiratory Enter the tube diameter (I) according to the
termination criterion Exp. term. (F): selected tube type:
– ET: 2 to 12 mm
4 Touch the button (F).
– Trach.: 2.5 to 12 mm
In the Neo. patient category, only the ET tube (G)
push to confirm.
type is available.
If the Dräger default button is touched on another
The setting range for the tube diameter is
page, e.g., the Ventilation > Start settings page or
selectable in accordance with the patient category:
the Alarms page, the settings are also set to the
– Patient category Adult: 5 to 12 mm
factory settings.
– Patient category Ped. pat.: 2 to 8 mm
– Patient category Neo.: 2 to 5 mm
Defining start-up settings for tube
5 Touch the relevant button for the patient
compensation
category.
Prerequisite: The Start settings page (A) is open.
6 Set the value for the tube diameter by turning
1 Touch the ATC tab (B). the rotary knob and push to confirm.
System setup Enter degree of compensation (J) for the respective

patient category: 0 to 100 %
B 7 Touch the relevant button for the patient

C category.
D 8 Set the value for the degree of compensation by
E F A turning the rotary knob and push to confirm.
G H Evita V300 starts with the start-up settings selected
for the ventilation parameters.
I The customized settings for inspiratory and
J expiratory compensation are immediately effective
154
when ATC is set.

– Tube comp. (ATC) (C) If the Dräger default button is touched on another
– Expiratory compensation (D) page, the settings for inspiratory and expiratory
compensation are also set to the factory settings.
2 Touch the On or Off button and confirm with the
rotary knob.
Inspiratory compensation can be selected for
spontaneous and mandatory or only spontaneous
breaths:
– Spon + mand (E)
– Only spon (F)
3 Touch the appropriate button and confirm with
the rotary knob.
Selecting the tube type:
4 Touch the ET (G) or Trach. (H) button and
confirm.

Configuration
Configuring general settings Setting a maneuver
Prerequisite: The Ventilation page (A) is open. Prerequisite: The Ventilation page (A) is open.
1 Touch the General settings tab (B). 1 Touch the Maneuver tab (B).
System setup System setup

A A
C
D C D E
E
B
B
F
G
155_V300
H
156

– Leakage Compensation (C) Setting the FiO2 concentration for the suction
– Automatic return from Apnea Ventilation (D) maneuver
– Apnea Ventilation alarm (E) For the Adult patient category, the start-up value
– Pmax/Paw high autoset (F) for FiO2 (C) is set to 100 Vol% and cannot be
– Inspiratory termination (G) changed.
– Anti Air Shower (H)
Patient categories Ped. pat. and Neo.:
2 Touch the On or Off button as appropriate and For the suction maneuver, FiO2 is set based on the
confirm with the rotary knob. current FiO2 concentration using a factor between
Evita V300 starts with the selected settings. 1.0 and 2.0.
For further information on the Anti Air Shower 2 Touch button (D) or (E).
function, see page 358. 3 Set the factor by turning the rotary knob and
push to confirm.
Evita V300 starts with the selected start-up
settings.

Configuration
Importing and exporting configurations
Evita V300 can export the device configuration on

a USB storage medium. The configuration saved
on the USB storage medium can be imported to
other Evita V300 devices.
The following settings from the system
configuration are exported and imported:
Screen layout General settings

Views1)
Customized data
Config. buttons
Trends graphic 1
Trends graphic 2
Therapy bar
Alarms Preset limits
Alarm vol./tone
Ventilation Patient category
Modes
Start settings VT, RR, Trigger
Pressures, O2, I:E
Other settings
ATC
General settings
Maneuver
System status Exchange intervals
System Country
Units
Interface LAN
COM
External display
1) Views are only exported if the view configured was first saved on the Screen layout page. When a configuration is imported,
all the current views are overwritten, including the locked views.

Configuration
Preparing the configuration exchange Evita V300 reports the completion of the
configuration with a low-priority alarm.
 Insert the USB storage medium into the USB
port on Infinity C300. 6 Check the settings of the imported
configuration.
menu bar.
Exporting a configuration from the device to a
2 Touch the Config. exchange tab (A).
USB storage medium
System setup 1 Touch the Export button (F).
A
B E D If the USB storage medium already contains a

F configuration, a message appears stating that this
configuration will be overwritten.
C
No export is possible onto the USB storage
medium if it is full. The Export button (F) is
grayed out and cannot be activated.
157
B Configuration on the device with the date of

export
C Existing configurations on the USB storage
medium
D Selected configuration on the USB storage
medium with the date of export
Importing a configuration from a USB storage

medium to the device
A configuration can only be imported in standby
mode.
1 Switch Evita V300 to standby mode.
2 Select a configuration from the USB storage
medium (C).
3 Touch the Import button (E).
If there is no valid configuration saved on the USB
storage medium, the system issues a message.
After the import, Evita V300 is switched off
automatically.
5 Switch Evita V300 on again.

Configuration
Installing applications
Evita V300 can be supplemented with additional Additional information

Dräger applications. The applications are installed
The Applications page can be configured as a
with a SIM card.
button in the main menu bar for direct access. See
1 Insert the SIM card into the USB SIM card "Assigning functions to additional buttons"
reader. on page 181.
2 Insert the USB SIM card reader into the USB The Applications button is located in the quick
port on Infinity C300. access bar.
menu bar.
4 Touch the Applications tab (A).
System setup
A
C B
D
158
Evita V300 displays the already installed

applications (B) and the applications available on
the SIM card (C).
Installing applications
1 Touch the Install button (D).
2 Select the application from the list (C) with the
rotary knob and push to confirm.
3 Install the next application (repeat steps 1 to 3).
4 After all applications are installed, restart
Evita V300.
The installed applications are displayed in the list
(B).

Configuration
System status
The System status page contains the following

information:
– General status information on maintenance and
operating hours
Displaying general status information

menu bar.
2 Touch the System status tab (A).
4 Touch the General status tab (B).
System setup
A
C
B
D
E
F
159_neu
G
The following information is displayed:
– Next service due (C)
– Cockpit (D)
– Operating hours: Standby
– Operating hours: Running
– Ventilation unit (E)
– Operating hours: Standby
– Operating hours: Running
– Internal battery installation date
– Gas supply unit (GS500) (F)
– Operating hours: Blower
– Installation date
– Power supply unit (PS500) (G), if present
– Installation date of the batteries in the
PS500

Configuration
Configuring exchange intervals The exchange interval and the period of use
already elapsed for the relevant accessory (C) are
The user can configure how much of the period of displayed.
use elapses before Evita V300 displays a message
indicating that the next exchange of an accessory is Setting the exchange intervals
due. This depends on the device type.
5 Touch the appropriate button (D).
The exchange interval must be defined in
accordance with the applicable hygiene guidelines 6 Set the value by turning the rotary knob and
or in accordance with the specifications of the push to confirm.
corresponding accessory's instructions for use. The settings are effective immediately.
WARNING
Risk of inappropriate operating life No display of exchange intervals
Exchange monitoring only considers the  Touch the appropriate button (D). Set Off by
actual period of use and not the current status turning the rotary knob and push to confirm.
of the Infinity ID accessory and therefore does
not release the user from the responsibility of Additional information
periodically checking the accessory.
Evita V300 displays the remaining period of use for
The exchange interval set for exchange the accessories on the Start/Standby >
monitoring does not guarantee that the Accessory status page.
accessory will last until the exchange interval
has expired. Sterilization of the expiratory valve or inspiratory
transmission. This may mean that Infinity ID
Opening the exchange interval page breathing circuit functions may not work or may no
1 Touch the System setup... button in the main longer work reliably. The period of use for the
menu bar. Infinity ID accessories is displayed with ---.
2 Touch the System status tab (A).

4 Touch the Exchange intervals tab (B).
System setup
A
C D
C D
B
C D
159

Configuration
System settings
The following system settings can be configured: Selecting the screen text language
– Country
Evita V300 is factory set to the customer's own
– Units
language. The current language is displayed in the
– Interface (interfaces)
field (C).
– Supply units (supply units)
– Service Selecting a different language:
The customized settings are immediately effective. 2 Touch the button (D).
1 Touch the System setup... button. Evita V300 opens the selection list containing the
available languages.
2 Touch the System tab.
3 Select the language with the rotary knob and
Evita V300 displays the following configurable
push to confirm.
settings in an overview:
– Language, date and time
– Units for measured values and settings Setting the date and time
– Network and serial interfaces
Evita V300 does not change over automatically
– GS500
between daylight saving time and standard time.
– Service information
The user must change the time manually.
Otherwise the times will be incorrect on the screen
and for saved values and actions (e.g., in the
Selecting country-specific settings logbook).
Prerequisite: The System page (A) is open. Changing the system time changes the time
displayed in trends, logbook, alarm history,
1 Touch the Country tab (B). maneuver measured values and reference loops.
System setup The data saved up to the change is displayed with
the system time up till then.
A
1 Touch the appropriate button:
C D – Day (E)
E F G B
– Month (F)
H :
I J – Year (G)
– Hours (H)
K – Minutes (I)
The order of the buttons (E) and (F) varies
depending on language.
160
push to confirm.
3 After completing all the settings for the date and
time, touch the Apply button (J).

Configuration
Entering the height above sea level

The ambient pressure is considered in the
calculation of measured values. The ambient
pressure sensor is checked for plausibility using the
entered height above sea level. Incorrect entries
can mean that the ambient pressure sensor is
recognized as incorrect.
1 Touch the button (K).
2 Set the height by turning the rotary knob and
push to confirm.
Configuring units
Prerequisite: The System page (A) is open.

1 Touch the Units tab (B).
System setup
A
C
D B
E
161
The units for the following parameters can be

selected.
– Airway pressure (C) in mbar or cmH2O
– Height (D) in m, cm or feet, inch
– CO2 (E) in Vol% or mmHg or kPa
The units selected for the CO2 measured value
are adopted for selection of the alarm limit.
2 Touch the relevant button for the unit.

Configuration
Configuring interfaces Serial interfaces

The data exchange takes place via the serial
The communication settings can be configured to interfaces (COM 1, COM 2) with MEDIBUS-
enable connection to a network and data exchange capable display devices, e.g., patient monitor or
with other devices. Patient Data Management System.
LAN
1 Touch the Interface tab (B).
Use of LAN ports is exclusively permitted for
service purposes. Parameters must be set for 2 Touch the COM tab (C).
connection to a network.
System setup
Prerequisite: The System page (A) is open. A
C
System setup D
A E B
D C F
E G
F B
G
162_V300
H
The settings for COM 1 and COM 2 are displayed.
MEDIBUS or MEDIBUS.X can be selected for the
Protocol parameter.
353
3 Touch the relevant button for the interface

The LAN page (C) appears by default. The settings parameters:
are displayed. DHCP (D) must be deactivated in – Protocol (D)
order to change the settings. – Baud rate (E)
Deactivating DHCP (D): – Parity (F)
– Stop bit (G)
1 Touch the Off button.
4 Select the setting with the rotary knob and push
2 Touch the relevant button for the network to confirm.
parameters:
– IP address (E)
– Subnet mask (F)
– Gateway (G)
3 Enter the login details using the rotary knob and
confirm.
4 Touch the Apply button (H).
Activating DHCP (D):
5 Touch the On button.

Configuration
External screen
If a second screen is connected to Infinity C300,
the user has to define whether the screen is analog
or digital.
2 Touch the External display tab (C).
System setup
A
D E
C
B
320
3 Touch the Digital (D) or Analog (E) button.
The serial interface connectors are located on the
rear of Infinity C300.

Configuration
Configuring supply units  Touch the Off button (C).

The gas supply unit is no longer available. In the
Functionality of the GS500 gas supply unit device check, the system does not display the test
step Gas supply unit.
The functionality of the gas supply unit can be
deactivated if Evita V300 is equipped with a gas Activating the functionality of the gas supply unit:
supply unit that is currently not supposed to be 1 Touch the On button (D).
used.
Evita V300 displays in the message field (E) that
Prerequisite: The System page (A) is open. the device check has to be carried out.
 Touch the Supply units tab (B). 2 Perform device check.
System setup E
A Additional information
D C For information on using the gas supply unit, see

"GS500 gas supply unit" on page 127.
B
326
Service dialog
The service dialog is password-protected and

reserved for DrägerService or experts.
For further information on Remote Service, see
chapter "Remote Service" on page 265.

Alarm – Cause – Remedy
The alarm messages are displayed in the message

field of the header bar in hierarchical order. See
"Display of alarms" on page 142.
In order to classify the alarms within an alarm
category, internal priority numbers are given after
the exclamation marks in the table below. The most
critical alarm is awarded the number 255. The
priority of the alarm decreases the lower the
number is.
In the following table, the alarm messages are
listed in alphabetical order. If an alarm occurs, the
table helps to identify causes and remedies. The
different causes and remedies should be worked
through in the order listed until the alarm has been
resolved.
The acknowledgeable alarm messages can be
found in the chapter "Alarm – Cause – Remedy".
For alarm messages that can be acknowledged the
"Remedy" column in the table contains the
information that the alarm message can be
acknowledged by pressing the ALARM RESET
button and confirming with the rotary knob.
The following alarm messages that can be
acknowledged are not listed:
– Suction maneuver overused?
– PEEP high (!!)
– Flow sensor? Ventilation impaired

Alarm Alarm message Cause Remedy

priority
! 060 Accessory ID Accessory ID detection Ventilation can be started
detection failed malfunction. without ID functions.
Call DrägerService.
! 100 Air supply low, Air supply insufficient to Check connection to Air
GS500 active deliver the required flow supply.
and pressure.
Make sure supply
Air is supplied by the gas pressure is greater than
supply unit GS500. 3 bar (43.5 psi).
Air supply is not required Consider readjusting
when FiO2 = 100 Vol%. ventilation settings.
Remove connection to Air
supply if alarm condition
persists (to avoid reverse
flow into the Air supply).
Central Air supply Check connection to
insufficient. central air supply and to
gas supply unit GS500.
Gas delivery system is
supplied with Air delivered Make sure that the supply
by GS500. pressure is greater than
3 bar (43.5 psi).
Adjust ventilation settings,
if necessary.
!!! 190 Airway obstructed? The ventilation unit Check patient condition.
applies only a very small Check tube or mask.
volume with each
mechanical breath. The
tube or mask could be
blocked.
Patient breathes against Check patient condition.
the mechanical breaths Check ventilation settings.
during pressure-
controlled ventilation.
!!! 205 Airway pressure Breathing hose kinked. Check breathing circuit.
high Check tube or mask.
The upper alarm limit for Check patient condition.
the airway pressure has Check ventilation settings.
been exceeded. The
patient is breathing Adjust alarm limit if
against the ventilation unit necessary.
or coughing.


priority
!!! 200 Airway pressure Leakage or Check breathing circuit for
low disconnection. tight connections.
Check whether the
expiratory valve is
properly engaged.
Make sure that the tube or
mask is connected
correctly.
!!! 140 Airway pressure Airway pressure has Disconnect tube for
negative fallen below –10 mbar suctioning.
(–10 cmH2O). Check patient condition.
Check ventilation settings.
The breathing hose is Connect breathing hose to
connected to the the inspiratory valve.
expiratory valve during O2
therapy.
! 200 Alarm limit not One or more alarm limits If necessary, change
confirmed have been changed but these alarm limits and
not confirmed. confirm the change with
the rotary knob.
! 120 Alarm system Failure of primary alarm To continue ventilation
failure speaker. with this device,
continuously monitor the
In case of an alarm
device functions.
situation, the auxiliary
acoustical alarm will Call DrägerService.
sound.
!! 100 Ambient pressure Altitude setting deviates Check altitude setting and
sensor? too much from measured adjust if necessary.
ambient pressure.
If the setting has been
adjusted, the device
check must be repeated.
Ambient pressure sensor Accuracy of measured
failure. values depending on the
atmospheric pressure
could be impaired (e.g.,
MV, O2 concentration).


priority
!!! 181 Apnea The patient has stopped Check patient condition.
breathing. Apply controlled
ventilation if necessary.
Obstruction. Check patient condition.
Check breathing circuit.
Check tube or mask.
Flow sensor is not Calibrate flow sensor and
calibrated or faulty. replace it if necessary.
!! 230 Apnea Ventilation Due to detected apnea, Check patient condition.
the ventilation unit has Check tube or mask.
automatically switched to
Apnea Ventilation. Check ventilation settings
and patient condition.
Return to the original
ventilation mode by
touching the "Apn. Vent.
reset" button and confirm
with rotary knob.
! 020 Application already Application is already Acknowledge message by
installed installed. touching "ALARM
RESET" button and
confirm with rotary knob.
! 020 Application transfer Invalid application. Acknowledge message by
failed touching "ALARM
RESET" button and
Application installation Acknowledge message by
failed. touching "ALARM
RESET" button and
!! 050 "Audio paused" key The "Audio paused" key is The function of the "Audio
used too often either faulty or was paused" key is not
pressed more than available while the defect
80 times per hour. exists.
If the defect cannot be
remedied, call
DrägerService.


priority
!! 050 "Audio paused" The "Audio paused" Ventilation functions are
overused or stuck button is either stuck or not affected.
faulty or was pressed for
Do not press the "Audio
more than 6 seconds.
paused" button longer
than 6 seconds.
If the error persists, call
DrägerService.
!! 120 Auxiliary acoustical Failure of auxiliary alarm To continue ventilation
alarm failure speaker. with this device,
In case of mains failure
device functions.
and discharged battery,
there is no power failure Downgrade alarm priority
alarm. by touching "ALARM
RESET" button and
In case of faulty primary
alarm speaker, there is no
acoustical alarm at all. Call DrägerService.
!!! 160 Battery activated The ventilation unit is Connect device to the
powered by the battery as mains power supply.
there is no mains power
supply.
!! 200 Battery activated The ventilation unit is Connect device to the
supply.
! 201 Battery activated The ventilation unit is Connect device to the
supply.
! 127 Battery charging Battery charging is Battery charging
deferred deferred to prevent continues automatically
battery overheating. The and is indicated by a
device can be used flashing segment in the
normally. battery symbol.
! 100 Battery check in The battery check has Wait until the battery
progress been started. check is completed. In the
event of mains power
supply failure, battery
operation is limited.
! 100 Battery check The interval for the battery Perform the battery check.
recommended check has been
exceeded.


priority
!!! 254 Battery discharged The remaining calculated Connect device
operating time of the immediately to the mains
battery is less than power supply.
5 minutes.
!! 120 Battery failure Battery operation is not To continue ventilation
available in the event of with this device,
mains power supply continuously monitor the
failure. device functions.
!!! 250 Battery low The remaining calculated Connect device to the
operating time of the mains power supply.
battery is less than
10 minutes.
!! 251 Battery low The remaining calculated Connect device to the
operating time of the mains power supply.
battery is less than
10 minutes.
!! 105 Breath. circ. does Connected breathing Use suitable breathing
not fit to patient circuit does not fit to circuit or select correct
category selected patient category. patient category.
!! 100 Breathing circuit Breathing circuit has been Check breathing circuit.
does not match exchanged. The new
Acknowledge message by
config. breathing circuit does not
pressing "ALARM
match the one that was
RESET" and confirm.
used before.
! 060 Breathing circuit ID Accessory ID detection Replace ID Breathing
invalid failed. Circuit or perform
breathing circuit check.
No automatic adjustment
of breathing circuit Acknowledge message by
properties. touching "ALARM
RESET" button and
Accessory ID detection Replace Infinity ID
failed. Breathing Circuit
Breathing circuit or
exchange interval cannot
acknowledge message by
be monitored.
touching "ALARM
RESET" button and


priority
!! 205 Breathing hose The pressure at the Check breathing circuit.
kinked inspiratory port is greater Check mask.
than 30 mbar
(30 cmH2O), e.g., due to a
kinked or blocked hose, or
a blocked mask.
!! 105 Breathing hoses Inspiratory and expiratory Connect inspiratory and
interchanged limbs of the breathing expiratory limbs of the
circuit are connected breathing circuit correctly.
reversely to the ventilation
unit.
! 100 Calibration of Calibration of expiratory Calibrate flow sensor and
expiratory flow flow sensor failed. replace it if necessary.
sensor failed
!!! 240 Calibration of gas Technical malfunction Disconnect patient from
delivery system detected during operation. the device and continue
required ventilation without delay
Calibration of gas delivery
using another
system failed.
independent ventilator.
Recalibration necessary.
Perform device check.
Ventilation not possible.


priority
! 012 Calibration of gas Technical malfunction Perform device check.
delivery system detected in standby
Do not start with
required mode.
ventilation before device
Calibration of gas delivery check is performed:
system failed. Ventilation will not be
possible.
Technical malfunction Perform device check.
detected in standby
mode.
Calibration of gas delivery
system is due.
Accuracy of gas delivery
system could be impaired.
Technical malfunction Perform device check.
detected in standby
Do not start with
mode.
ventilation before device
Calibration of gas delivery check is performed:
system failed. Ventilation will not be
possible.
If alarm cannot be
resolved by performing
device check, call
DrägerService.


priority
!!! 228 Calibration of neo. Calibration data is Patient category
flow sensor corrupted. "Neonates":
required
Calibrate neonatal flow
sensor.
If calibration was not
successful, deactivate
neonatal flow monitoring
and use external flow
monitoring.
Patient category
"Pediatric patients":
Calibrate neonatal flow
sensor.
If calibration was not
successful, deactivate
integrated neonatal flow
monitoring.
Continue ventilation with
expiratory flow sensor.
!! 115 Calibration of neo. After switching on the Calibrate neonatal flow
flow sensor ventilation unit, the sensor.
required neonatal flow sensor
needs to be calibrated.
!!! 228 Calibration of Calibration of neonatal Calibrate neonatal flow
neonatal flow flow sensor failed. sensor.
sensor failed
Seal neonatal flow sensor
properly during
calibration.
Neonatal flow sensor Replace neonatal flow
malfunction. sensor or sensor insert
and calibrate the new
sensor.


priority
!! 115 Calibration of Calibration of neonatal Calibrate neonatal flow
neonatal flow flow sensor failed. sensor.
sensor failed
Seal neonatal flow sensor
properly during
calibration.
sensor.
!! 100 Check CO2 cuvette The selected type of CO2 Select the correct type of
cuvette is not correct. CO2 cuvette.
CO2 cuvette or sensor Clean the CO2 cuvette or
soiled. sensor.
CO2 sensor drift. Perform zero calibration.
Inspiratory CO2 Check ventilation settings.
concentration high. Check patient condition.
!! 140 Check settings Loss of stored data was Check all settings and
detected. adjust if necessary.
touching "ALARM
RESET" button and
!! 252 Check ventilation Due to data loss, the Check all therapy settings
settings device uses previous and adjust them if
settings. necessary.
touching "ALARM
RESET" button and


priority
!! 252 Check ventilation While adjusting ventilation The device may apply
settings settings or alarm limits, a default settings. Check
power interruption ventilation settings and
occurred. alarm limits. Acknowledge
message by touching
"ALARM RESET" button
and confirm with rotary
knob.
Data loss. The device may apply
default settings. Check
ventilation settings and
alarm limits. Acknowledge
message by touching
knob.
!!! 144 Clean CO2 cuvette Cuvette or sensor window Use clean cuvette and/or
is soiled, e.g. with clean CO2 sensor.
deposits due to
nebulization.
!!! 145 CO2 measurement CO2 sensor faulty. Replace faulty CO2
failed sensor.
CO2 measurement Use external CO2
incorrect. monitoring and deactivate
integrated CO2
monitoring.
!!! 146 CO2 sensor? Plug of CO2 sensor was Reinsert plug.
removed during
operation.
CO2 sensor not Place CO2 sensor on
positioned on cuvette. cuvette.
CO2 sensor faulty. Replace faulty CO2
sensor.
!!! 142 CO2 zero Zero point of the CO2 Perform zero calibration.
calibration? sensor is outside of the
tolerance range.
Cuvette or sensor window Use clean cuvette and/or
is soiled, e.g. with clean CO2 sensor.
deposits due to
nebulization.


priority
! 100 Cockpit restarted Internal communication Check all therapy settings
error caused restart of the and adjust them if
cockpit. necessary.
touching "ALARM
RESET" button and
! 100 Continuous Continuous nebulization To end continuous
nebulization was activated by the user. nebulization, press the
activated "Cancel" button if
required.
!!! 252 Data loss Loss of stored data was To continue ventilation
detected. with this device,
device functions.
Downgrade alarm priority
by touching "ALARM
RESET" button and
!! 252 Data loss Loss of stored data was To continue ventilation
detected. with this device,
device functions.
Downgrade alarm priority
by touching "ALARM
RESET" button and


priority
!! 240 Device check failed A safety-related failure Do not use this device for
was detected during ventilation therapy.
device check.
Check assembly and
position of expiratory
valve.
Replace expiratory valve if
required.
Do not use this device for
ventilation therapy unless
the device check was
repeated successfully.
! 100 Device check Device check not Perform device check.
incomplete completely performed or
partially unsuccessful.
touching "ALARM
RESET" button and
!!! 253 Device failure A system failure was Disconnect patient from
detected. the device and continue
ventilation without delay
using another
!!! 253 Device failure Due to missing Immediately disconnect
measurements, the patient from the device
ventilation is not possible and continue ventilation
anymore. without delay using
another independent
ventilator.
!!! 253 Device failure (1) Internal safety system Disconnect patient from
failure. the device and continue
using another


priority
!!! 253 Device failure (10) A failure was detected by Disconnect patient from
the safety software the device and continue
system. ventilation without delay
using another
!!! 253 Device failure (11) A failure was detected Disconnect patient from
during the start-up phase. the device and continue
using another
!!! 253 Device failure (12) A system failure was Disconnect patient from
detected. the device and continue
using another
!! 090 Device failure (13) The broken wire detection Ventilation functions are
for the flow sensor is not affected.
faulty.
!!! 253 Device failure (2) Internal safety system Do not use this device for
failure. ventilation therapy.
!!! 253 Device failure (3) Internal communication Disconnect patient from
using another
!!! 253 Device failure (4) Defective system data Disconnect patient from
storage media detected. the device and continue
using another
Switch off the device.


priority
!!! 253 Device failure (5) Gas delivery system Disconnect patient from
faulty. the device and continue
using another
using another
using another
!!! 253 Device failure (8) Test alarm which should Disconnect patient from
only be triggered during the device and continue
maintenance. ventilation without delay
using another
!! 100 Device failure (9) No mass storage device Acknowledge message by
found. touching "ALARM
RESET" button and
!!! 200 Device The internal device Disconnect patient from
temperature high temperature is too high. the device and continue
using another
Switch off the device.


priority
!! 141 Device Failure of the internal To continue ventilation
temperature breathing-gas with this device, use
measurement temperature external breathing gas
failed measurement. temperature monitoring.
In case of a too high Call DrägerService.
breathing-gas
temperature, there is no
alarm.
Failure of the internal To continue ventilation
temperature with this device,
measurement. continuously monitor the
device functions.
No alarm in case of a too
high device temperature. Call DrägerService.
!!! 200 Disconnection? Leakage or Check breathing circuit for
disconnection. tight connections.
Check whether the
expiratory valve is
properly engaged.
mask is connected
correctly.
!!! 138 etCO2 high Upper alarm limit for end- Check patient condition.
expiratory CO2
concentration has been
exceeded. Adjust alarm limit if
necessary.
Perform CO2 zero
calibration if necessary.
Check whether the
cuvette windows are
soiled.


priority
!!! 138 etCO2 low Lower alarm limit for end- Check patient condition.
expiratory CO2
concentration has been
exceeded. Adjust alarm limit if
necessary.
Perform CO2 zero
calibration if necessary.
Check whether the
cuvette windows are
soiled.
!!! 227 Expiratory flow Water in flow sensor. Dry flow sensor.
measurement Flow sensor is not Calibrate flow sensor and
failed calibrated or faulty. replace it if necessary.
Flow measurement Ventilation functions are
malfunction. affected.
To continue ventilation
with this device, use
external flow monitoring
and deactivate integrated
flow monitoring.
! 150 Expiratory hold The "Exp. hold" button Release "Exp. hold"
interrupted was pressed too long. button.
!!! 220 Expiratory valve Expiratory valve is not Insert expiratory valve
faulty properly connected to the correctly.
socket.
Expiratory valve faulty. Replace expiratory valve.
!!! 105 Expiratory valve Incompatible expiratory Replace expiratory valve.
incompatible valve connected to the
socket.
!! 100 Expiratory valve Incompatible expiratory Replace expiratory valve.
incompatible valve connected to the
socket.
!!! 130 FiO2 high O2 sensor is not Calibrate O2 sensor.
calibrated.
Mixer function faulty. Call DrägerService.


priority
!!! 130 FiO2 low O2 sensor is not Calibrate O2 sensor.
calibrated.
Mixer function faulty. Call DrägerService.
!! 100 Flow measurement Flow sensor is not Calibrate flow sensor and
inaccurate calibrated or faulty. replace it if necessary.
Water in flow sensor. Drain water trap of
breathing circuit. Dry flow
sensor.
Flow measurement is not To continue ventilation
reliable. Expiratory minute with this device, use
volume exceeds minute external flow monitoring
volume delivered by the and deactivate integrated
ventilation unit. flow monitoring.
This could impair the
quality of ventilation.
!!! 228 Flow sensor? Flow sensor is not Insert flow sensor
Ventilation correctly inserted in correctly.
impaired rubber lip of expiratory
valve.
!! 140 Flow sensor? Ventilation patterns for Activate flow monitoring.
Ventilation which a flow sensor is Change to a ventilation
impaired necessary cannot be mode that does not
performed. The ventilation require a flow sensor.
unit applies back-up
ventilation. Calibrate flow sensor and
replace it if necessary.
!!! 110 GS500 Communication to gas Check communication
communication supply unit GS500 lost. connection to gas supply
failure unit GS500.
pressing "ALARM
RESET" and confirm.


priority
! 110 GS500 Communication to gas Check communication
communication supply unit GS500 lost. connection to gas supply
failure unit GS500.
pressing "ALARM
RESET" and confirm.
!!! 100 GS500 failure Air supply insufficient to Check connection to gas
deliver required flow and supply unit GS500.
pressure.
If this condition persists,
Gas delivery system call DrägerService.
supplied with O2 only.
Ventilation continues with
O2 only.
!!! 110 GS500 internal Gas supply unit GS500 Shut down ventilation unit.
failure has reported a failure. Switch toggle switch to
"Off" to disconnect
ventilation unit from power
supply. Switch toggle
switch to "On" and restart
ventilation unit.
call DrägerService.
!! 110 GS500 internal Gas supply unit GS500 Shut down ventilation unit.
failure has reported a failure. Switch toggle switch to
"Off" to disconnect
ventilation unit from power
supply. Switch toggle
switch to "On" and restart
ventilation unit.
call DrägerService.
!!! 110 GS500 Gas supply unit GS500 Shut down ventilation unit.
temperature too temperature is too high. Switch toggle switch to
high "Off".


priority
! 060 ID expiratory Accessory ID detection Replace ID expiratory
heated filter failure failed. heated filter
Exchange interval of the or
expiratory heated filter
cannot be monitored.
touching "ALARM
RESET" key and confirm
with rotary knob.
! 060 ID tag of expiratory Accessory ID detection Replace Infinity ID
valve faulty failed. Expiratory Valve
Expiratory valve or
exchange interval cannot
be monitored.
touching "ALARM
RESET" button and
!! 030 ID tag of flow Accessory ID detection Replace Infinity ID Flow
sensor faulty failed. Sensor
Flow sensor exchange or
interval cannot be
monitored.
touching "ALARM
RESET" button and
! 020 Import failed, check Configuration import Check all settings and
settings failed. adjust if necessary.
touching "ALARM
RESET" button and
! 020 Import successful, Configuration import was Check all settings and
check settings successful. adjust if necessary.
touching "ALARM
RESET" button and
! 001 Incompatible flow An incompatible flow Replace incompatible flow
sensor detected sensor is connected to the sensor with an Infinity ID
ventilation unit. Ventilation Flow Sensor.
and monitoring could be
impaired.


priority
! 150 Inspiratory hold The "Man. insp./hold" Release "Man. insp./hold"
interrupted button was pressed too button.
long.
!! 210 Internal battery The batteries of PS500 Connect device to the
activated are depleted. Power mains power supply.
supply is provided by the
internal battery.
!! 120 Internal power Technical failure detected. To continue ventilation
supply failure with this device,
device functions.
! 140 Leakage Only monitored for Check for leakages in
intubated patients! breathing circuit.
The measured relative Make sure that the tube is
leakage exceeds 55 %. connected correctly.
! 008 MEDIBUS MEDIBUS Ventilation functions are
communication communication failure. not affected.
failed
Check MEDIBUS
connection.
Check MEDIBUS settings.
!!! 160 MV high The minute volume Check patient condition.
exceeds the upper alarm Check ventilation settings.
limit.
Adjust alarm limit if
necessary.
Water in flow sensor. Drain water trap of
breathing circuit. Dry flow
sensor.


priority
!!! 160 MV low The minute volume has Check patient condition.
fallen below the lower Check ventilation settings.
alarm limit.
necessary.
Obstruction Check patient condition.
Check tube or mask.
Leakage or Check breathing circuit for
Check whether the
expiratory valve is
properly engaged.
mask is connected
correctly.
Device failure. Disconnect patient from
the device and continue
using another


priority
!! 110 Nebulization Air and O2 supply Check connections to Air
canceled insufficient to deliver and O2 supply.
required flow and
Make sure supply
pressure for nebulization.
pressures are greater
Nebulization canceled. than 3 bar (43.5 psi).
touching "ALARM
RESET" button and
Inspiratory flow Increase inspiratory flow
insufficient for to more than 9 L/min for
nebulization. neonates and pediatric
patients or 16 L/min for
adults.
touching "ALARM
RESET" button and
Air supply insufficient to Check connection to Air
deliver required flow and supply.
Make sure supply
pressure is greater than
3 bar (43.5 psi).
touching "ALARM
RESET" button and
O2 supply insufficient to Check connection to O2
Make sure supply
3 bar (43.5 psi).
touching "ALARM
RESET" button and


priority
Internal supply pressures Acknowledge message by
too high. touching "ALARM
RESET" button and
Air and O2 supply
inappropriate to deliver
required flow and Call DrägerService.
Nebulization canceled.
Neonatal flow monitoring Deactivate neonatal flow
active. monitoring and remove
Nebulization is only
possible if neonatal flow Acknowledge message by
monitoring is deactivated touching "ALARM
and neonatal flow sensor RESET" button and
is removed from breathing confirm with rotary knob.
circuit.
Expiratory flow monitoring Check expiratory flow
failed. sensor and check whether
expiratory flow monitoring
Nebulization is only
is activated.
possible if expiratory flow
monitoring is activated. Acknowledge message by
touching "ALARM
RESET" button and
Incompatible ventilation Select an appropriate
mode. ventilation mode.
Nebulization is only Acknowledge message by
possible in volume- touching "ALARM
controlled ventilation RESET" button and
modes with AutoFlow or in confirm with rotary knob.
pressure-controlled
ventilation modes.
Incompatible ventilation Select an appropriate
mode. ventilation mode.
Nebulization is only Acknowledge message by
possible in pressure- touching "ALARM
controlled ventilation RESET" button and
modes without Volume confirm with rotary knob.
Guarantee.


priority
! 100 Nebulization Nebulization finished or Acknowledge message by
finished canceled. touching "ALARM
RESET" button and
! 100 Nebulization Nebulization finished or Install neonatal flow
finished canceled. sensor. Switch on
neonatal flow monitoring.
pressing "ALARM
RESET" and confirm.
!! 100 Nebulizer uses Air O2 supply insufficient to Check connection to O2
only deliver required flow and supply.
Make sure supply
Nebulizer is supplied with pressure is greater than
Air only. 3 bar (43.5 psi).
Increased deviation from Downgrade alarm priority
the set FiO2. by touching "ALARM
RESET" button and
!! 100 Nebulizer uses O2 Air supply insufficient to Check connection to Air
only deliver required flow and supply.
Make sure supply
Nebulizer is supplied with pressure is greater than
O2 only. 3 bar (43.5 psi).
Increased deviation from Downgrade alarm priority
the set FiO2. by touching "ALARM
RESET" button and


priority
!!! 228 Neonatal flow Neonatal flow In case of modes with tidal
measurement measurement volume or trigger setting:
failed malfunction.
Change ventilation mode
if required.
Use external flow
monitoring and deactivate
the integrated flow
monitoring.
In case of modes without
tidal volume or trigger
setting:
Ventilation functions are
not affected.
and deactivate the
monitoring.
Patient category
"Pediatric patient":
Deactivate integrated
neonatal flow monitoring
and use expiratory flow
monitoring.
!! 115 Neonatal flow Neonatal flow Ventilation continues with
measurement measurement expiratory flow sensor.
failed malfunction.


priority
!!! 228 Neonatal flow Neonatal flow sensor Replace neonatal flow
sensor failure cable faulty. sensor cable.
faulty. sensor or sensor insert
sensor.
Neonatal flow In case of modes with tidal
measurement volume or trigger setting:
malfunction.
Change ventilation mode
if required.
Use external flow
monitoring and deactivate
the integrated flow
monitoring.
In case of modes without
tidal volume or trigger
setting:
Ventilation functions are
not affected.
and deactivate the
monitoring.
!! 115 Neonatal flow Neonatal flow sensor Replace neonatal flow
sensor failure cable faulty. sensor cable.
faulty. sensor or sensor insert
sensor.
Neonatal flow Ventilation continues with
measurement expiratory flow sensor.
malfunction.


priority
! 100 Neonatal flow Reconnection of the Confirm message if
sensor replaced? neonatal flow sensor calibrated neonatal flow
detected. sensor is still used.
Otherwise calibrate
Neonatal flow monitoring Confirm message if
was temporarily calibrated neonatal flow
deactivated. sensor is still used.
Otherwise calibrate
!! 115 Neonatal flow Water or secretion in the Replace neonatal flow
sensor soiled neonatal flow sensor. sensor or sensor insert
sensor.
!!! 229 Neonatal flow Neonatal flow sensor is Check connections of the
sensor? not connected. neonatal flow sensor and
cable.
sensor.
!!! 140 Neonatal flow Neonatal flow sensor not Check whether the
sensor? installed in the breathing neonatal flow sensor is
circuit. fitted correctly.
Replace neonatal flow
sensor if necessary.
!! 119 Neonatal flow Neonatal flow sensor is Check connections of the
sensor? not connected. neonatal flow sensor and
cable.
sensor.
! 140 Neonatal flow Neonatal flow sensor not Check whether the
sensor? installed in the breathing neonatal flow sensor is
circuit. fitted correctly.
Replace neonatal flow
sensor if necessary.


priority
!!! 250 No Air supply Air supply insufficient to Check connection to Air
pressure.
Make sure supply
Gas delivery system pressure is greater than
supplied with O2 only. 3 bar (43.5 psi).
Ventilation continues with Consider readjusting
O2 only. ventilation settings.
! 100 No Air supply Air supply insufficient. Check connection to Air
supply.
If FiO2 = 100 Vol%, Air
supply is not required. Make sure supply
3 bar (43.5 psi).
Consider readjusting
ventilation settings.
!!! 250 No O2 supply O2 supply insufficient to Check connection to O2
pressure.
Make sure supply
Gas delivery system pressure is greater than
supplied with Air only. 3 bar (43.5 psi).
Ventilation continues with Consider readjusting
Air only. ventilation settings.
Remove connection to O2
flow into the O2 supply).


priority
! 100 No O2 supply O2 supply insufficient. Check connection to O2
supply.
If FiO2 = 21 Vol%, O2
supply is not required. Make sure supply
3 bar (43.5 psi).
Consider readjusting
ventilation settings.
Remove connection to O2
flow into the O2 supply).
!! 119 Nurse call failure Technical failure detected. To continue ventilation
with this device,
device functions.
!! 110 O2 and Air supply The difference between Check connections to Air
pressures differ too O2 supply pressure and and O2 supply.
much Air supply pressure can
Make sure supply
lead to an incorrect O2
pressures are greater
concentration during
than 3 bar (43.5 psi).
nebulization.
touching "ALARM
RESET" button and
!!! 132 O2 measurement O2 measurement failed. To calibrate the O2 sensor,
failed perform the device check.
Ventilation can be
continued also if the alarm
does not disappear. Use
external O2 monitoring
and deactivate the
integrated O2 monitoring.
!! 040 Oxygenation Internal error during Do not perform suction
maneuver failed oxygenation maneuver. maneuver until the device
was checked.


priority
!!! 140 PEEP high Expiratory valve or Check breathing circuit
breathing circuit and expiratory valve.
obstructed.
Check for condensate.
Expiratory resistance Check viral/bacterial filter.
increased. Replace it if necessary.
using another
!! 140 PEEP high Expiratory valve or Check breathing circuit
obstructed.
using another
!!! 140 PEEP low Measured PEEP is Check breathing circuit for
5 mbar (5 cmH2O) less tight connections.
than set PEEP. Check whether the
expiratory valve is
properly engaged.
mask is connected
correctly.
!! 210 Perform device and Device check and Perform device check.
breathing circuit breathing circuit check
check must be performed before
touching "ALARM
operation.
RESET" button and


priority
!!! 140 Plow high Expiratory valve or Check breathing circuit
obstructed.
using another
Not monitored if To enable monitoring
AutoRelease is enabled. switch off AutoRelease or
increase Tlow to
Not monitored if Tlow is
>1 second.
set to less than 1 second.
!!! 140 Plow low Measured Plow is 5 mbar Check breathing circuit for
(5 cmH2O) less than set tight connections.
Plow. Check whether the
expiratory valve is
properly engaged.
mask is connected
correctly.
! 140 Pressure limited The pressure of a breath Check patient condition.
is limited by the set "Paw Check ventilation settings.
high" limit or Pmax.
Adjust "Paw high" alarm
limit or Pmax.
! 140 Pressure limited! The pressure of a breath Check patient condition.
VT not reached is limited by the set "Paw Check ventilation settings.
high" limit or Pmax. The
set volume could not be Adjust "Paw high" alarm
delivered. limit or Pmax.
!!! 238 Pressure Pressure measurement Disconnect patient from

measurement malfunction. the device and continue
failed ventilation without delay
using another


priority
!! 140 Pressure Pressure measurement Accuracy of measured
measurement malfunction. values based on pressure
impaired could be impaired.
with this device,
device functions.
!! 100 Pressure Fluid in expiratory valve. Replace expiratory valve.
measurement Clean and dry used one.
inaccurate Breathing circuit check Perform or repeat
has not been performed. breathing circuit check.
The inspiratory or Check breathing circuit.
expiratory hose is
obstructed.
Pressure measurement Disconnect patient from
using another
!! 140 Pressure sensor? Ventilation patterns for To continue ventilation
Ventilation which a pressure sensor with this device, use
impaired is necessary cannot be external pressure
performed. The ventilation monitoring.
unit applies back-up
ventilation.
! 100 Product test: Not License for product test is Call DrägerService.
for clinical use installed.


priority
!!! 150 Respiratory rate The patient is breathing at Check patient condition.
high a high respiratory rate. Check ventilation settings
or spontaneous
respiratory rate.
necessary.
The set respiratory rate Adjust the respiratory rate
exceeds upper alarm limit. or the upper alarm limit for
the respiratory rate.
Auto triggering caused by Drain water trap of
water in the breathing breathing circuit. Dry flow
circuit. sensor.
! 100 Restart of Technical failure detected. Downgrade alarm priority
ventilation unit Last restart was delayed. by touching "ALARM
delayed RESET" button and
with this device,
device functions.
!! 050 Rotary knob stuck The rotary knob is either If you are still pressing the
or pressed too long faulty or was pressed for rotary knob, release it.
more than 20 seconds Otherwise press and turn
without turning. rotary knob repeatedly. If
alarm condition persists,
settings cannot be
adjusted anymore.
Disconnect patient from
using another


priority
!! 050 Rotary knob used The rotary knob is either Press and turn rotary knob
too often faulty or was pressed repeatedly.
more than 5 times per
If alarm condition persists,
second.
settings cannot be
adjusted anymore.
Disconnect patient from
using another
! 100 Service date Service date is almost Acknowledge message by
approaching reached. touching "ALARM
RESET" button and
! 100 Service date Service is due. Acknowledge message by
reached touching "ALARM
RESET" button and
! 200 Setting not One or more settings If necessary, change
confirmed have been changed but these settings and confirm
not confirmed. the change with the rotary
knob.
!!! 255 Standby mode Device has been switched Acknowledge standby
activated to standby mode. mode by touching
knob.
!! 040 Suction maneuver Internal error during Do not perform suction
failed suction maneuver. maneuver until the device
was checked.
! 140 Suction maneuver The suction maneuver Perform suction
overused? has been performed more maneuver less frequently.
than 5 times within an
hour.


priority
! 001 TVS import not TVS data is inconsistent. Adjust the patient settings
possible manually.
TVS data is too old. Check the system time.
! 200 Ventilation mode The ventilation mode has If necessary, change the
not confirmed been changed but not ventilation mode and
confirmed. confirm the change with
the rotary knob.
!! 255 Ventilation unit Internal communication Check all therapy settings
restarted error caused restart of the and adjust them if
ventilation unit. necessary.
touching "ALARM
RESET" button and
!! 166 VT high The upper alarm limit of Check patient condition.
the applied inspiratory Check ventilation settings.
tidal volume has been
exceeded during three Adjust alarm limit if
consecutive breaths. necessary.
Leakage or Check breathing circuit for

Check whether the
expiratory valve is
properly engaged.
mask is connected
correctly.
!! 166 VT high (minimum Patient breathes Check patient condition.
pressure) spontaneously more Check ventilation settings.
volume than set.
Due to leakage or Check patient condition.
increased compliance, the Check ventilation settings.
tidal volume delivered
with minimum airway Check for leakages in
pressure is higher than breathing circuit.
set.


priority
!! 166 VT low The lower alarm limit of Check patient condition.
the applied inspiratory Check ventilation settings.
tidal volume has been
exceeded during five Adjust alarm limit if
(adult and pediatric necessary.
patients) or eight
(neonatal patients)
consecutive breaths.
! 140 VT not reached Set volume could not be Check patient condition.
delivered in volume- Check ventilation settings.
controlled ventilation.
! 140 VT not reached, Set volume cannot be Check for leakages in
leakage reached. Flow delivery breathing circuit.
terminated. Make sure that the tube or
mask is connected
correctly.
! 140 VT not reached, Pressure limit Pmax is Check patient condition.
Pmax active active. Check ventilation settings.
If pressure limited
ventilation is acceptable,
touching "ALARM
RESET" button and
! 100 Wrong or invalid Wrong or defective Call DrägerService.
applications found application card.


Reprocessing
Reprocessing
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Observe before disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Disconnecting the breathing circuit. . . . . . . . . . 244
Removing the Infinity ID flow sensor . . . . . . . . 244
Dismantling the expiratory valve. . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Dismantling the CO2 sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Dismantling the neonatal flow sensor. . . . . . . . 246
Dismantling the inspiratory unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Dismantling the pneumatic medication
nebulizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Dismantling other accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Information on reprocessing. . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Safety information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Classifications for reprocessing. . . . . . . . . . 250

Classification of medical devices . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Classification of device-specific components . . 250
Reprocessing list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Reprocessing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Validated reprocessing procedures . . . . . . . . . 253
Disinfectants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Surface disinfection with cleaning . . . . . . . . . . 255
Manual cleaning followed by disinfection by
immersion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Machine cleaning with thermal disinfection . . . 256
Steam sterilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Special reprocessing measures . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
After reprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Assembling the components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Preparations before reuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Reprocessing
Disassembly
Observe before disassembly Removing the Infinity ID flow sensor
1 Switch off the device and all devices connected

to it.
2 Disconnect the mains plugs.
A
3 Drain the water traps and the breathing hoses.
4 Drain the water reservoir of the breathing gas
humidifier.
Disconnecting the breathing circuit
019
1 Open the flap (A) by lifting the lower edge
upwards.
A A
B
057
1 Pull the breathing hoses from the inspiratory

181
port and the expiratory port (A).

2 Push the flow sensor (B) as far as it will go to the
2 If fitted: Remove the water trap (B) from the
left.
breathing hose.
3 Remove the water trap container from the water
trap. Empty the water trap container.

Reprocessing
Dismantling the expiratory valve
C
B
C D
061
031
3 Remove the flow sensor from the socket (C). 1 Pull the flow sensor sleeve (B) off the Infinity ID
expiratory valve or pull the muffler (B) from the
Infinity ID neonatal expiratory valve.
Dismantling the expiratory valve
2 Remove the diaphragm (C). Do not dismantle
Only the Infinity ID expiratory valve is described in the diaphragm any further.
the following sections. The Infinity ID neonatal 3 Remove the water trap container (D). Empty the
expiratory valve is dismantled in the same manner. water trap container.
Removing the expiratory valve

Dismantling the CO2 sensor
1 Remove the CO2 sensor plug from the socket.

A
175
073
2 Remove the CO2 sensor (A) from the cuvette.

1 Turn the locking ring (A) as far as possible to the
3 Remove the cuvette (B) from the patient
left.
connector of the Y-piece.
2 Remove the expiratory valve from the fitting.

Reprocessing
Dismantling the neonatal flow sensor Dismantling the inspiratory unit
 Disconnect the sensor plug on the rear of the

When the inspiratory unit must be reprocessed:
device.
The inspiratory unit must only be reprocessed
when patient gas has passed through the safety
Dismantling the neonatal flow sensor ISO 15
valve. In the case of spontaneously breathing
(8411130)
patients, this can occur in the following situations:
– Excess pressure in the system caused by a kink
in the expiratory hose
– Failure of both supply gases
– Complete failure of the power supply (failure of
mains power supply and discharged or faulty
batteries)
D C
A Removing the inspiratory unit
B The inspiratory unit must only be removed when
the device is switched off.
309
1 Remove the flow sensor housing (A) from the

Y-piece.
2 Disconnect plug (D) of the flow sensor cable
3 Gently press the knobs (B) on both sides while B
A
pulling the insert (C) out of the flow sensor
housing.
Dismantling the neonatal flow sensor Y-piece

(8410185)
036
1 Press and hold the locking lever (A) on the

underside of the inspiratory unit.
2 Simultaneously turn the inspiratory unit (B)
D approx. 20° counterclockwise.
B 3 Remove the inspiratory unit from the fitting.

C
A
356
1 Pull the Y-piece (A) out of the breathing hoses.

2 Disconnect plug (D) of the flow sensor cable
3 Gently press the knobs (B) on both sides while
pulling the insert (C) out of the Y-piece.

Reprocessing
Dismantling the inspiratory unit After use in the Ped. pat. and Neo. patient
categories
G F E
C
C
D
197
1 Remove the diaphragm with adapter (C) from
the fitting of the inspiratory unit.
044
2 Do not dismantle the inspiratory unit any further. 1 Remove the nebulizer hose (C) from the
medication nebulizer (D) and from the nebulizer
port on the device.
Dismantling the pneumatic medication 2 Remove the medication nebulizer (D) from the
nebulizer breathing circuit.
3 Pull the catheter connector (E) out of the inlet
After use in the Adult patient category port.
4 Pull the adapter (F) out of the outlet port.
5 Remove the corrugated hose (G) from the
adapter (F).
6 Dismantle the medication nebulizer in
A
B accordance with the corresponding instructions
for use.
013
Dismantling other accessories

1 Remove the nebulizer hose (A) from the
medication nebulizer (B) and from the nebulizer  Dismantle the breathing gas humidifier, the
port on the device. Aeroneb nebulizer and the bacterial filter in
2 Remove the medication nebulizer (B) from the accordance with the corresponding instructions
breathing circuit. for use.
3 Dismantle the medication nebulizer in

accordance with the corresponding instructions
for use.

Reprocessing
Information on reprocessing
Instructions for reprocessing are based on

internationally accepted guidelines, e.g., standard
ISO 17664.
The components through which contaminated
breathing gas passes during normal operation and
in the event of a fault must be reprocessed.
In normal operation breathing gas passes through
the expiratory valve or the expiratory valve with
ejector and muffler and other accessories in the
expiratory path. In the event of a fault, the
inspiratory unit and other accessories in the
inspiratory path can become contaminated.
Safety information
WARNING CAUTION
Risk due to inappropriately reprocessed Risk due to faulty products
products
Signs of wear, e.g., cracks, deformation,
Reusable products must be reprocessed, discoloration, or peeling, may occur with
otherwise there is an increased risk of reprocessed products.
infection.
Check the products for signs of wear and replace
– Observe the hygiene regulations and
them if necessary.
reprocessing regulations of the healthcare
facility.
– Observe national hygiene regulations and CAUTION
reprocessing regulations. Health hazard
– Use validated procedures for Do not sterilize parts in ethylene oxide. Ethylene
reprocessing. oxide may diffuse into the parts.
– Reprocess reusable products after every
use.
CAUTION
– Observe the manufacturer's instructions
For infectious patients, all parts that come into
for cleaning agents, disinfectants, and
contact with breathing gas also have to be
reprocessing devices.
sterilized after disinfection and cleaning.

Reprocessing
Safety information on disposable articles Safety information on the Infinity ID flow sensor
WARNING CAUTION
Risk of patient injury as a result of failure of Risk of failure of flow measurement
the accessories
Improper reprocessing and soiling, such as
Disposable articles were developed, tested deposits or particles, can damage the flow sensor:
and manufactured for single use only. Reuse, – No machine cleaning or disinfection
reprocessing or sterilization can lead to a – No plasma sterilization or radiation
failure of the accessories and cause injuries sterilization
to the patient. – No water jets, compressed air, brushes or the
like
Do not reuse, reprocess, or sterilize
– No ultrasonic bath
disposable articles.
– No hot steam sterilization
– Clean and disinfect the flow sensor in
Safety information on flow sensors accordance with the corresponding
WARNING – For disinfecting the flow sensor use only clean
Risk of fire disinfectant solutions.

disinfectants (e.g., alcohols) and deposits that Safety information on the neonatal flow sensor
ignite when the flow sensor is in use. CAUTION
– Ensure particle-free cleaning and Risk of failure of flow measurement
disinfection.
Improper reprocessing and soiling, such as
– After disinfection, allow the flow sensor to deposits or particles, can damage the flow sensor:
air for at least 30 minutes. – No machine cleaning or disinfection of the
– Before inserting the flow sensor check for sensor insert
visible damage and soiling, such as – No plasma sterilization or radiation
residual mucus, medication aerosols, sterilization
and particles. – No compressed air
– Replace flow sensors when damaged, – No water jets, compressed air, brushes or the
soiled, or not particle-free. like when cleaning the sensor insert
– No ultrasonic bath
– Clean and disinfect the flow sensor in
accordance with the corresponding
– For disinfecting the flow sensor use only clean
disinfectant solutions.
NOTE
– Do not use brushes for reprocessing the
sensor insert and do not use a syringe on the
sensor insert.
– For reprocessing the housing use lint-free
brushes only.

Reprocessing
Safety information on the Medical Cockpit

display unit
CAUTION
Risk of malfunction
Clean and disinfect the screen only if a patient is
not connected.
Do not allow liquid to collect at the edge of the
screen when cleaning.
Do not use sharp tools or abrasives.
Classifications for reprocessing
Classification of medical devices
Medical devices and their components are

classified according to the way they are used and
the resulting risk.
Classification Definition
Non-critical Components that come only into contact with skin that is intact
Semi-critical (A, B) Components that carry breathing gas or come into contact with mucous
membranes or pathologically altered skin
Critical (A, B, C) Components that penetrate skin or mucous membranes or come into contact
with blood
Classification of device-specific components
Observe the instructions for use for the – Trolley with accessory mounts
components.
– System cable
The following classification is a recommendation
– Compressed gas hoses
from Dräger.
– CO2 sensor
Non-critical – Connection cable for the neonatal flow sensor
– Ventilation unit – Data link cable
– Medical Cockpit display unit
– GS500 gas supply unit
– PS500 power supply unit

Reprocessing
Semi-critical A Semi-critical B
– Reusable cuvette for the CO2 sensor – Infinity ID expiratory valve, including individual
parts
– Infinity ID flow sensor
– Infinity ID neonatal expiratory valve, including
– Neonatal flow sensor Y-piece or ISO 15,
individual parts
including individual parts
– Inspiratory unit, including individual parts
Reprocessing list
Components Surface Manual clean- Machine Steam Special reprocessing

disinfec- ing followed cleaning with steriliza- measures
tion with by disinfection thermal disin- tion
cleaning by immersion fection
Evita V300 Yes No No No No
ventilation unit
Medical Cockpit Yes No No No Do not spray cleaning
display unit agent and disinfectant
directly on the touch
screen.
GS500 gas supply Yes No No No No
unit
PS500 power Yes No No No No
supply unit
Trolley with Yes No No No No
accessory mounts
System cable Yes No No No No
Compressed gas Yes No No No No
hoses
CO2 sensor Yes No No No Avoid residues on the
test filter.
Connection cable Yes No No No No
for the neonatal flow
sensor
Data link cable Yes No No No No

Reprocessing
Components Surface Manual clean- Machine Steam Special reprocessing

disinfec- ing followed cleaning with steriliza- measures
tion with by disinfection thermal disin- tion
cleaning by immersion fection
Reusable cuvette No Possible Yes Yes Wipe off any contami-
for the CO2 sensor nation, particularly in-
side and outside the
windows, using a soft
disposable tissue and
cotton swabs, under
running water if neces-
sary. Only cleaning
agent, and no rinse
aid, must be used for
automatic cleaning of
the cuvette. Otherwise,
there is a risk of cracks
developing.
Infinity ID flow No Yes No No See "Infinity ID flow
sensor sensor" on page 257.
Neonatal flow No Yes No No See "Neonatal flow
sensor Y-piece or sensors" on page 258.
ISO 15
Infinity ID expiratory No Possible Yes Yes1) No
valve
Infinity ID neonatal No Possible Yes Yes1) See "Infinity ID
expiratory valve neonatal expiratory
valve" on page 257.
Inspiratory unit No Possible Yes Yes1) Only reprocess the in-
spiratory unit if breath-
ing gas has passed
through the safety
valve.
1) For further information on sterilizing, see page 256.

Reprocessing
Reprocessing procedure
Validated reprocessing procedures
At the time of product-specific validation, the

following reprocessing procedures showed good
material compatibility and effectiveness:
Procedure Agent Manufac- Concentration Contact time Tempera-

turer ture
Surface disinfection Buraton 10F Schülke & 1% 30 min –
with cleaning Mayr
neoform Med AF1) Dr. Weigert According to According to –
manufacturer's manufacturer's
data data
Dismozon pur2) Bode 1.5 % 15 min –
Chemie
Manual cleaning Neodisher LM2 Dr. Weigert 3 % 30 min –
Sekusept Pulver Ecolab 4% 15 min –
Classic3)
Disinfection by Sekusept Pulver Ecolab 4% 15 min –
immersion4) Classic5)
Korsolex Extra Bode 3% 15 min –
Chemie
30 min6)
Machine cleaning Neodisher Mediclean Dr. Weigert According to – –
manufacturer's
Neodisher MediClean
data
Forte7)
Machine disinfection – – – 10 min 93 °C
(thermal) (199.4 °F)
Steam sterilization – – – 5 min 134 °C
(273.2 °F)
1) For Dräger Infinity MCable – CO2 mainstream sensor
2) For Medical Cockpit
3) For Infinity ID neonatal expiratory valve, neonatal flow sensor, Infinity ID flow sensor
4) Not for CO2 sensor
5) For neonatal flow sensor
6) For neonatal flow sensor, Infinity ID flow sensor
7) For reusable cuvette for the CO2 sensor
The effectiveness of the listed reprocessing

procedures has been validated by independent
laboratories that certified to the standard ISO 17025.

Reprocessing
Disinfectants The manufacturers of the surface disinfectants

have verified at least the following spectra of
Use disinfectants that are nationally approved and activity:
are suitable for the particular reprocessing – Bactericidal
procedure. – Yeasticidal
– Virucidal or virucidal against enveloped viruses
Surface disinfectants Observe the specifications of the surface
disinfectant manufacturers.
At the time of the test, the surface disinfectants
listed in the following table showed good material Other surface disinfectants are used at one's own
compatibility. They can be used in addition to the risk.
surface disinfectants listed in the section "Validated
reprocessing procedures".
Class of active ingredient Surface disinfectant Manufacturer

Chlorine-releasing agents Actichlor plus Ecolab
BruTab 6S Brulin
Clorox Professional Disinfecting Clorox
Bleach Cleaner
Dispatch Hospital Cleaner
Disinfectant Towels with Bleach
Klorsept 17 Medentech
Oxygen-releasing agents Descogen Liquid Antiseptica
Descogen Liquid r.f.u.
Dismozon plus Bode Chemie
Dismozon pur
Oxycide Ecolab USA
Perform Schülke & Mayr
Virkon DuPont
Quaternary ammonium Mikrozid sensitive liquid1) Schülke & Mayr
compounds Mikrozid sensitive wipes 1)
Mikrozid alcohol free liquid1)

Mikrozid alcohol free wipes1)
acryl-des1)
Aldehydes Buraton 10 F Schülke & Mayr
1) Virucidal against enveloped viruses
Dräger points out that oxygen-releasing agents and

chlorine-releasing agents may cause color change
in some materials. Color change does not indicate
that the product is not functioning correctly.

Reprocessing
Surface disinfection with cleaning Manual cleaning followed by disinfection

by immersion
WARNING
Risk due to penetrating liquid Manual cleaning
Penetrating liquid may cause the following: The cleaning agent that is used must have a pH of
– Damage to the device between 9 and 12.
– Electric shock when switching on the
1 Wash off superficial soiling under running water.
device
– Device malfunctions 2 Prepare the cleaning solution in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions.
Ensure that no liquid penetrates the device.
3 Swirl the product backwards and forwards
1 Remove soiling immediately. Use a cloth several times in the solution. Make sure that the
dampened with disinfectant to remove soiling. solution reaches all surfaces and interior
spaces.
2 Perform surface disinfection.
4 Rinse the product under running water until
3 After the product has been exposed to the
residual cleaning agent is no longer discernible.
disinfectant for the specified contact time,
remove residual disinfectant. 5 Check the product for visible soiling. Repeat
steps 1 to 5 if necessary.
4 Wipe with a cloth dampened with water
(preferably drinking-water quality). Allow the 6 Check the product for visible damage and
product to dry. replace if necessary.
5 Check the product for visible soiling. Repeat
steps 1 to 5 if necessary. Disinfection by immersion
6 Check the product for visible damage and 1 Prepare the disinfectant solution in accordance
replace if necessary. with the manufacturer's instructions.
2 Swirl the product backwards and forwards
several times in the solution. Make sure that the
solution reaches all surfaces and interior
spaces.
3 After the contact time has elapsed, rinse the
product under running water until residual
disinfectant is no longer discernible.
4 Check the product for visible damage and
replace if necessary.
5 Thoroughly shake out residual water. Allow the
product to dry completely.

Reprocessing
Machine cleaning with thermal Steam sterilization

disinfection
Use a steam sterilizer that meets the requirements
Use a washer-disinfector that meets the of the standard ISO 17665. Dräger recommends
requirements of the standard ISO 15883. Dräger steam sterilization with fractionated vacuum.
recommends the use of a cart for anesthesia Prerequisite: The product has been cleaned and
accessories and ventilation accessories. disinfected.
1 Securely position the product in the basket. 1 Sterilize the product.
Ensure the following:
– All surfaces and interior spaces can be 2 Check the product for visible damage and
flushed completely. replace if necessary.
– The water can drain off freely.
2 Use a suitable cleaning agent. Additional information
3 Select a suitable cycle. Sterilization of the expiratory valve or inspiratory

4 Use demineralized water for the final rinsing. transmission. This may mean that Infinity ID
5 After the cycle has ended, check the product for breathing circuit functions may not work or may no
visible soiling. If necessary, repeat the cycle or longer work reliably. If the message Infinity ID
perform manual cleaning and disinfection by breathing circuit detected. is not displayed when
immersion. an Infinity ID breathing circuit is connected, use a
different Infinity ID breathing circuit. If the message
6 Check the product for visible damage and is still not displayed, replace the expiratory valve or
replace if necessary. inspiratory valve.
7 Allow the product to dry completely.

Reprocessing
Special reprocessing measures Sterilization:
CAUTION
Infinity ID flow sensor
Risk of patient injury due to failure of the flow
Manual cleaning followed by disinfection by measurement
immersion must be carried out for complete
Sterilization can damage the flow sensor. Do not
reprocessing of the flow sensor.
sterilize the flow sensor.
Manual cleaning:
The cleaning agent that is used must have a pH of Infinity ID neonatal expiratory valve
between 9 and 12.
1 Prepare the cleaning agent in accordance with
the manufacturer's data in a container with a
cover.
2 Place the flow sensor in the solution, ensuring
there are no bubbles. Swirl the flow sensor
vigorously at least 3 times at the beginning and
end of the contact time. Make sure that the
solution reaches all surfaces and interior B A
spaces.
352
3 Rinse the flow sensor in the water bath
Carry out manual cleaning:
(preferably drinking-water quality) until cleaning
agent residues are no longer discernible. 1 Immerse the neonatal expiratory valve in the
solution and agitate it slightly so that the air can
Disinfection by immersion:
escape.
1 Prepare the disinfectant solution in accordance
2 Before the contact time begins and after it has
with the manufacturer's instructions.
elapsed, fit a syringe (A) containing 20 mL of
2 Swirl the flow sensor backwards and forwards solution to the ejector channel (B). Inject and
several times in the solution. Make sure that the extract the solution several times with the
solution reaches all surfaces and interior syringe.
spaces.
Perform manual disinfection in the same manner.
3 Rinse the flow sensor in the water bath
(preferably drinking-water quality) until
disinfectant residues are no longer discernible.
4 Check the flow sensor for visible soiling and for
damage to the measuring wires and their pegs.
flow sensor to dry completely.

Reprocessing
Neonatal flow sensors 4 Rinse the housing and sensor inset in a water
bath (at least drinking-water quality) until
Manual cleaning followed by disinfection by
cleaning agent residues are no longer
immersion (sterilization optional) must be carried
discernible.
out for complete reprocessing of the flow sensor.
Disinfection by immersion:
1 Prepare the disinfectant solution in accordance
A with the manufacturer's data in a container with
a cover.
B 2 Place the housing and sensor insert in the
C
solution, ensuring there are no bubbles. Swirl
the parts back and forth for approx. 1 minute at
the beginning and end of the contact time. Make
D sure that the solution reaches all surfaces and
interior spaces.
3 At the beginning and end of the contact time,
355
spray through each opening in the housing

NOTE 3 times using a 20 mL syringe (D).
– Do not use brushes for reprocessing the
– Clean the housing and the Y-piece (B) with
sensor insert and do not use a syringe on the
a lint-free brush (A): Insert and remove it
sensor insert.
vertically ten times in each of the two
– For reprocessing the housing use lint-free
connection openings of the Y-piece (B) and
brushes only.
then, at an angle, insert and remove it ten
times in both corners of the opening for the
Manual cleaning:
sensor insert (C).
The cleaning agent that is used must have a pH of
4 Rinse the housing and sensor inset in a water
between 9 and 12.
bath (at least drinking-water quality) until
1 Prepare the cleaning agent in accordance with the disinfectant residues are no longer discernible.
manufacturer's data in a container with a cover.
5 Check parts for visible soiling or damage.
2 Place the housing and sensor insert in the Check the sensor insert for damage to the
solution, ensuring there are no bubbles. Swirl measuring wires and their pegs.
the parts back and forth for approx. 1 minute at
the beginning and end of the contact time. Make
parts to dry completely.
sure that the solution reaches all surfaces and
interior spaces. Machine cleaning with thermal disinfection:
3 At the beginning and end of the contact time,
CAUTION
spray through each opening in the housing
3 times using a 20 mL syringe (D). Only carry out machine cleaning and disinfection
on the housing.
– Clean the housing and the Y-piece (B) with
a lint-free brush (A): Insert and remove it
vertically ten times in each of the two
connection openings of the Y-piece (B) and
then, at an angle, insert and remove it ten
times in both corners of the opening for the
sensor insert (C).

Reprocessing
Sterilization:
Only sterilize the flow sensor when it is assembled.
CAUTION
Risk of patient injury due to failure of the flow
measurement
Improper sterilization may damage the flow
sensor. Only use the specified sterilization
procedures.
After reprocessing
Assembling the components
Assembling expiratory valve

1 Make sure all parts of the expiratory valve are
completely dry, otherwise this may impair
proper functioning.
B
C
4 Fit the water trap container (C). 040
A
072
2 Fit the flow sensor sleeve (B) on the Infinity ID

expiratory valve or fit the muffler (B) on the
Infinity ID neonatal expiratory valve.
3 Fit the diaphragm (A) onto the edge of the
expiratory valve housing.

Reprocessing
Inserting the expiratory valve into Evita V300 Assembling the inspiratory unit
Only the Infinity ID expiratory valve is described in 1 Make sure the inspiratory unit and diaphragm
the following section. The neonatal expiratory valve are completely dry, otherwise this may impair
is inserted in the same way. proper functioning.
Prerequisite: The flap on the front is pivoted
upwards.
1 Turn the locking ring (D) as far as possible to
the left. A
C
2 Push the expiratory valve into the fitting.
B
D
C
190
2 Insert the adapter (A) of the diaphragm into the
opening of the fitting (B). The adapter must be
able to slightly move up and down in the
opening.
073
3 Position the diaphragm in such a way that it is in

3 Turn the locking ring (D) as far as it will go to the the recesses (C) of the fitting.
right until it clicks audibly into place.
4 Check that it is properly secured by gently
pulling on the expiratory valve.
5 Close the flap.
Further information on the expiratory valve:
The expiratory valve can be reused as long as the D
test point in the device check is passed. Exchange
197
the expiratory valve if signs of wear become visible,

such as cracks in the plastic parts, deformation and 4 Fit the diaphragm onto the edge of the fitting
hardening of the rubber parts. Discolorations of the (D).
metal insert do not impair its function.

Reprocessing
Inserting the inspiratory unit into Evita V300

1 Insert the inspiratory unit (E) into the recesses
of the fitting and push as far as it will go into the
fitting.
E
189
2 Turn the inspiratory unit in clockwise direction

until the lock clicks into place.
3 Check whether the inspiratory unit is properly
engaged.
Assembling accessories
Assemble the medication nebulizer and breathing
gas humidifier in accordance with the
corresponding instructions for use.
 Fit the medication nebulizer into the breathing
circuit, see page 118.
 Prepare the breathing gas humidifier,
see page 62.
Preparations before reuse
1 Assemble and prepare the device so that it is

ready for use, see chapter "Assembly and
preparation".
2 Check the operational readiness, see chapter
"Getting started".


Maintenance
Maintenance
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Definition of maintenance concepts . . . . . . . . . 264
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Safety checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Remote Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Replacing the ambient air filter . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Replacing the diaphragm of the

expiratory valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Replacing the expiratory valve . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Preventive maintenance on the GS500

gas supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Replacing the breathing gas filter in the
blower unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Replacing the filter mat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Battery maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Information on battery maintenance . . . . . . . . . 270
Battery check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Battery check page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Maintenance
Overview
This chapter describes all maintenance steps WARNING

necessary to maintain the proper functioning of the
Risk of electric shock
device. These measures must be performed by the
personnel responsible. Current-carrying components are located
under the cover. Do not remove the cover.
Only perform maintenance work when no patient is
Maintenance work must be performed by
connected to the device.
service personnel or by experts. Dräger
CAUTION recommends DrägerService to perform these
tasks.
Disinfect and clean device or device parts before
any maintenance measures and also before
returning the medical device for repair.
Definition of maintenance concepts
Concept Definition
Maintenance Appropriate measures intended to retain the specified condition of a medical device
Inspection Measures intended to determine and assess the actual state of a medical device
Preventive Repeated indicated measures intended to retain the specified condition of a
maintenance medical device
Repair Measures intended to restore the functional condition of a medical device after the
failure of a device function
Inspection
Inspections must be carried out regularly according

to the following specifications and in the specified
intervals.
.
Checks Interval Personnel responsible

1)
Inspection and safety checks Every 12 months Service personnel
1) Designation applies to the Federal Republic of Germany; corresponds to the “Recurring safety inspection” in the Republic
of Austria

Maintenance
Safety checks 6 Check safety features:

– Correct functioning of the emergency
The safety checks are no substitute for the expiratory valve: Pressure rise 1.9 to
preventive maintenance measures (including 4.4 mbar (1.9 to 4.4 cmH2O) at a flow of
preventive replacement of wear parts) indicated by 4.5 to 5.5 L/min.
the manufacturer. – Correct functioning of the non-return valve
in the expiratory valve.
CAUTION – Correct functioning of the emergency
Perform safety checks at the indicated intervals. breathing valve: Maximum pressure drop of
Otherwise, the correct functioning of the medical 4 mbar (4 cmH2O) at a suction flow of 60 to
device can be impaired. 65 L/min.
– Correct functioning of the alarm generator
1 Check accompanying documents: – Correct functioning of the non-return valves
– Instructions for use are available. in the gas inlet for O2 and Air
– Correct functioning of the LEDs
2 Perform a functional test of the following
features:
– Perform a device check and a breathing
Remote Service
circuit check according to the instructions
for use.
Evita V300 supports the following Remote Service
– Perform a functional test of the airway
functionalities:
pressure measurement.
– Help Ticket
– Perform a functional test of the flow
– Remote Device Check
measurement.
– Perform a functional test of the batteries Contact the responsible DrägerService
(Evita V300 or PS500). representative for further information on the
Remote Service function.
3 Verify that the device combination is in good
condition:
– Labels complete and legible.
– No visible damage.
– Fuses which are accessible from the
outside are in compliance with the specified
values.
4 Check that the equipment of the medical device
is complete according to the instructions for
use.
5 Check the electrical safety according to
IEC 62353.

Maintenance
Preventive maintenance
WARNING
Risk due to defective components
Device malfunction can occur due to wear and
material fatigue of components. To maintain
the function of all components, this device
must be inspected and serviced at the
intervals specified by the manufacturer.
Maintenance intervals
Component Interval Measure Personnel responsible

Ambient air filter Every 4 weeks Cleaning, replace if necessary, User
see page 267
Every 12 months Replace, see page 267 User
Diaphragm of the Every 12 months Replace, see page 267 User
expiratory valve
Expiratory valve Every 2 years Replace, see page 268 User
GS500: Breathing Every 12 months Replace, see page 268 Service personnel
gas filter in the
blower unit
GS500: Filter mat Every 12 months Replace, see page 269 Service personnel
Batteries Every 3 months Check capacity, see page 270 Service personnel
Replace if necessary Experts
Every 2 years Replace Experts
Air filter (in the Air Every 2 years Replace Experts
gas inlet)
O2 filter (in the O2 Every 6 years Replace Experts
gas inlet)
Repair
Dräger recommends that all repairs are carried out

by DrägerService and that only original Dräger
parts are used.

Maintenance
Replacing the ambient air filter
CAUTION 1 Unscrew the screw (A) on the cover of the

ambient air filter.
Replace the ambient air filter at regular intervals.
Otherwise operation of the device may be 2 Open the cover (B).
impaired.
3 Remove the filter from the mount.
Visually inspect the ambient air filter for 4 Fit a new filter or clean the old filter in warm
contamination after 4 weeks; clean or replace if soapy water and dry thoroughly.
necessary. Replace after 12 months at the latest.
5 Insert the filter into the mount without creasing.
6 Close the cover (B) and retighten the screw (A).
7 Dispose of used filter with domestic waste.
A
B
035
Replacing the diaphragm of the expiratory valve
Prerequisite: The expiratory valve has been 1 Remove the diaphragm (A).
removed, see "Removing the expiratory valve"
2 Fit the new diaphragm onto the edge of the
on page 245.
expiratory valve housing. Make sure that the
diaphragm is fitted properly.
3 Dispose of used diaphragm with domestic
waste.
4 Fit the expiratory valve, see "Inserting the
expiratory valve into the ventilation unit"
on page 59.
A
187

Maintenance
Replacing the expiratory valve
1 Remove the expiratory valve, see page 245.

Dispose of the expiratory valve in accordance
with local waste disposal regulations.
2 Fit the expiratory valve, see page 259.
3 Insert the expiratory valve into the ventilation
unit, see page 260.
Preventive maintenance on the GS500 gas supply unit
Replacing the breathing gas filter in the 1 Loosen the screws on the rear of the device
blower unit sufficiently for the side panel to be removed.
Remove the side panel.
The breathing gas filter is located behind the left- Ensure that the filter mat attached to the side
hand side panel of the GS500 gas supply unit. section is not loosened.
2 Take hold of the breathing gas filter by the
handle and withdraw it from the GS500 gas
supply unit. Dispose of the used breathing gas
C filter in accordance with local waste disposal
regulations.
3 Insert a new breathing gas filter in the GS500
gas supply unit until it reaches the end position.
4 Fit the side panel and tighten the screws.
B
370

Maintenance
Replacing the filter mat
The filter mat is fastened to the inside of the left-

hand side panel of the GS500 gas supply unit.
B
371
1 Loosen the screws on the rear of the device

sufficiently for the side panel to be removed.
Remove the side panel.
2 Remove the filter mat and dispose of it in
accordance with local waste disposal
regulations.
3 Fit the new filter mat with its side to the
boundary. Carefully press the filter mat on to the
pointed retaining elements. Check that the filter
mat is secured.
4 Fit the side panel and tighten the screws.

Maintenance
Battery maintenance
Information on battery maintenance Battery check
The following actions are required to achieve the A battery check is required at regular intervals to
maximum life span of the batteries: determine the current state of the batteries.
The battery check determines the approximate
 Always fully charge the batteries.
operating time.
 Connect the device to the mains power supply
The battery check consists of a charge-discharge-
at the latest after 5 days to charge the batteries.
charge cycle. After the batteries have been fully
Observe the required charging time.
charged, the device is operated in test mode with
If recharging is not possible after 5 days at the power supply from the batteries. The determined
latest, do the following: operating time is the approximate operating time to
be expected in the next period of battery operation
 Set the toggle switch to the position and
with typical ventilation without GS500.
then disconnect the power plug.
Dräger recommends the following test intervals:
The device is then in the energy-saving mode and
the discharge is reduced to the self-discharge of
Internal battery (NiMH) Every 3 months
the batteries. Check that the capacity of the
batteries is sufficient before use on a patient. The PS500 power supply unit Every 3 months
batteries may be exhausted or faulty as a result of (VRLA)
excessively long storage.
Batteries are wear parts. The replacement intervals Prerequisites for the battery check
depend on the utilization. Observe the test
– The device is connected to the central gas
intervals.
supply.
Storage at an increased ambient temperature – The device is connected to the mains power
reduces the life span of the batteries. The storage supply.
duration must not be exceeded. See chapter – The device is prepared and ready for use.
"Ambient conditions" on page 278. – The test lung is connected.
– A ventilation pattern is set, e.g.:
The capacity of the batteries used must be checked
– PC-AC
regularly.
– FiO2 = 21 %
The batteries must have sufficient capacity. – RR = 12/min
Replace the batteries if necessary. – Pinsp = 20 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
– PEEP = 5 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
The following table shows the typical operating time
to be expected as a function of the ageing of a new
battery.
If the batteries do not correspond to the
approximate operating time listed, replacement of
the batteries is recommended.

Maintenance
Age of the battery Operating time of the internal Operating time of PS500 (VRLA)
battery (NiMH) with a full charge with a full charge
3 months 29 min 225 min
NOTE
The operating time may be reduced due to the
utilization of the battery. The data are approximate
values and cannot be regarded as guaranteed for
every battery.
NOTE
Replace the batteries if the operating time falls
below the minimum value (see chapter "Battery
ageing" on page 363) or after 24 months.

Maintenance
Battery check page Starting the battery check

The battery check can only be started if the device
Prerequisite: The Start/Standby > System check is connected to the mains power supply.
(A) dialog window is opened.
 Touch the Start button (F) and confirm.
1 Touch the Battery check tab (B). The appropriate battery check will be started.
Start/Standby The result of the battery check is displayed after
completion.
A
C F G H The duration of the battery check is decremented in
hours and displayed in field (H).
D F G H If a battery check fails, the device will cancel the

check. The canceled check is shown as a colorless
dot.
I
B
E F G H Canceling the battery check
 Touch the Cancel button (G) and confirm.
I The appropriate battery check will be canceled.
372
The canceled check is shown as a colorless

The Battery check page contains the following: dot.
– Battery check complete (C)
– Battery check PS500 (D)
– Battery check internal battery (E)
Information displayed in the field (I) for each
battery:
– Date of the last battery check
– Determined operating time (value
determined in the battery check during
typical ventilation without GS500). See
chapter "Battery check" on page 270.
– Next battery check due in xx days
– Battery replacement in xx months
– Current operating time
This value is indicated to the nearest 5 or
10 minutes depending on the battery used
and based on the present power
consumption of the device.

Disposal
Disposal
Safety information on disposal . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Disposal of packaging material. . . . . . . . . . . 274
Disposal of batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Disposal of flow sensor and neonatal

flow sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Disposal of medical devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Disposal
Safety information on disposal
CAUTION
The device and its components must be
disinfected and cleaned before disposal!
For countries subject to EU Directive

2002/96/EC
This device is subject to EU Directive 2002/96/EC
(WEEE).
In order to comply with its registration according to
this directive, this device may not be disposed of at
municipal collection points for waste electrical
equipment. Dräger has authorized a company to
collect and dispose of this device. To initiate
collection or for further information, visit Dräger on
the Internet at www.draeger.com. Use the Search
function with the keyword "WEEE" to find the
relevant information. If access to Dräger's website
is not possible, contact the local Dräger
Organization.
Disposal of packaging material
Dispose of the packaging material of the device and

the accessories listed in the list of accessories in
accordance with the applicable laws and
regulations.

Disposal
Disposal of batteries
The medical device contains batteries with toxic waste disposal corporations. The battery installed
substances. in the device must therefore be removed by experts
In the Federal Republic of Germany: The user is before the device can be disposed of.
obliged by the ordinance on the return and disposal
Observe the applicable laws and regulations for
of used batteries to return batteries which contain
battery disposal.
toxic substances either to the manufacturer/sales
outlet or to a collection center operated by public
Disposal of flow sensor and neonatal flow sensor
The flow sensor must be disposed of as infectious

waste. Low-emission combustion at over 800 °C
(1472 °F).
Disposal of medical devices
At the end of its service life:

 Consult the relevant waste disposal company
for appropriate disposal.
 Observe the applicable laws and regulations.


Technical data
Technical data
Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Set values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Displayed measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Displayed calculated values . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Operating data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Device ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Infinity C300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Automatic alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Essential performance characteristics. . . . . 306
Connections to IT networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Information on connecting to the network. . . . . 306
Open-source software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
EMC Declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Electromagnetic emissions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Electromagnetic immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Recommended separation distances to
portable and mobile RF telecommunication
devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Reduced separation distances to portable
and mobile RF telecommunication devices . . . 312

Technical data
Ambient conditions
During operation
Temperature 10 to 40 °C (50 to 104 °F)
Pressure range 700 to 1060 hPa
Altitude up to 3000 m (9842 ft)
Relative humidity 10 to 90 %, without condensation
During storage and transportation
Pressure range 500 to 1060 hPa
Relative humidity 5 to 95 %, non-condensing
Temperature
The technical specifications of the battery
manufacturer regarding storage duration
refer to a relative humidity of 45 to 85 %.
Storage outside this range is possible. In
this case, perform a battery test before
using the device. Charging every 6 months
at the latest is recommended. Several
charge and discharge cycles may be
required as a battery test in order to
completely reactivate the electrochemical
composition after long term storage.
Device without PS500 batteries
for charging subsequent to storage
For storage up to 6 months –20 to <45 °C (–4 to <113 °F)
For storage up to 1 month –20 to <55 °C (–4 to <131 °F)
For storage up to 1 week –20 to 60 °C (–4 to 140 °F)
Device with PS500 batteries
for charging subsequent to storage
For storage up to 6 months –15 to 25 °C (5 to 77 °F)
For storage up to 3 months –15 to 40 °C (5 to 104 °F)
Depending on the accessories used, more
stringent ambient conditions can apply.
Observe corresponding instructions for use.

Technical data
Set values
The required parameters can be adjusted with the

therapy controls of Evita V300 without any loss of
accuracy. The controlled parameters – pressure,
Flow, volume, and O2 concentration – can only be
applied with the accuracy of the associated
measured values.
The accuracies indicated apply only under the
following conditions:
– The device is ready for operation, see chapter
"Getting started".
– Any accessories being used are approved for
the device, see the list of accessories.
– The type of humidification is selected correctly
in the Start/Standby > Br. circuit/ Humidifier
dialog window.
The tolerances do not include the measurement
uncertainty of external test equipment. This
information is available on request.
Respiratory rate RR
Adults 0.5 to 98/min
Pediatric patients 0.5 to 150/min
Neonates 0.5 to 150/min
Inspiratory time Ti
Adults 0.11 to 10 s
Pediatric patients 0.1 to 10 s
Neonates 0.1 to 10 s
Maximum inspiratory time for flow cycled breaths Timax
Adults 0.1 to 4 s
Pediatric patients 0.1 to 4 s
Neonates 0.1 to 1.5 s
Tidal volume VT
Adults 100 to 3000 mL
Pediatric patients 20 to 300 mL
Neonates 2 to 100 mL

Technical data
Set values (cont.)
Tidal volume for pressure support VT

Activation state of Apnea Ventilation on, off
Status of the function Automatic return from on, off
Apnea Ventilation
Tidal volume during Apnea Ventilation VTapn
Respiratory rate during Apnea Ventilation RRapn
Adults 2 to 80/min
Pediatric patients 2 to 150/min
Neonates 2 to 150/min
Inspiratory flow Flow
Adults 2 to 120 L/min
Pediatric patients 2 to 30 L/min
Maximum inspiratory flow in NIV mode for 0 to 30 L/min
neonates Flow max
Inspiratory pressure Pinsp 1 to 95 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
Inspiratory pressure limit Pmax 2 to 100 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
O2 concentration FiO2 21 to 100 Vol%
T0...90 Test conditions in accordance with
ISO 80601-2-12:2011, Sec. 201.12.1.104
Time until the adjusted O2 value reaches taking account of the airway-conducting
the patient connection accessories with the greatest internal volume;
with flow monitoring switched on
Adults <36 s, for a VT of 500 mL
<50 s, for a VT of 150 mL
Pediatric patients For a VT of 150 mL:
<25 s, with Neo flow monitoring
<45 s, with expiratory flow monitoring;
For a VT of 30 mL:
<35 s, with Neo flow monitoring
<65 s, with expiratory flow monitoring
Neonates <18 s

Technical data
Set values (cont.)
Positive end-expiratory pressure PEEP 0 to 50 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)

Trigger sensitivity Flow trigger 0.2 to 15 L/min
Pressure support Psupp 0 to 95 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
Rise time for pressure support Slope
Adults 0 to 2 s
Pediatric patients 0 to 2 s
Neonates 0 to 1.5 s
Termination criterion (peak inspiratory flow) 5 to 70 %PIF
Insp. term.
Airway Pressure Release Ventilation APRV
Inspiratory time Thigh 0.1 to 30 s
Expiratory time Tlow 0.05 to 30 s
Maximum time of low pressure level in 0.05 to 30 s
APRV/PEF Tlow max
Inspiratory pressure Phigh 1 to 95 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
Expiratory pressure Plow 0 to 50 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
Termination criterion (peak expiratory flow) 1 to 80 %PEF
Exp. term.
Automatic Tube Compensation ATC
Inner diameter of the tube Tube Ø
Endotracheal tube ET
Adults 5 to 12 mm (0.2 to 0.47 in)
Pediatric patients 2 to 8 mm (0.08 to 0.31 in)
Neonates 2 to 5 mm (0.08 to 0.2 in)
Tracheostomy tube Trach.
Adults 5 to 12 mm (0.2 to 0.47 in)
Pediatric patients 2.5 to 8 mm (0.1 to 0.31 in)
Degree of tube compensation Compens. 0 to 100 %
Status of ATC during mandatory inspiration On/Off
Inspiratory compensation
Status of ATC during the expiratory phase On/Off
Expiratory compensation

Technical data
Set values (cont.)
Proportional Pressure Support PPS

Flow Assist Flow Assist
Adults 0 to 30 mbar/L/s (or hPa/L/s or cmH2O/L/s)
Pediatric patients 0 to 100 mbar/L/s (or hPa/L/s or cmH2O/L/s)
Neonates 0 to 300 mbar/L/s (or hPa/L/s or cmH2O/L/s)
Volume Assist Vol. Assist
Adults 0 to 100 mbar/L (or hPa/L or cmH2O/L)
corresponds to compliance compensation 10000 to 10 mL/mbar (or mL/hPa or mL/cmH2O)
Pediatric patients 0 to 1000 mbar/L (or hPa/L or cmH2O/L)
corresponds to compliance compensation 10000 to 1 mL/mbar (or mL/hPa or mL/cmH2O)
Neonates 0 to 4000 mbar/L (or hPa/L or cmH2O/L)
corresponds to compliance compensation 1000 to 0.3 mL/mbar (or mL/hPa or mL/cmH2O)
O2 Therapy
Continuous Flow Flow (BTPS) 2 to 50 L/min
O2 concentration FiO2 21 to 100 Vol%
Leakage compensation On/Off
On: full compensation active
Off: only trigger compensation active
Maneuver settings
Sigh pressure intPEEP 0 to 20 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
Time interval between sighs Interval sigh 20 s to 180 min
Number of cycles for a sigh Cycles sigh 1 to 20 exhalations
Oxygen enrichment for suction maneuver
Factor for neonates 1 to 2
Factor for pediatric patients 1 to 2
Performance characteristics
Control principle time-cycled, volume-constant, pressure-controlled

Intermittent PEEP duration 1 to 20 expiratory cycles
Medication nebulization For 5, 10, 15, 30 minutes, continuously ()
Endotracheal suction
Disconnection detection automatic
Reconnection detection automatic
Initial oxygen enrichment max. 3 minutes

Technical data
Performance characteristics (cont.)
Active suction phase max. 2 minutes

Final oxygen enrichment max. 2 minutes
Supply system for spontaneous breathing and adaptive CPAP system with high initial flow
Psupp
Inspiratory flow (BTPS) max 180 L/min
Base flow, neonates 6 L/min
Base flow, neonates, with active pneumatic 9 L/min
nebulization
Base flow, pediatric patients 3 L/min
Base flow, pediatric patients, with active 9 L/min
pneumatic nebulization
Base flow, adults 2 L/min
In a combination of proximal flow sensor with
filters, HME, Ergostar and CO2 cuvette, the airway
resistance of the system can be more than 6 mbar
(or hPa or cmH2O) if there is a failure of the device
and a Flow of 15 L/min.
Inspiratory resistance on device failure
Adults, maximum value <6 mbar at 30 L/min
<6 hPa at 30 L/min
<6 cmH2O at 30 L/min
Pediatric patients, maximum value <6 mbar at 15 L/min
<6 hPa at 15 L/min
Neonates, maximum value <1.5 mbar at 2.5 L/min
<1.5 hPa at 2.5 L/min
<1.5 cmH2O at 2.5 L/min
Expiratory resistance on device failure
Adults, maximum value <5.5 mbar at 30 L/min
<5.5 hPa at 30 L/min
<5.5 cmH2O at 30 L/min
Pediatric patients, maximum value <6.0 mbar at 15 L/min
<6.0 hPa at 15 L/min
<6.0 cmH2O at 15 L/min
Neonates, maximum value <1.0 mbar at 2.5 L/min

Technical data
Accuracy of measured values

Depending on the patient category, the accuracies
indicated for the measured values apply to the
following performance characteristics of the breathing
circuit.
Breathing circuit for adults including additional
components
Compliance 3.0 mL/mbar (or mL/hPa or mL/cmH2O)
Inspiratory resistance <6 mbar at 30 L/min
<6 hPa at 30 L/min
Expiratory resistance <6 mbar at 30 L/min
<6 hPa at 30 L/min
Breathing circuit for pediatric patients including
additional components
Inspiratory resistance <6 mbar at 15 L/min
<6 hPa at 15 L/min
Expiratory resistance <6 mbar at 15 L/min
<6 hPa at 15 L/min
Breathing circuit for neonates including
additional components
Inspiratory resistance <1.5 mbar at 2.5 L/min
Expiratory resistance <1.0 mbar at 2.5 L/min
Compliance of device incl. breathing circuit
Adults, maximum value <3.0 mL/mbar
<3.0 mL/hPa
<3.0 mL/cmH2O
Neonates, maximum value <1.3 mL/mbar
<1.3 mL/hPa
<1.3 mL/cmH2O

Technical data
Additional functions
Safety valve Opens if medical compressed air supply fails
(supply gas flow is not sufficient to provide the
inspiratory flow required), enables spontaneous
breathing with ambient air.
Displayed measured values
Accuracy does only apply for the measurement

range specified.
Airway pressure measurement
Plateau pressure Pplat
Positive end-expiratory pressure PEEP
Peak Inspiratory Pressure PIP
Mean airway pressure Pmean
Minimum airway pressure Pmin
Lower pressure level in APRV Plow
End-inspriatory pressure for mandatory EIP
breaths
Upper pressure level in APRV Phigh
Intrinsic PEEP (determined via PEEPi PEEPi
maneuver)
Range Within the setting range of 0 to a maximum of
95 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O) (within the maximum
sensor measuring range of –60 to 120 mbar (or
hPa or cmH2O))
Accuracy In phases without flow:
±6 % of measured value or ±0.5 mbar (or hPa or
cmH2O), whichever is greater
otherwise:
±2 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
T0...90 (for Pmean) 33 s for intubated adults,
20 s for adults with NIV,
20 s for pediatric patients,
10 s for neonates

Technical data
Displayed measured values (cont.)
O2 measurement (inspiratory side)

Inspiratory O2 concentration (in dry air) FiO2
Range 18 to 100 Vol%
Accuracy ±3 Vol% at 20 °C (68 °F)
Drift of measurement accuracy 0.2 Vol% in 6 hours (corresponding to ISO 21647,
ISO 80601-2-55).
The measured values of the O2
measurement are barometrically pressure
compensated.
Rise time T0...90 500 ms
Warm-up time max. 3 minutes, typ. 1 minute
Flow measurement (expiratory)
Minute volume measurement
Expiratory minute volume MVe
Inspiratory minute volume MVi
Mandatory expiratory minute volume MVemand
Spontaneous expiratory minute volume MVespon
Minute volume, leakage-compensated MV
Range 0 to 99 L/min BTPS
Accuracy ±10 % of the measured value, if the measured
expiratory tidal volume is greater than 100 mL,
under calibration conditions (1013 mbar
(1013 cmH2O), dry gas, 20 °C (68 °F)), 5 % CO2,
with the flow sensor flap closed and no leakage
T0...90
Adults 33 s
Pediatric patients 33 s

Technical data
Tidal volume measurement

Tidal volume VT
Inspiratory tidal volume (not leakage- VTimand
compensated) of mandatory breaths
Expiratory tidal volume (not leakage- VTemand
Inspiratory tidal volume (not leakage- VTispon
compensated) of spontaneous breaths
Range 0 to 5500 mL, BTPS
Accuracy ±10 % of the measured value or ±10 mL, whichever
is greater, under calibration conditions (1013 mbar
(1013 cmH2O), dry gas, 20 °C (68 °F)), 5 % CO2,
Volume trapped in the lungs (determined Vtrap
by the PEEPi maneuver)
(1013 cmH2O), dry gas, 20 °C (68 °F)), 5 % CO2,
Flow measurement (proximal)
Minute volume measurement
Inspiratory minute volume MVi
Mandatory expiratory minute volume MVemand
Spontaneous expiratory minute volume MVespon
Minute volume, leakage-compensated MV
Range 0 to 30 L/min, BTPS
Accuracy Measured with neonatal flow sensor:
±10 % of measured value or ±0.6 mL * (RR + 2),
whichever is greater, under calibration conditions
during device check (at 1013 mbar (1013 cmH2O),
gas with 50 % rel. humidity, 23 °C (73.4 °F)),
no leakage and using a Dräger Y-piece
T0...90
Pediatric patients 33 s
Neonates 20 s

Technical data
Tidal volume measurement

Tidal volume VT
Inspiratory tidal volume (not leakage- VTimand
Expiratory tidal volume (not leakage- VTemand
Inspiratory tidal volume (not leakage- VTispon
compensated) of spontaneous breaths
Volume trapped in the lungs Vtrap
(determined by the PEEPi maneuver)
Accuracy Measured with neonatal flow sensor:
±10 % of measured value or ±0.6 mL, whichever is
greater, under calibration conditions during device
check (at 1013 mbar (1013 cmH2O), gas with 50 %
rel. humidity, 23 °C (73.4 °F)), no leakage and
using a Dräger Y-piece
Respiratory rate measurement
Respiratory rate RR
Mandatory respiratory rate RRmand
Portion of mandatory triggered breaths RRtrig
Spontaneous respiratory rate RRspon
Range 0 to 300/min
Accuracy ±1/min for respiratory rates 2/min and
±2/min for respiratory rates <2/min
T0...90 33 s
Effective inspiratory time during spontaneous 0 to 20 s
breathing Tispon
Effective expiratory time, only if additional 0 to 20 s
setting AutoRelease is active Tlow
Inspiratory time to expiratory time ratio for 1:300 to 600:1
mandatory ventilation I:E
Inspiratory time to expiratory time ratio for 1:300 to 600:1
spontaneous breathing I:Espon

Technical data
CO2 measurement in mainstream

End-expiratory CO2 concentration etCO2
Range 0 to 100 mmHg or
0 to 13.2 Vol% (at 1013 mbar (1013 cmH2O)) or
0 to 13.3 kPa
Accuracy ±2.0 mmHg in the range 0 to 40 mmHg, ±5 % of the
measured value in the range 41 to 100 mmHg
±0.27 kPa in the range 0 to 5.33 kPa, ±5 % of the
measured value in the range 5.34 to 13.3 kPa
±0.26 in the range 0 to 5.26 Vol%, ±5 % of the
measured value in the range 5.27 to 13.2 Vol%
Measurement conditions Respiratory rate (adults): 6 to 40/min
Respiratory rate (pediatric patients):
40 to 100/min
Inspiratory time: >250 ms
Expiratory time: >250 ms
Drift of measurement accuracy <0.03 Vol% (at 5.00 Vol%) for 6 h
The measured values of the CO2
measurement are barometrically pressure
compensated.
T10...90 <35 ms
Total response time <200 ms
Warm-up time, typical <3 min (at 23 °C)
CO2 production V'CO2
Range 0 to 999 mL/min, STPD
Accuracy ±12 %
T10...90 33 s
Serial dead space Vds
(1013 cmH2O), dry gas, 20 °C (68 °F)), 5 % CO2,
Exhaled CO2 per breath VTCO2
Accuracy ±12 %

Technical data
With reference to the displayed measured values,

the following dead space volumes must be taken
into account
CO2 cuvette, adults (6870279, MP01062) 4.3 mL
CO2 cuvette, pediatric patients (6870280, 1.9 mL
MP01063)
Neonatal flow sensor ISO 15 (8411130) 0.9 mL
Neonatal flow sensor Y-piece (8410185) 1.7 mL
Displayed calculated values
Dynamic compliance Cdyn

Range 0 to 650 mL/mbar (mL/cmH2O)
Resistance R
Range 0 to 1000 mbar/(L/s) (or hPa/(L/s) or cmH2O/(L/s))
Patient resistance Rpat
Range 0 to 1000 mbar/(L/s) (or hPa/(L/s) or cmH2O/(L/s))
Leakage minute volume MVleak
Range 0 to 99 L/min BTPS
T0...90 33 s for intubated adults,
20 s for adults with NIV,
20 s for pediatric patients,
10 s for neonates
Leakage in % % leak 0 to 100 %
Spontaneous breathing portion of minute volume 0 to 100 %
in percent %MVspon
Rapid Shallow Breathing RSB
Range
Adults 0 to 9999 (/min/L)
Pediatric patients 0 to 9999 (/min/L)
Neonates 0 to 300 (/min/mL)
For accuracy, see measurement of VT and RR

Technical data
Displayed calculated values (cont.)
Negative Inspiratory Force NIF

Range –80 to 0 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
Accuracy ±6 % of measured value or ±0.5 mbar (or hPa or
cmH2O), whichever is greater
Occlusion pressure P0.1 0 to –25 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
Elastance E 0 to 9999 mbar/L (or hPa/L or cmH2O/L)
Ratio of the compliance of the last 20 % of 0 to 5
P (Pinsp – PEEP) during inspiration to the total
compliance C20/Cdyn
Tidal volume per kg of body weight 0 to 100 mL/kg
Time constant of expiration TCe 0 to 20 s
Dead space ventilation Vds/VTe
Range 0 to 100 %
CO2 slope
Range 0 to 9.99 Vol%/L or
0 to 9.99 kPa/L or
0 to 74.9 mmHg/L
Curve displays
Airway pressure Paw (t) –30 to 100 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
Flow (t) –180 to 180 L/min
Volume V (t) 2 to 3000 mL
CO2 (t) 0 to 100 mmHg or
0 to 13.2 Vol% (at 1013 mbar (1013 cmH2O)) or
0 to 13.3 kPa

Technical data
Monitoring
Alarm sound pressure level L(A) at operator's

position:
Operator's position: at front of device at a distance
of 1 m (39 in) and a height of 1.5 m (59 in).
Free field measurement in accordance with
ISO 3744 and IEC 60601-1-8:2003
Alarm tone sequence IEC/CEI
Range for high-priority alarms from approx. 52 dB(A) to 70 dB(A)
Range for medium-priority alarms from approx. 49 dB(A) to 67 dB(A)
Range for low-priority alarms from approx. 46 dB(A) to 65 dB(A)
Incrementation adjustable in 9 increments
Alarm tone sequence Dräger ventilation
Range for high-priority alarms from approx. 55 dB(A) to 73 dB(A)
Range for medium-priority alarms from approx. 51 dB(A) to 70 dB(A)
Range for low-priority alarms from approx. 47 dB(A) to 65 dB(A)
Alarm sound pressure level for power failure from approx. 70 dB(A) to 75 dB(A)
alarm and auxiliary alarm
Sound pressure level LPA of alarm signals
measured in accordance with IEC 60601-1-8 and
A1:2012:
Alarm tone sequence IEC/CEI
Range for high-priority alarms according to approx. 56 dB(A) to 74 dB(A)
volume setting
Range for medium-priority alarms approx. 48 dB(A) to 65 dB(A)
according to volume setting
Range for low-priority alarms according to approx. 53 dB(A) to 71 dB(A)
volume setting
Alarm tone sequence Dräger ventilation
Range for high-priority alarms according to approx. 54 dB(A) to 72 dB(A)
volume setting
Range for medium-priority alarms approx. 51 dB(A) to 69 dB(A)
according to volume setting
Range for low-priority alarms according to approx. 45 dB(A) to 64 dB(A)
volume setting
Range for power supply failure alarm and approx. 70 dB(A) to 75 dB(A)
auxiliary alarm

Technical data
Monitoring (cont.)
Delay time to sounding of auxiliary alarm if main max. 18 s

alarm has failed
Upper alarm limit alarm if the upper alarm limit has been exceeded
Setting range in invasive ventilation 0.03 to 41 L/min
Setting range in non-invasive ventilation 0.03 to 60 L/min
Alarm delay MV delay
Adults 0 to 30 s
Neonates 0 to 15 s
Lower alarm limit alarm if the value has fallen below the lower alarm limit
Setting range 0.02 to 40 L/min, Off (with NIV or neonates)
Alarm suppression 2 minutes after leaving standby
during and 2 minutes after suction maneuver
2 minutes after switching on flow monitoring
Alarm delay MV delay
Adults 0 to 30 s
Neonates 0 to 15 s
Airway pressure Paw
Setting range 7 to 105 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
Maximum airway pressure 120 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
Inspiratory O2 concentration FiO2
Upper alarm limit alarm after 30 seconds at the latest, if the upper alarm
limit has been continuously exceeded
Lower alarm limit alarm after 30 seconds at the latest, if the lower alarm
limit has been continuously undershot
Setting range both alarm limits are automatically assigned to the
set value: under 60 Vol% with ±4 Vol%, from
60 Vol% with ±6 Vol%
(lower alarm limit 18 Vol% at 21 Vol%)

Technical data
Monitoring (cont.)
End-expiratory CO2 concentration etCO2

Setting range 1 to 98 mmHg (or 0.1 to 13.1 Vol% or 0.1 to
13.3 kPa)
Lower alarm limit alarm if the value has fallen below the lower alarm limit
Setting range 0 to 97 mmHg (or 0 to 13.0 Vol% or 0 to 13.2 kPa)
Respiratory rate RR
Upper alarm limit alarm if the respiratory rate (mandatory and spontaneous
breaths) has been exceeded
Setting range 5 to 200/min, Off
Volume monitoring VT
Upper alarm limit alarm if the tidal volume administered exceeds the upper
alarm limit, the inspiration will be aborted and the
expiration valve opened
Setting range
Adults 110 to 3100 mL, Off
Pediatric patients 21 to 3100 mL, Off
Neonates 3 to 3100 mL, Off
Alarm suppression during the first three consecutive breaths where the
applied inspiratory tidal volume exceeds the upper
alarm limit
Alarm suppression during suction, except for the final oxygen
enrichment
Lower alarm limit alarm if the set tidal volume has not been supplied
Setting range 1 to 2900 mL, Off
Alarm suppression
Adults during the first five consecutive breaths where the
applied inspiratory tidal volume has fallen below the
lower alarm limit
Pediatric patients during the first five consecutive breaths where the
lower alarm limit
Neonates during the first eight consecutive breaths where the
lower alarm limit

Technical data
Monitoring (cont.)
Apnea alarm time Tapn

Alarm if no breathing activity is detected
Setting range 5 to 60 seconds, Off
Disconnect alarm delay time Tdisconnect
Setting range 0 to 60 seconds
Operating data
Protection class
Ventilation unit Class I
Medical Cockpit C300
Gas supply unit GS500
Power supply unit PS500
CO2 sensor (sensor connected) Type BF
Proximal flow sensor (sensor connected) Type BF
Degree of protection against ingress of liquids IP21
and particles Protection against particles with a diameter of more
than 12.5 mm (0.47 in)
Protection against vertically dripping water
Mains power supply
Mains power connection 100 V to 240 V
50/60 Hz
Current consumption
at 230 V max. 1.4 A
at 100 V max. 3.0 A
Inrush current approx. 8 to 24 A peak
approx. 6 to 17 A quasi RMS
Power consumption
maximum 300 W
during ventilation, without charging the approx. 100 W ventilation unit with Medical Cockpit
battery approx. 180 W with GS500
Device fuses
Range 100 V to 240 V F6.3H 250V IEC 60127-2/V (2 pcs.) Ventilation unit

Technical data
Operating data (cont.)
Batteries
The operating time applies when the batteries
are fully charged and new and ventilation is
typical.
Low temperatures may reduce the operating
time.
The charging time applies to new and
completely discharged batteries when
ventilation is typical and GS500 is not used.
The actual charging time depends on the
battery charge.
If GS500 is operating or the ambient
temperature is high, the battery charging
process may be restricted or interrupted.
Typical ventilation
Ventilation mode PC-AC
FiO2 21 Vol%
PEEP 5 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
Pinsp 20 mbar (or hPa or cmH2O)
RR 12/min
Measured MV 6 L/min
Ambient temperature 22 °C (71.6 °F)
Internal battery of ventilation unit (without
PS500)
Type NiMH battery, sealed
Fuse F15A 80V UL248
Capacity 2.5 Ah
Voltage 24 V
Current 0 to 15 A
Operating time if mains power supply is not
available
without GS500 30 minutes
with GS500 15 minutes
Charging
Charging time (to charge battery fully) <4 hours (<2 hours for 80 % charge)

Technical data
Batteries of power supply unit PS500

Type VRLA batteries
Fuse triple F15A 80V UL248
Capacity 24 Ah
Voltage 24 V
Current 0 to 15 A
Operating time if mains power supply is not
available
without GS500 240 minutes
with GS500 120 minutes
Charging
Charging time (to charge battery fully) <24 hours (<20 hours for 80 % charge)
Gas supply
O2 operating pressure 2.7 to 6.0 bar (or 270 to 600 kPa or 39 to 87 psi)
O2 peak input flow 130 L/min (at 2.8 bar inlet pressure)
180 L/min (at 4.0 bar inlet pressure)
O2 connection depending on configuration: DIN, NIST, DISS,
Air Liquide
Air operating pressure 2.7 to 6.0 bar (or 270 to 600 kPa or 39 to 87 psi)
Air peak input flow 130 L/min (at 2.8 bar inlet pressure)
180 L/min (at 4.0 bar inlet pressure)
Air connection depending on configuration: DIN, NIST, DISS,
Air Liquide
Dew point at least 5 Kelvin or 5 °C or 9 °F below ambient
temperature
Oil concentration <0.1 mg/m3
Particle size dust-free air (filtered with pore size <1 µm)
Gas consumption
Consumption for ventilation depends on ventilation settings
Consumption for pneumatic medication compressed air or O2, max. 2.1 bar (or 210 kPa or
nebulizer 30.5 psi), max. 11 L/min
Automatic gas switch-over if one gas fails, the device switches to the other gas

Technical data
Noise emission in accordance with

ISO 80601-2-12:2011 under consideration of
ISO 4871:2009 and ISO 3744:2010
A-class mean surface sound pressure level approx. 33.0 dB
(LpA) with a radius of 2 m (79 in) approx. 43.5 dB with GS500
Uncertainty (k) 3.5 dB
A-class surface sound pressure level (LWA) approx. 46.0 dB
approx. 57.5 dB with GS500
Uncertainty (k) 3.5 dB
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Ventilation unit with lateral standard rail 361 mm x 320 mm x 410 mm
(without Infinity C300) (14.3 in x 12.6 in x 16.1 in)
Ventilation unit and Infinity C300 on the trolley, 577 mm x 1405 mm x 687 mm
carrier frame without bar (22.7 in x 55.3 in x 27.1 in)
Ventilation unit and Infinity C300 on the trolley, 577 mm x 1405 mm x 700 mm
carrier frame with bar (22.7 in x 55.3 in x 27.6 in)
Weight
Ventilation unit approx. 17 kg (37.5 lb)
Medical Cockpit with holder approx. 8 kg (17.6 lb)
Trolley approx. 33 kg (72.8 lb)
Ventilation unit and Infinity C300 approx. 24 kg (52.9 lb)
Ventilation unit and Infinity C300 on the trolley approx. 58 kg (127.9 lb)
PS500 approx. 27 kg (59.5 lb)
GS500 approx. 10.5 kg (23 lb)
Nominal weight (weight of ventilation unit and 58 kg (128 lb)
Medical Cockpit on trolley)
Maximum weight (permitted maximum total 133 kg (293 lb)
weight)
Maximum load
Trolley 100 kg (220.5 lb)
Universal holder with standard rail (G93140) 10 kg (22 lb)
Humidifier holder (8416325) 5 kg (11 lb)
Humidifier holder (G93111) 5 kg (11 lb)
If a hinged arm is attached to the lateral standard
rails of the ventilation unit in addition to the
humidifier holder (8416325), the maximum load of
5 kg (11 lb) per side rail must be observed.
The humidifier holder can then only support 4 kg
(8.8 lb).

Technical data
Electromagnetic compatibility EMC tested in accordance with IEC 60601-1-2

Classification according to EC Directive II b
93/42/EEC, Annex IX
UMDNS code 17-429
Universal Medical Device Nomenclature System –
Nomenclature for medical devices
Materials used
Breathing hose (reusable) Silicone rubber (milky, transparent)
Water trap (reusable) Polysulphone (gray, transparent)
Y-piece (reusable) Polysulphone (yellow, transparent)
Expiratory valve (reusable; housing, closure, Polyamide
nozzle)
Inspiratory unit (reusable; housing, nozzle) Polyamide
Diaphragm Silicone rubber and nickel (whitish and gray)
Reusable CO2 cuvette Polysulphone with sapphire windows (yellow,
transparent: adult cuvette; gray violet, transparent:
pediatric cuvette)
Disposable CO2 cuvette Styrene-butadiene copolymer SBC (white,
transparent: adult cuvette; blue, transparent:
pediatric cuvette)
CO2 sensor Polysulphone (white)
CO2 sensor cable Polyurethane (gray)
For Nurse call
Connection via cable 8417370 only
Potential-free DC contact
Input voltage 24 V DC max.
Input current 1 A DC max.
Switching capacity 15 W max.
Contact pin assignment, see chapter
"Assembly and preparation", "Connecting the
nurse call"

Technical data
Device ports
Outputs
V1 System cable
V2, V3 not used
V4 Nurse call
V5 Neonatal flow sensor
V6 not used
V7 CO2 sensor
V8 not used
V9 GS500
Galvanic isolation
V1 The port is not electrically isolated from the device
electronics.
V2, V3 not used
electronics.
V5 The port is electrically isolated from the device
electronics (Type BF). The test voltage for electrical
isolation is 1500 V.
V6 not used
electronics.
V8 not used
V9 The port is electrically isolated from the device
electronics. The test voltage for galvanic isolation is
500 V.

Technical data
Infinity C300
Operating data
Dimensions (W x H x D) 385 mm x 307 mm x 132 mm
(15.16 in x 12.09 in x 5.2 in)
Connectors
MEDIBUS or MEDIBUS.X protocol
Baud rate 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 baud
(19200 and 38400 baud are required for
transmitting high-speed data, e.g., for the flow
waveform)
Data bits 8
Parity even, odd, no
Stop bits 1 or 2
Pin assignment of COM1 and COM2
Pin 1 DCD
Pin 2 RXD
Pin 3 TXD
Pin 4 DTR
Pin 5 GND
Pin 6 DSR
Pin 7, 8 RTS/CTS
Pin 9 RI
Housing SHLD
Input/output ports 1 x LAN 10/100 Mbit/s, electrically isolated (test
voltage 1500 V)
2 x RS232, electrically isolated (test voltage
1500 V)
3 x USB 2.0, not electrically isolated, only for
passive storage media
1 x DVI-I, not electrically isolated
System connector Connector for system cable (22 pins)
Screen values
Screen size 391.2 mm (15.4 in)
Aspect ratio 16:10
Resolution 1280 x 800 pixels
Contrast ratio (typical) 700:1
Viewing angle 140°

Technical data
Automatic alarm limits
The following tables describe the alarm limits which

cannot be set by the user.
Pressure monitoring
Alarm message Description/Detection

Airway pressure high The airway pressure is monitored to detect whether the upper alarm
limit is exceeded.
If the alarm limit indicating a too high airway pressure is linked to
ventilation therapy controls, this limit is set 5 mbar (5 cmH2O) above
the highest pressure which is regularly applied during ventilation
according to the user settings. This connection is switched off at the
factory.
Breathing hose kinked An excessive pressure during an O2 therapy is monitored. The alarm
(O2 Therapy) limit is set at 30 mbar (30 cmH2O).
Airway pressure negative Situations in which the pressure becomes negative are monitored. The
alarm limit is set at –10 mbar (–10 cmH2O).
PEEP high / Plow high The alarm limit is 8 mbar (8 cmH2O) above the set PEEP or Plow level.
The alarm triggers a pressure release to ambient pressure. The alarm
(!!!)
is not triggered below 11 mbar (11 cmH2O). An alarm is triggered if this
condition applies for 2 breaths or after a maximum of 15 seconds.
To avoid false alarms, it is not monitored whether the lower pressure
level has been reached if in APRV and if Tlow is smaller 1 s or
AutoRelease is activated.
PEEP high / Plow high The alarm limit is 4 mbar (4 cmH2O) above the set PEEP. An alarm is
triggered if this condition applies for 2 breaths or after a maximum of
(!!)
15 seconds.
PEEP low / Plow low A too low PEEP or Plow value during ventilation is monitored. The
alarm limit depends on the set value of the PEEP or Plow level. The
alarm limit is 5 mbar (5 cmH2O) below the set value. An alarm is
triggered if this condition applies for 10 breaths.
Pressure limited (ATC/PPS) The upper pressure limit is monitored to detect whether it is reached
when using ATC or PPS.
If the Paw high alarm limit is adjustable, the alarm limit is derived from
this value and lies in the range Paw high –5 mbar
(–5 cmH2O) to Paw high –1 mbar (–1 cmH2O), depending on how
close the Paw high value comes to the currently applied ventilation.
If the Paw high alarm limit is linked (Pmax/Paw high autoset), the
pressure limit corresponds to the value of the Pmax therapy control.

Technical data

Airway pressure low An insufficient airway pressure is monitored by checking whether the
integral of undercutting the measured pressure values of the lower
pressure level exceeds 22.5 mbar x s (22.5 cmH2O x s).
Volume monitoring
The expiratory minute volume MVe is monitored
within the set alarm limits.
The inspiratory tidal volume VTi or, when leakage
compensation is switched on, the leakage-
compensated tidal volume VT is monitored within
the set alarm limits.
Because the device ensures the minimum
inspiratory tidal volume when volume-controlled
ventilation modes or pressure-controlled ventilation
modes with Volume Guarantee are selected, it is
not possible to set the lower alarm limit for VTi or
VT manually.

VT not reached, leakage Volume-controlled breaths are monitored to detect whether the set
volume is reached. The alarm limit is set at 90 % of the set value for VT.
VT not reached
VT not reached, Pmax active
Pressure limited During ventilation with AutoFlow or Volume Guarantee, breaths are
monitored to detect whether the volume to be applied is reached if the
applied ventilation pressure cannot automatically be increased any
further. The alarm limit is set at the set value for the volume.

Technical data
Monitoring of the breathing circuit and the

patient connection

Disconnection? Disconnection is monitored by checking that the mandatory breaths
reach a minimum pressure level. The alarm limit is derived from the set
points for ventilation.
During pressure-controlled ventilation, the alarm is triggered when the
airway pressure is lower than the lower pressure level plus 50 % of the
pressure difference between the upper and lower pressure levels.
During pressure-supported ventilation, the alarm is triggered when the
airway pressure is lower than the lower pressure level plus 30 % of the
pressure difference between the upper and lower pressure levels.
During ventilation with AutoFlow, Volume Guarantee and volume
support, the limit is 50 % of the pressure difference between the upper
pressure level and the lower pressure level currently calculated by
Evita V300.
During volume-controlled ventilation, the pressure level is 5 mbar
(5 cmH2O) above PEEP.
All pressure criteria become ineffective if a sufficient expiration has
been detected.
In the event of an excessive inspiratory flow at the current airway
pressure, a disconnection due to excessive inspiratory volume is
detected. This volume depends on the patient category:
– 4.5 L in the Adultpatient category
– 1.5 L in the Ped. pat. patient category
– 0.5 L in the Neo. patient category
Leakage Leakages are monitored in the Adult and Ped. pat. patient categories.
The alarm limit is set at 55 % of relative Leakage. Leakages during NIV
are not monitored.
Airway obstructed? Obstructions in the breathing circuit are monitored by observing the
Flow delivered to the patient during a defined period.

Technical data
FiO2 monitoring

FiO2 high An excessive O2 concentration of the applied gas is monitored.
The alarm limit is 4 Vol% above the set value if this is less than or equal
to 60 Vol%.
The alarm limit is 6 Vol% above the set value if this is greater than
60 Vol%.
FiO2 low An insufficient O2 concentration of the applied gas is monitored.
For an FiO2 concentration of 21 Vol% the alarm limit is 18 Vol%.
The alarm limit is 4 Vol% below the set value if this is greater than
21 Vol% and less than or equal to 60 Vol%.
The alarm limit is 6 Vol% below the set value if this is greater than
60 Vol%.
CO2 monitoring

CO2 sensor? The correct functioning of the CO2 sensor is monitored. An alarm is
immediately generated in the event of a technical defect or if a sensor
is not connected.
An alarm is generated after 60 s if the sensor is removed from the
cuvette or the sensor does not detect any breathing activity.

Technical data
Essential performance characteristics
The essential performance consists in a controlled Additionally, the integrated monitoring alarms in the
and monitored patient ventilation with user-defined following situations:
settings for the monitoring functions – Failure of the external power supply
– minimum and maximum tidal volume, – Battery discharge
– maximum airway pressure, – Failure of the gas supply
– minimum and maximum O2 concentration in the
breathing gas,
or, if a set limit is exceeded, an appropriate alarm.
Connections to IT networks
In an IT network, data can be exchanged by means Information on connecting to the

of wired or wireless technologies. An IT network network
can be any data interface (e.g., RS232, LAN, USB,
printer interface) that is described in standards and
conventions. Prerequisites
During operation, this device can exchange This device must only be connected to the network
information with other devices by means of IT by service personnel. The IT representative of the
networks and supports the following functions: hospital must be consulted in advance.
– Display of waveforms and parameter data The following documents must be observed:
– Signaling of alarms – Accompanying documents of this device
– Transfer of device settings and patient data – Description of the network interface
– Service mode, access to logbooks – Description of the network-based alarm

systems
Connecting this device to a network that
incorporates other devices or making subsequent Dräger recommends complying with IEC 80001-1
changes to that network can lead to new risks for (risk management for IT networks with medical
patients, users, and third parties. Before the device devices).
is connected to the network or the network is
changed, these risks must be identified, analyzed, Serial interfaces
and evaluated, and appropriate measures taken.
The following interfaces are supported:
Examples of subsequent changes to the network:
– RS232 interfaces conforming to EIA RS232
– Changing the network configuration (CCITT V.24/V.28) for the following
– Removing devices from the network applications:
– MEDIBUS, MEDIBUS.X
– Adding new devices to the network – Connection to medical devices from other
– Performing upgrades or updates on devices manufacturers
that are connected to the network

Technical data
Consequences of using an unsuitable network – Data are sent incomplete, sent to the wrong
device, or not sent at all.
If the network does not meet the requirements,
dangerous situations can result. The following – Patient data are intercepted, falsified, or
situations can occur with this device: damaged.
– Due to an insecure decentralized alarm system: – Data have incorrect time stamps.
– Alarms or data are transmitted at the wrong
time.
Requirements for the electrical characteristics
– Alarms are not transmitted.
of connected devices and networks
– During an interruption of the network
The analog and digital ports are only appropriate for
connection:
connecting devices or networks that have a
– Suppressed alarms or alarm tones are not
nominal voltage on the network side of max.
reactivated, but remain suppressed.
24 V DC and meet the requirements of one of the
– Alarms are not transmitted.
following standards:
– Without firewall and antivirus software:
– IEC 60950-1: Ungrounded SELV circuits
– Data are not protected.
– Device settings are changed. – IEC 60601-1 (as of 2nd edition): Touchable
– The device generates false alarms or no secondary circuits
alarms.
Open-source software
Dräger devices that use software may use open-

source software, depending on their setup. Open-
source software may be subject to different terms of
license. Additional information regarding the open-
source software used in this device is available at
the following web page:
www.draeger.com/opensource

Technical data
EMC Declaration
General information Detailed radio frequency characteristics

Communication devices in accordance with
The EMC compliance of the medical device is also IEEE 802.11b:
applicable to the external cables, transducers, and – 2412 to 2472 MHz
accessories specified in the list of accessories. In – DSSS limited to 100 mW
addition, accessories which do not affect EMC – applicable to access points and client adapters
compliance may be used if no other reasons forbid
their use (see other sections of the instructions for Communication devices in accordance with
use). The use of noncompliant accessories can IEEE 802.15.1:
result in increased emissions or decreased – 2400 to 2485 MHz
immunity of the medical device. – FHSS limited to 2.5 mW
The medical device may only be used adjacent to See the instructions for use of the wireless devices
or stacked with other devices when the for further details.
configuration is approved by Dräger. If adjacent or
stacked use of non-approved configurations is
inevitable, the medical device must be observed to
verify normal operation in the said configuration. In
any case, strictly observe the instructions for use of
the other devices.
Electromagnetic emissions
When used in wireless networks, be aware that the

system operates in the 2.4 GHz frequency range.
Other equipment, even if compliant with CISPR
emission requirements, can interfere with reception
of wireless data. When selecting wireless systems
(wireless communication media, pager systems,
etc.) for use in installations where wireless
networking is used, care must always be used to
ensure that operating frequencies are compatible.
For example, selecting wireless communication
media that operate at 2.4 GHz will likely cause
difficulty with the networking components. Low-
level signals such as ECG signals are particularly
susceptible to interference from electromagnetic
energy. While the equipment meets the testing
described below, it will not ensure perfect
operation. The ‘quieter’ the electrical environment
the better. In general, increasing the distance
between electrical devices decreases the likelihood
of interference.

Technical data
Electromagnetic environment
The medical device is intended for use in an
electromagnetic environment as specified below.
The user must ensure its use in such an
environment.
Emissions Compliance according to Electromagnetic environment

Radio frequency emissions Group 1 The medical device uses RF energy only
(CISPR 11) for its internal function. Therefore, its RF
emissions are very low and are not likely
to cause any interference in nearby
electronic equipment.
Class A The medical device is suitable for use in
all establishments other than domestic
establishments and those directly
connected (without transformer) to the
public low-voltage power supply network
that supplies buildings used for domestic
purposes.
Harmonic emissions Not applicable
(IEC 61000-3-2)
Voltage fluctuations / flicker Not applicable
emissions (IEC 61000-3-3)

Technical data
Electromagnetic immunity
The medical device is intended for use in an

electromagnetic environment as specified below.
The user must ensure its use in such an
environment.
Immunity against IEC 60601-1-2 Test Compliance level Electromagnetic

level (medical device) environment
Electrostatic discharge Contact discharge: ±2, 4, 6 kV Floors should be wood,
(ESD) (IEC 61000-4-2) ±6 kV concrete, or ceramic
Air discharge: ±8 kV ±2, 4, 8 kV, except tiles. If floors are
interfaces bearing an covered with synthetic
ESD symbol material, the relative
humidity should be at
least 30 %.
Electrical fast Power supply lines: ±2 kV Mains voltage quality
transients / bursts ±2 kV should be that of a
(IEC 61000-4-4) Longer input lines / ±1 kV typical commercial or
output lines: ±1 kV hospital environment.
Surge on AC mains Common mode: ±2 kV ±2 kV Mains voltage quality

lines / surges Differential mode: ±1 kV ±1 kV should be that of a
(IEC 61000-4-5) typical commercial or
hospital environment.
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency
magnetic field magnetic fields should
(50/60 Hz) be at levels
(IEC 61000-4-8) characteristic of a typical
location in a typical
commercial or hospital
environment.
Voltage dips and short Dip >95 %, 0.5 periods >95 %, 0.5 periods Mains power quality
interruptions on AC Dip 60 %, 5 periods 60 %, 5 periods should be that of a
mains input lines typical commercial or
(IEC 61000-4-11) Dip 30 %, 25 periods 30 %, 25 periods hospital environment.
Dip >95 %, 5 seconds >95 %, 5 seconds If the user of the medical
device requires
continued operation
during mains power
supply interruptions, it is
recommended that the
medical device be
powered from an
uninterruptible power
supply or a battery.

Technical data
Immunity against IEC 60601-1-2 Test Compliance level Electromagnetic

level (medical device) environment
Radiated RF 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz: 10 V/m Recommended
(IEC 61000-4-3) 10 V/m minimum distance to
portable and mobile
radio frequency
transmitters with
transmission power
PEIRP to the medical
device including its lines:
(1.84 m x PEIRP)1)
Conducted RF 150 kHz to 80 MHz: 10 V Recommended
(IEC 61000-4-6) 10 V inside ISM bands2) minimum distance to
150 kHz to 80 MHz: 3 V 3 V portable and mobile
outside ISM bands2) radio frequency
transmitters with
transmission power
PEIRP to the medical
device including its lines:
(1.84 m x PEIRP)1)
1) For PEIRP, insert the highest possible "equivalent isotropic radiated power" of the adjacent radio frequency transmitter. In
the vicinity of equipment marked with the symbol , interference can occur. Field strengths from fixed, portable, or mobile
radio frequency transmitters at the location of the medical device should be less than 3 V/m in the frequency range from
150 kHz to 2.5 GHz and less than 1 V/m above 2.5 GHz.
2) ISM bands in this frequency range are: 6.765 MHz to 6.795 MHz; 13.553 MHz to 13.567 MHz; 26.957 MHz to 27.283 MHz;
40.66 MHz to 40.70 MHz.

Technical data
Recommended separation distances to portable and mobile RF telecommunication

devices
The separation distances below are in accordance

with IEC 60601-1-2.
Max. PEIRP (W) 150 kHz to 2.5 GHz All other frequencies Examples
0.03 0.32 m (1.05 ft) 0.96 m (3.15 ft) e.g., WLAN 5250 / 5775 (Europe)
0.10 0.58 m (1.90 ft) 1.75 m (5.74 ft) e.g., WLAN 2440 (Europe)
0.17 0.76 m (2.49 ft) 2.28 m (7.48 ft) e.g., Bluetooth, RFID 2.5 GHz
0.20 0.82 m (2.69 ft) 2.47 m (8.10 ft) e.g., WLAN 5250 (not in Europe)
0.25 0.92 m (3.02 ft) 2.76 m (9.06 ft) e.g., UMTS cellular phones
0.41 1.18 m (3.87 ft) 3.53 m (11.58 ft) e.g., cordless DECT devices
0.82 1.67 m (5.48 ft) 5.00 m (16.40 ft) e.g., RFID 13.56 MHz
1.00 1.84 m (6.04 ft) 5.52 m (18.11 ft) e.g., WLAN 5600 (not in Europe)
1.64 2.36 m (7.74 ft) 7.07 m (23.20 ft) e.g., GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
3.28 3.33 m (10.93 ft) 10.00 m (32.81 ft) e.g., GSM 900 cellular phones,
RFID 868 MHz
Reduced separation distances to portable and mobile RF telecommunication

devices
The separation distances below are based on tests

performed by Dräger to determine the minimum
separation distances. These reduced separation
distances are valid only for mobile RF
telecommunication devices using the standards
listed.
Mobile communication device using... Separation distance

GSM 850, GSM 900, RFID 868 MHz (limited to 2 W ERP) 0.07 m (0.23 ft)
GSM 1800, GSM 1900 (limited to 1 W ERP) 0.05 m (0.16 ft)
UMTS, DECT (limited to 0.25 W ERP) 0.02 m (0.07 ft)
Bluetooth, WLAN 2450, RFID 2450 (limited to 0.1 W ERP) 0.03 m (0.10 ft)

Principles of operation
Description of the ventilation modes . . . . . . 314 Battery concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

VC-CMV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 General information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
VC-SIMV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Display of battery charge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
VC-AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Battery ageing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
VC-MMV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Alarm behavior in battery operation . . . . . . . . 364
PC-CMV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
PC-BIPAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Pneumatic functional description . . . . . . . . 366
PC-SIMV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
PC-AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Main menu bar structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
PC-PSV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
PC-APRV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Factory-set screen views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
SPN-CPAP/PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
SPN-CPAP/VS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 List of references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
SPN-CPAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
SPN-PPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Additional settings for ventilation . . . . . . . . 336

Apnea Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Flow trigger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Inspiratory termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Sigh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
AutoFlow/Volume Guarantee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
ATC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
AutoRelease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Special functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Medication nebulization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Diagnostics – measurement maneuver . . . . . . 351
C20/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Smart Pulmonary View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Description of the therapy types. . . . . . . . . . 356

O2 therapy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
NIV – Non-invasive ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Automatic leakage compensation . . . . . . . . 357
Flow reduction Anti Air Shower . . . . . . . . . . 358
Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Flow / volume measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Measurement principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Airway pressure measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Description of the ventilation modes
VC-CMV
Volume Control-Continuous Mandatory Ventilation

Continuous volume-controlled ventilation with fixed
inspiratory flow
Paw
Insp. Pause Pressure limitation
Pplat Pmax
PEEP
t
Ti Te
1
RR
Flow
Insp. flow
204
Volume-controlled ventilation In the Neo. patient category, this mode is only

available with AutoFlow activated.
The tidal volume of the mandatory breaths is
In the Neo. patient category, VC-CMV is not
determined by the volume VT. The duration of the
selectable with non-invasive ventilation.
mandatory breaths is determined by Ti. The
pressure rise is determined by the inspiratory flow
Insp. flow. If the inspiratory flow is so high that the
set tidal volume is reached before inspiratory time
Ti has fully elapsed, an inspiratory pause occurs. If
leakage compensation is activated, Evita V300
increases the inspiratory flow in order to apply the
set volume despite leakages.
The mandatory breaths are time-cycled and are not
triggered by the patient. The number of mandatory
breaths is determined by the respiratory rate RR.

Pressure limitation
The therapy control Pmax is activated when the
user links the alarm limit Paw high to the therapy
control Pmax. Evita V300 can avoid the pressure
peak with the pressure limitation Pmax, complying
with the set tidal volume VT.
The tidal volume VT remains constant provided the
plateau pressure Pplat is present. Evita V300 limits
the pressure by reducing the inspiratory flow when
the set Pmax value is reached.
If the tidal volume VT can no longer be applied with
the selected pressure Pmax, e.g., due to reduced
compliance, the low-priority alarm VT not reached,
Pmax active is generated.

VC-SIMV
Volume Control-Synchronized Intermittent

Mandatory Ventilation
Intermittent, triggered, volume-controlled
ventilation with a fixed inspiratory flow, allowing
spontaneous breathing during the expiratory
phase.
Paw
Pressure support PS Pressure limitation
fast pressure slow pressure

rise rise
Pmax
PEEP
t
Ti Trigger window
1
RR
Flow
Insp. flow
205
Volume-controlled ventilation Synchronization

The tidal volume of the mandatory breaths is The mandatory breaths can be triggered by the
determined by the volume VT. The duration of the patient's inspiratory effort from the PEEP level.
A mandatory breath can only be triggered within a
pressure rise is determined by the inspiratory flow
"trigger window" by the flow trigger in synchrony
Insp. flow. If the inspiratory flow is so high that the
with the patient's spontaneous inspiratory effort.
set tidal volume is reached before inspiratory time
This prevents the mandatory breath being applied
Ti has fully elapsed, an inspiratory pause occurs. If
during expiration.
increases the inspiratory flow in order to apply the The trigger window is 5 seconds in the Adult
set volume despite leakages. patient category and 1.5 seconds in the Ped. pat.
and Neo. patient categories.
In the Neo. patient category, this mode is only
available with AutoFlow activated. For expiratory times shorter than 5 seconds in the
In the Neo. patient category, VC-SIMV is not Adult patient category or 1.5 seconds in the Ped.
selectable with non-invasive ventilation. pat. and Neo. patient categories, the trigger
window covers the entire expiratory time minus a
refractory period for the previous expiration.

Synchronization of mandatory breaths reduces the categories. In non-invasive ventilation, the

expiratory time. Evita V300 extends the maximum inspiratory time is limited to 130 % of Ti
subsequent expiratory time or spontaneous (maximum 4 seconds) in the Adult patient category
breathing time by the missing time. This prevents and to 130 % of Ti (maximum 1.5 seconds) in the
an increase of the mandatory respiratory rate. Ped. pat. patient category.
The number of mandatory breaths is determined by
the respiratory rate RR. Pressure limitation
If the patient breathes in at the beginning of the The therapy control Pmax is activated when the
trigger window and has already inspired a user links the alarm limit Paw high to the therapy
significant volume, Evita V300 takes this volume control Pmax. Evita V300 can avoid the pressure
into account. During the subsequent mandatory peak with the pressure limitation Pmax, complying
breath, the ventilation unit reduces the inspiratory with the set tidal volume VT.
flow phase and extends the inspiratory pause.
Pressure support the pressure by reducing the inspiratory flow when
During spontaneous breathing from the PEEP
level, the patient can be supported with PS. Every If the tidal volume VT can no longer be applied with
inspiratory effort of the patient that meets the trigger the selected pressure Pmax, e.g., due to reduced
criteria triggers a pressure-supported breath. compliance, the low-priority alarm VT not reached,
By setting the trigger level, the patient's inspiratory Pmax active is generated.
efforts are synchronized. The time, number, and
duration of pressure-supported breaths is
determined by the patient's spontaneous breathing.
As in all pressure-controlled ventilation modes, the
tidal volume supplied depends on the difference in
pressure "Psupp – PEEP", the lung mechanics
(resistance and compliance) and the patient's
respiratory drive. The pressure rise from the lower
pressure level PEEP to the upper pressure level
Psupp is determined by the Slope setting.
The pressure support is terminated as soon as the
inspiratory flow falls below a certain proportion of
the maximum inspiratory flow.
The proportion of the maximum inspiratory flow can
be adjusted using the Insp. term. setting. If the
Insp. term. setting is not configured, this proportion
is 25 % in the Adult patient category and 15 % in
the Ped. pat. and Neo. patient categories.
The pressure support is also terminated as soon as
the duration of the support has reached the
maximum inspiratory time. For intubated patients,
the maximum inspiratory time is limited to
4 seconds in the Adult patient category and to
1.5 seconds in the Ped. pat. and Neo. patient

VC-AC
Volume Control-Assist Control

Assisted-controlled, volume-controlled ventilation
with fixed inspiratory flow and backup respiratory
rate
Paw
Pressure limitation
Insp. Phase
Pplat Pmax
PEEP
t
Ti Te Trigger window
1
RR
Flow Insp. flow
206
Volume-controlled ventilation Assisted-controlled ventilation
The tidal volume of the mandatory breaths is Every inspiratory effort of the patient from the PEEP
determined by the volume VT. The duration of the level triggers a synchronized mandatory breath.
mandatory breaths is determined by Ti. The Thus, the time and number of mandatory breaths
pressure rise is determined by the inspiratory flow are determined by the patient. The trigger window
Insp. flow. If the inspiratory flow is so high that the covers the expiratory time minus a refractory period
set tidal volume is reached before inspiratory time for the previous expiration. The expiratory time is
Ti has fully elapsed, an inspiratory pause occurs. If determined by the respiratory rate RR and the
leakage compensation is activated, Evita V300 inspiratory time Ti. A non-synchronized mandatory
increases the inspiratory flow in order to apply the breath is triggered at the latest at the end of the
set volume despite leakages. expiratory time (back-up respiratory rate).
The minimum number of mandatory breaths is
In the Neo. patient category, this mode is only
determined by the respiratory rate RR.
In the Neo. patient category, VC-AC is not

Pressure limitation
peak with the pressure limitation Pmax, complying
with the set tidal volume VT.
If the tidal volume VT can no longer be applied with
the selected pressure Pmax, e.g., due to reduced
compliance, the low-priority alarm VT not reached,
Pmax active is generated.

VC-MMV
Volume Control-Mandatory Minute Volume

Ventilation
Volume-controlled ventilation to ensure mandatory
minute ventilation
Pressure support PS Pressure limitation

Paw
rise rise
Pmax
PEEP
Trigger window t
Ti
1
RR
Flow
Insp. flow
MV
Set MV
Mandatory MV
Spont. breathed MV
No beginning spontaneous sufficient t

spontaneous breathing spontaneous
breathing breathing
208
Volume-controlled ventilation In the Neo. patient category, this mode is only

The tidal volume of the mandatory breaths is
In the Neo. patient category, VC-MMV is not
determined by the volume VT. The duration of the
pressure rise is determined by the inspiratory flow MMV works similar to SIMV, however, the
Insp. flow. If the inspiratory flow is so high that the mandatory breaths are only provided if
set tidal volume is reached before inspiratory time spontaneous breathing is not sufficient and below
Ti has fully elapsed, an inspiratory pause occurs. If the prescribed minimum ventilation.
increases the inspiratory flow in order to apply the
set volume despite leakages.

Should spontaneous breathing increase, fewer Pressure limitation

mandatory breaths will be provided. The minimum
ventilation is determined by the setting of the tidal
volume VT and the respiratory rate RR.
The maximum number of mandatory breaths is peak with the pressure limitation Pmax, complying
determined by the respiratory rate RR. However, with the set tidal volume VT.
this number is only provided when insufficient
spontaneous breathing is present.
Pressure support the set Pmax value is reached.
During spontaneous breathing from the PEEP If the tidal volume VT can no longer be applied with
level, the patient can be supported with PS. Every the selected pressure Pmax, e.g., due to reduced
inspiratory effort of the patient that meets the trigger compliance, the low-priority alarm VT not reached,
criteria triggers a pressure-supported breath. By Pmax active is generated.
setting the trigger level, the patient's inspiratory
categories. In non-invasive ventilation, the
maximum inspiratory time is limited to 130 % of Ti
(maximum 4 seconds) in the Adult patient category
and to 130 % of Ti (maximum 1.5 seconds) in the
Ped. pat. patient category.

PC-CMV
Pressure Control-Continuous Mandatory

Ventilation
Continuous pressure-controlled ventilation allowing
spontaneous breathing (open system) during the
entire respiratory cycle
Paw fast pressure slow pressure

rise rise
Pinsp
PEEP
t
Ti
1
RR
Flow
without spontaneous with spontaneous breathing

breathing
200
Pressure-controlled ventilation
The upper pressure level is determined by Pinsp.
The duration of the mandatory breaths is
determined by Ti. As in all pressure-controlled
ventilation modes, the tidal volume supplied
depends on the difference in pressure "Pinsp –
PEEP", the lung mechanics (resistance and
compliance) and the patient's respiratory drive. The
pressure rise from the lower pressure level PEEP
to the upper pressure level Pinsp is determined by
the Slope setting.
The mandatory breaths are time-cycled and are not
triggered by the patient. The number of mandatory
breaths is determined by the respiratory rate RR.

PC-BIPAP
Pressure Control-Biphasic Positive Airway

Pressure
Intermittent, synchronized, pressure-controlled
ventilation allowing spontaneous breathing (open
system) during the entire respiratory cycle and
expiratory synchronization
Paw fast pressure Pressure support PS

slow pressure
rise rise fast pressure slow pressure
Pinsp rise rise
PEEP
t
Ti Trigger window for insp. and
1 exp. synchronization
RR
Flow

breathing
212
Pressure-controlled ventilation In the Neo. patient category, this mode is not
available with non-invasive ventilation.
The upper pressure level is determined by Pinsp.
The duration of the mandatory breaths is
determined by Ti. As in all pressure-controlled Synchronization
ventilation modes, the tidal volume supplied
The mandatory breaths can be triggered by the
depends on the difference in pressure "Pinsp –
patient's inspiratory effort on PEEP level.
compliance) and the patient's respiratory drive. The A mandatory breath can only be triggered within a
pressure rise from the lower pressure level PEEP "trigger window" by the flow trigger in synchrony
to the upper pressure level Pinsp is determined by with the patient's spontaneous inspiratory effort.
the Slope setting. This prevents the mandatory breath being applied
during expiration.
The change-over from the inspiratory to the
expiratory pressure level is synchronized with the The trigger window is 5 seconds in the Adult
patient's spontaneous breathing. Synchronization patient category and 1.5 seconds in the Ped. pat.
of the mandatory breath reduces the duration of the and Neo. patient categories.
mandatory breath. Evita V300 extends the
subsequent breath by the missing time. This
prevents an increase in respiratory rate.

For expiratory times shorter than 5 seconds in the The pressure support is also terminated as soon as
Adult patient category or 1.5 seconds in the Ped. the duration of the support has reached the
pat. and Neo. patient categories, the trigger maximum inspiratory time. For intubated patients,
window covers the entire expiratory time minus a the maximum inspiratory time is limited to
refractory period for the previous expiration. 4 seconds in the Adult patient category and to
Synchronization of mandatory breaths reduces the
categories. In non-invasive ventilation, the
expiratory time. Evita V300 extends the
maximum inspiratory time is limited to 130 % of Ti
subsequent expiratory time or spontaneous
(maximum 4 seconds) in the Adult patient category
breathing time by the missing time. This prevents
and to 130 % of Ti (maximum 1.5 seconds) in the
an increase of the mandatory respiratory rate.
Ped. pat. patient category.
the respiratory rate RR.
Pressure support
level, the patient can be supported with PS. Every
inspiratory effort of the patient that meets the trigger
criteria triggers a pressure-supported breath. By

PC-SIMV
Pressure Control-Synchronized Intermittent

Mandatory Ventilation
Intermittent, triggered, pressure-controlled
ventilation allowing spontaneous breathing (open
system) during the entire respiratory cycle

Pressure support PS
rise rise fast pressure slow pressure
rise rise
Pinsp
PEEP
t
Ti Trigger window for insp.
1 synchronization
RR
Flow

breathing
201
Pressure-controlled ventilation Synchronization
The upper pressure level is determined by Pinsp. The mandatory breaths can be triggered by the
The duration of the mandatory breaths is patient's inspiratory effort from the PEEP level. By
determined by Ti. As in all pressure-controlled setting the trigger level, the mandatory breaths can
ventilation modes, the tidal volume supplied be synchronized with the patient's inspiratory
depends on the difference in pressure "Pinsp – efforts.
A mandatory breath can only be triggered within a
compliance) and the patient's respiratory drive. The
"trigger window" by the flow trigger in synchrony
pressure rise from the lower pressure level PEEP
with the patient's spontaneous inspiratory effort.
to the upper pressure level Pinsp is determined by
This prevents the mandatory breath being applied
the Slope setting.
during expiration.
In the Neo. patient category, this mode is not
The trigger window is 5 seconds in the Adult
patient category and 1.5 seconds in the Ped. pat.
and Neo. patient categories. For expiratory times
shorter than 5 seconds in the Adult patient
category or 1.5 seconds in the Ped. pat. and Neo.
patient categories, the trigger window covers the
entire expiratory time minus a refractory period for
the previous expiration.

Synchronization of mandatory breaths reduces the

expiratory time. Evita V300 extends the
subsequent expiratory time or spontaneous
breathing time by the missing time. This prevents
an increase of the mandatory respiratory rate.
the respiratory rate RR.
Pressure support
inspiratory effort of the patient that meets the trigger
criteria triggers a pressure-supported breath. By
categories.
In non-invasive ventilation, the maximum
inspiratory time is limited to 130 % of Ti (maximum
4 seconds) in the Adult patient category and to
130 % of Ti (maximum 1.5 seconds) in the Ped.
pat. patient category.

PC-AC
Pressure Control-Assist Control

Assist-controlled, pressure-controlled ventilation
allowing spontaneous breathing during the entire
respiratory cycle and backup respiratory rate

rise rise
Pinsp
PEEP
t
Ti Trigger window for insp.
1 synchronization
RR
Flow

breathing
202
Pressure-controlled ventilation Assisted-controlled ventilation
The upper pressure level is determined by Pinsp. Every inspiratory effort of the patient from the PEEP
The duration of the mandatory breaths is level triggers a synchronized mandatory breath.
determined by Ti. As in all pressure-controlled Thus, the time and number of mandatory breaths
ventilation modes, the tidal volume supplied are determined by the patient. The trigger window
depends on the difference in pressure "Pinsp – covers the expiratory time minus a refractory period
PEEP", the lung mechanics (resistance and for the previous expiration. The expiratory time is
compliance) and the patient's respiratory drive. The determined by the respiratory rate RR and the
pressure rise from the lower pressure level PEEP inspiratory time Ti. A non-synchronized mandatory
to the upper pressure level Pinsp is determined by breath is triggered at the latest at the end of the
the Slope setting. expiratory time (back-up respiratory rate).
In the Neo. patient category, this mode is not The minimum number of mandatory breaths is
available with non-invasive ventilation. determined by the respiratory rate RR.

PC-PSV
Pressure Control-Pressure Support Ventilation

Pressure-controlled ventilation with guaranteed
minimum respiratory rate (backup respiratory rate)
Spontaneous breathing with pressure

Paw
support PS
rise rise
PEEP
t
Flow
Inspiratory termination criterion
310
Pressure support The pressure support is terminated as soon as the
level, the patient can be supported with PS. The
level of pressure support is determined by Pinsp. The proportion of the maximum inspiratory flow can
Every inspiratory effort of the patient that meets the be adjusted using the Insp. term. setting. If the
trigger criteria triggers a pressure-supported Insp. term. setting is not configured, this proportion
breath. By setting the trigger level, the patient's is 25 % in the Adult patient category and 15 % in
inspiratory efforts are synchronized. The time, the Ped. pat. and Neo. patient categories.
number, and duration of pressure-supported
breaths is determined by the patient's spontaneous
breathing. If the patient's respiratory rate is less
maximum inspiratory time.
than the set back-up respiratory rate RR or there is
no spontaneous breathing present, the device For intubated patients, the maximum inspiratory
administers pressure-supported breaths with the time is limited to 4 seconds in the Adult patient
respiratory rate RR. category and to 1.5 seconds in the Ped. pat.
patient category. For the Neo. patient category, the
maximum inspiratory time can be set with Timax to
a maximum of 1.5 seconds.
pressure "Pinsp – PEEP", the lung mechanics
Pinsp is determined by the Slope setting.

In non-invasive ventilation, the maximum duration

of a breath for the Adult and Ped. pat. patient
categories can be set with Timax. In the Neo.
patient category, this mode is not available with
non-invasive ventilation.

PC-APRV
Pressure Control-Airway Pressure Release

Ventilation
Spontaneous breathing under continuous positive
airway pressure with brief pressure releases
Paw
Phigh
Plow
t
Thigh
Tlow
Flow
203
The patient breathes spontaneously at a high determines the percentage by which the expiratory
pressure level Phigh for an adjustable length of flow must fall short of in relation to the peak flow for
time Thigh. For very short expiratory times Tlow, the ventilation to return to the high pressure level.
Evita V300 switches to a low pressure level Plow.
When AutoRelease is switched on, the change-
The normal lung areas are emptied, but the "slow"
over from the upper pressure level Phigh to the
lung areas only change volume to a lesser extent*.
lower pressure level Plow is synchronized with the
The number of pressure releases is determined by patient's spontaneous breathing.
the Thigh and Tlow settings. The releases are
Synchronization of the mandatory breath reduces
time-cycled and are not triggered by the patient.
the time on the upper pressure level. Evita V300
The duration is determined by Tlow. The tidal
prolongs the subsequent ventilation time on the
volume exchanged during the release phases
upper pressure level by the missing time. This
depends on the difference in pressure Phigh –
prevents an increase in respiratory rate.
Plow, the lung mechanics (resistance and
compliance) and the length of pressure release In the Neo. patient category, this mode is not
Tlow. The steepness of the pressure rise from the available with non-invasive ventilation.
lower pressure level Plow to the upper pressure
level Phigh is determined by the Slope setting.
During the activation of AutoRelease, the duration
of pressure releases is determined by the
expiratory flow trace. The Exp. term. setting
* References [1], [2], [3], [4], see page 374.

SPN-CPAP/PS
Spontaneous-Continuous Positive Airway

Pressure/Pressure Support
Spontaneous breathing with continuous positive
pressure level with or without pressure support
Paw Spontaneous breathing with pressure

support PS
rise rise
PEEP
t
Flow
Inspiratory termination criterion Insp. term.
209
When the pressure support is not switched on, the The proportion of the maximum inspiratory flow can
patient's spontaneous breathing is merely be adjusted using the Insp. term. setting. If the
supported by an increased PEEP. Insp. term. setting is not configured, this proportion
inspiratory effort of the patient that meets the trigger The pressure support is also terminated as soon as
criteria triggers a pressure-supported breath. The the duration of the support has reached the
time, number, and duration of pressure-supported maximum inspiratory time. For intubated patients,
breaths is determined by the patient's spontaneous the maximum inspiratory time is limited to
breathing. 4 seconds in the Adult patient category and to
1.5 seconds in the Ped. pat. patient category. For
the Neo. patient category, the maximum inspiratory
time can be set with Timax to a maximum of
1.5 seconds. In non-invasive ventilation, the
maximum duration of support can be set with
Timax.
Psupp is determined by the Slope setting. In the Neo. patient category, this mode is not

SPN-CPAP/VS
Spontaneous-Continuous Positive Airway

Pressure/Volume Support
pressure level with or without volume support
Paw
PEEP
t
Flow
210
For volume support VS, every inspiratory effort by time can be set with Timax to a maximum of
the patient on the PEEP level that meets the trigger 1.5 seconds. In non-invasive ventilation, the
criteria triggers a volume-supported breath. By maximum duration of support for the Adult and
setting the trigger level, the patient's inspiratory Ped. pat. patient categories can be set with Timax.
efforts are synchronized. The time, number and
duration of volume-supported breaths is
The pressure rise is determined by the Slope The set tidal volume of the supported breaths is
setting. reached through the automatically controlled
pressure level of the volume support. With volume
The volume support is terminated as soon as the
support, the support pressure is automatically
adjusted to changes in lung conditions (resistance
the maximum inspiratory flow. The proportion of the
and compliance) and to the spontaneous breathing
maximum inspiratory flow can be adjusted using
demand of the patient.
the Insp. term. setting. If the Insp. term. setting is
not configured, this proportion is 25 % in the Adult If Paw high is linked to the Pmax therapy
patient category and 15 % in the Ped. pat. and control, set the maximum pressure that can be
Neo. patient categories. applied with the Pmax setting!
The volume support is also terminated as soon as If Paw high is not linked to the Pmax therapy
the duration of the support has reached the control, always set the Paw high alarm limit so
maximum inspiratory time. For intubated patients, that Evita V300 generates an alarm in the event
the maximum inspiratory time is limited to of an increase in airway pressure due to
4 seconds in the Adult patient category and to reduced compliance. The maximum pressure
1.5 seconds in the Ped. pat. patient category. For that can be applied is limited to 5 mbar
the Neo. patient category, the maximum inspiratory (5 cmH2O) below the upper alarm limit.

SPN-CPAP
Spontaneous-Continuous Positive Airway Pressure

pressure level in the application mode NIV
Paw
PEEP
t
Flow
354
The SPN-CPAP ventilation mode is only available
with non-invasive ventilation in the Neo. patient
category.
The patient's spontaneous breathing is supported
with an increased PEEP.
For the Manual inspiration/hold maneuver, the
pressure of the breath is set with the PmanInsp
therapy control and the duration of the breath is set
with the TmanInsp therapy control.

SPN-PPS
Spontaneous-Proportional Pressure Support

Spontaneous breathing with flow- and volume-
proportional pressure support
Flow Assist: Pressure curve proportional to flow

Flow
VT
t
Paw
PEEP
Inspiration Expiration t
Vol. Assist: Inspiratory pressure curve proportional to tidal volume VT

Flow
VT
t
Paw
PEEP
Inspiration Expiration t
224
In ventilation mode SPN-PPS, Evita V300 supports The degree of support in PPS mode can be set
the patient's spontaneous breathing in proportion to separately according to the resistive and elastic
the inspiratory effort. If the patient breathes components. Using the resistive proportion Flow
strongly, Evita V300 supports this effort with high Assist, the user defines how much of the resistive
pressure support. If the patient has shallow work of breathing is taken over by Evita V300.
breathing, Evita V300 reacts with low pressure Using the elastic proportion Vol. Assist, the user
support. Mechanical support is omitted altogether if defines how much of the elastic work of breathing
there is no spontaneous breathing. Monitoring of is taken over by Evita V300. This support is only
apnea and minute volume must therefore be set effective during inspiration.
appropriately.


the maximum inspiratory flow. The proportion of the
maximum inspiratory flow can be adjusted using
the Insp. term. setting.
If the Insp. term. setting is not configured, this
proportion is 25 % in the Adult patient category and
15 % in the Ped. pat. and Neo. patient categories.
1.5 seconds in the Ped. pat. patient category. For
the Neo. patient category, the maximum inspiratory
time can be set with Timax to a maximum of
1.5 seconds. In non-invasive ventilation, the
maximum duration of support for the Adult and
Ped. pat. patient categories can be set with Timax.
If Paw high is linked to the Pmax therapy
control, set the maximum pressure that can be
applied with the Pmax setting!
If Paw high is not linked to the Pmax therapy
control, always set the Paw high alarm limit so
that Evita V300 generates an alarm in the event
of an increase in airway pressure due to
reduced compliance. The maximum pressure
that can be applied is limited to 5 mbar
(5 cmH2O) below the upper alarm limit.
Always set the alarm limit VT high in order to
generate an alarm in the event of an increase in
airway pressure and tidal volume resulting from
excessive support.

Additional settings for ventilation
Apnea Ventilation
Apnea ventilation in the Adult and Ped. pat.

patient categories
For switching over automatically to volume-
controlled mandatory ventilation in case of apnea.
Paw
Start Apnea Ventilation
Spontaneous breathing
with pressure support
PEEP
t
Apnea alarm 1
time Tapn RRapn
Flow
222
If the patient is ventilated using a volume-controlled time for apnea ventilation is determined from the
mode without AutoFlow, apnea ventilation is also set apnea respiratory rate RRapn and a fixed I:E
volume-controlled without AutoFlow. In all other ratio of 1:2.
cases, apnea ventilation is volume-controlled with
The patient can breathe spontaneously and the
AutoFlow.
mandatory breaths are synchronized with the
For Evita V300 to be able to detect an apnea, flow patient's spontaneous breathing. The apnea
measurement must function and the flow ventilation respiratory rate RRapn remains
monitoring must be activated. constant. Evita V300 provides synchronized
intermittent mandatory ventilation.
Evita V300 detects an apnea when no expiratory
flow is measured or insufficient inspiratory gas is Apnea ventilation is terminated by touching the
delivered during the set apnea alarm time Tapn. If Apn. Vent. reset button. Evita V300 continues
apnea ventilation is activated, the device starts ventilating in the previously set ventilation mode.
volume-controlled ventilation with the ventilation Changing the ventilation mode or the additional
parameters RRapn and VTapn. The inspiratory settings, e.g., PS, also terminates apnea
ventilation.

If an apnea situation generating an alarm occurs

again during apnea ventilation, this indicates that
the apnea ventilation respiratory rate RRapn has
been set too low in relation to apnea alarm time
Tapn.
Apnea ventilation in the Neo. patient category

For switching over automatically to volume-
guaranteed mandatory ventilation in case of apnea.
Paw
Start Apnea Ventilation
Spontaneous breathing
with pressure support
PEEP
t
Apnea alarm time 1
Tapn RRapn
Flow
317
For Evita V300 to be able to detect an apnea, flow ventilation respiratory rate RRapn remains
measurement with the neonatal flow sensor must constant. Evita V300 provides synchronized
function and flow monitoring with the neonatal flow intermittent mandatory ventilation.
sensor must be activated.
Apnea ventilation is terminated by touching the
Evita V300 detects an apnea when no expiratory Apn. Vent. reset button. Evita V300 continues
flow is measured or insufficient inspiratory gas is ventilating in the previously set ventilation mode.
delivered during the set apnea alarm time Tapn. If Changing the ventilation mode or the additional
apnea ventilation is activated, the device starts settings, e.g., PS, also terminates apnea
volume-guaranteed ventilation with the ventilation ventilation.
parameters RRapn and VTapn. The inspiratory
If an apnea situation generating an alarm occurs
time for apnea ventilation is determined from the
again during apnea ventilation, this indicates that
set apnea respiratory rate RRapn and a fixed I:E
the apnea ventilation respiratory rate RRapn has
ratio of 1:2.
been set too low in relation to apnea alarm time
The patient can breathe spontaneously and the Tapn.
mandatory breaths are synchronized with the
patient's spontaneous breathing. The apnea

Automatic return from apnea ventilation

If the Automatic return from Apnea Ventilation
function is configured, then the device
automatically switches to the previous ventilation
mode when sufficient spontaneous breathing is
resumed. The following conditions must be met:
– Apnea ventilation must have been active for at
least 2 minutes.
– The alarm message MV low is not active.
– One of the following conditions must
additionally be met:
– The ratio of MVespon to MVe is greater than
25 % and the ratio of MVleak to MVe is less
than 40 %.
Or
– 80 % of the mandatory breaths are triggered
spontaneously.
If apnea reoccurs within 3 minutes following
automatic termination of apnea ventilation in the
Adult and Ped. pat. patient categories, the
Automatic return from Apnea Ventilation
function is disabled until apnea ventilation is
terminated manually or another ventilation mode is
selected.
For configuration of the Automatic return from
Apnea Ventilation function, see "Configuring
general settings" on page 194.

Flow trigger
The flow trigger is used to synchronize mandatory

breaths with spontaneous breathing. The flow
trigger is also used to trigger breaths with SPN-
CPAP/PS and SPN-CPAP/VS.
Paw
Spontaneous
breathing
PEEP
Flow
Trigger threshold
t
230
With the Flow trigger threshold, the mandatory
breaths are synchronized with the inspiratory
efforts. The start setting of the flow trigger can be
configured on the page System setup >
Ventilation > Start settings > VT, RR, Trigger
page.
Spontaneous breathing activity by the patient is
indicated on the screen by the brief appearance of
the symbol.
In order to prevent a possible error when
measuring the respiratory rate, e.g., caused by
cardiogenic oscillations, only those spontaneous
breaths are counted which meet the adjustable
trigger criterion.

Inspiratory termination
Paw
t
Start of inspiration End of inspiration
Flow

t
228
For spontaneous breaths supported with PS, VS
and PPS, the length of inspiration is determined by
the inspiratory termination criterion. Inspiratory
termination specifies at which percentage of the
peak inspiratory flow Insp. term. expiration is to
start.
The standard setting is 25 % in the Adult patient
category and 15 % in the Ped. pat. and Neo.
patient categories.
The termination criterion can be configured on the
System setup > Ventilation > Start settings >
Other settings page.
When configured, the inspiratory termination can
be set with the Insp. term. therapy control in order
to achieve better adaptation to the patient's lung
properties and breathing pattern.

Sigh
Paw Interval sigh

Cycles sigh
intPEEP
PEEP
220
Atelectasis can be prevented by activating the sigh
function and setting the sigh in the form of an
intermittent PEEP. The purpose of expiratory sigh
is to open collapsed areas of the lungs or to keep
open "more dependent" areas of the lungs.
The sigh function can be activated in all ventilation
modes with mandatory breaths, except for PC-
APRV. When the sigh function is activated, the end-
expiratory pressure PEEP increases by the set
value of the intermittent PEEP.
The time between the two sigh phases can be set
with the Interval sigh therapy control.
The Cycles sigh therapy control controls how
many respiratory cycles are covered by the sigh
phase. The average airway pressure is higher, and
a longer filling time is normally available.
In pressure-controlled ventilation, the inspiratory
pressures Pinsp, Psupp increase by the amount
intPEEP.

AutoFlow/Volume Guarantee
Paw
Paw high
Pinsp = f (VT, C)
PEEP
t
Ti Te
1
Flow RR
VT

breathing
225
Evita V300 provides ventilation with If the Paw high alarm limit is linked to the Pmax
AutoFlow/Volume Guarantee with a decreasing therapy control, the user can adjust the maximum
flow in order to avoid pressure peaks. Evita V300 value for the airway pressure. Since the value set
determines the pressure required for the set tidal for Pmax may be reached in this case with
volume, with consideration of the lung conditions AutoFlow/Volume Guarantee, the current
(compliance, resistance) and the patient’s condition of the patient must always be taken into
spontaneous breathing demand. consideration when setting the value, in order to
exclude the possibility of causing harm if the airway
When the patient breathes in, Evita V300 delivers
pressure is too high.
an additional inspiratory flow limited by the VT high
alarm limit. The patient can also breathe out during The minimum inspiratory pressure for mandatory
the inspiratory plateau phase. The VT high alarm non-triggered breaths is 3 mbar (3 cmH2O) above
limit must be set with care to prevent, for example, PEEP; for triggered mandatory and spontaneous
overdistention of the lungs following rapid changes breaths it is 0.1 mbar (0.1 cmH2O) above PEEP.
in compliance.
Typically, the selected inspiratory time Ti is much
The inspiratory pressure is limited by the Paw high longer than the lung filling time. The inspiratory
alarm limit. The maximum applied pressure is pressure Pinsp corresponds to the minimum value
limited to 5 mbar (5 cmH2O) below the upper calculated from the tidal volume VT and
pressure limit Paw high. Always set this alarm limit compliance C of the lungs. The inspiratory flow is
in order to generate an alarm in the event of an automatically controlled so that there is no pressure
increase in airway pressure due to reduced peaks caused by the resistances of the tube and
compliance. the airways. With AutoFlow/Volume Guarantee,
changes in inspiratory flow occur in steps of max.
3 mbar (3 cmH2O) from breath to breath.

If the tidal volume VT is reached (inspiratory flow = A set inspiratory time Ti shorter than the lung filling
0) before the inspiratory time Ti has fully elapsed, time can be recognized from the flow curve. The
the control system for the inspiratory and expiratory flow at the end of the inspiratory time has not
valves ensures that the patient can breathe in and dropped to zero. In this case, it must be decided
out during the remaining inspiratory time, even whether the current condition of the patient permits
during the constant pressure plateau Pplat. If the prolongation of the inspiratory time Ti in order to
patient breathes in or out during mandatory reduce peak pressure even further. This effect can
inspiration, the inspiratory pressure does not also be caused during ventilation, e.g., due to a
fluctuate during that breath. Only the inspiratory build-up of secretion. In this situation, the pressure
and expiratory flow are adapted to the patient’s is limited by Evita V300 as described. If the set tidal
demand. The applied tidal volume VT may deviate volume VT can no longer be fully applied as a
from the set tidal volume VT in individual breaths. result, the low-priority alarm message Pressure
However, as an average over time, a constant tidal limited is generated.
volume VT is supplied.
The pressure rise from the PEEP level to the
Exceeding the tidal volume VT can be limited by the inspiratory level can be even more closely adapted
VT high alarm limit. If the set alarm limit is to the needs of the patient by adjusting the pressure
exceeded once, Evita V300 generates a low priority rise time Slope.
alarm message (!). If it is exceeded three times in
If the AutoFlow/Volume Guarantee function in the
succession, Evita V300 generates a medium
Ped. pat. and Neo. patient categories is switched
priority alarm message (!!). Tidal volume is actively
on and a manual inspiration (Man. insp./hold) is
limited to the value of the VT high alarm limit by
triggered, a breath is applied to the maximum
switching to PEEP level.
pressure Pmax.
Regardless of the VT high alarm limit setting,
Evita V300 triggers an extended breath or extends
Evita V300 ends an AutoFlow/Volume Guarantee
an already triggered mandatory breath.
breath when the supplied inspiratory volume
(minus the volume supplied for breathing circuit
compliance compensation) exceeds the set volume
by 100 %. This may occur in the event of a major
leakage. In this case, Evita V300 generates the low
priority alarm message VT not reached, leakage.
Set the MV high and MV low alarm limits
appropriately in order to avoid excessive or
insufficient flow following rapid changes in
compliance. When using AutoFlow/Volume
Guarantee, activate flow monitoring!

Start-up procedure with AutoFlow/Volume

Guarantee
When the AutoFlow/Volume Guarantee function is
switched on, Evita V300 applies the set tidal
volume VT by means of a volume-controlled breath
with minimum inspiratory flow and subsequent
inspiratory pause. The plateau pressure calculated
for this breath serves as the startup value for
inspiratory pressure under AutoFlow/Volume
Guarantee. If an appropriate pressure cannot be
calculated for this breath or the volume cannot be
applied, Evita V300 applies a pressure-controlled
breath with an inspiratory pressure of 5 mbar
(5 cmH2O) above the set PEEP. Evita V300
measures the applied volume in this case and
calculates an initial target pressure for the set
volume. The next mandatory breath is applied with
an inspiratory pressure that corresponds to 75 % of
this target pressure. Evita V300 measures the
applied volume again and calculates a new target
pressure for the set volume. The next mandatory
breath is applied with this target pressure. As
described above, the following mandatory breaths
are changed in the inspiratory pressure so that the
set volume is reached on average.

ATC
Automatic Tube Compensation

Compensation of the tube resistance
Paw
Pressure at Y-piece
Ptrach
Tracheal pressure
PEEP
t
Flow
226
ATC regulates the airway pressure to the tracheal Calculating tracheal pressure
level. This function calculates and displays the
Evita V300 calculates tracheal pressure on the
tracheal pressure on the basis of a mathematical
basis of a square function of tube resistance and
tube model, the set tube type and the inner
patient flow.
diameter of the tube.
When tube compensation is activated, Evita V300 PTrachea = Paw – KTube x Flow x Flow x |Flow|
displays the calculated tracheal pressure in the PTrachea: Pressure in the trachea
pressure curve together with the pressure at the
Y-piece as a line. Activated tube compensation is Paw: Pressure at the Y-piece of the breathing
indicated by ATC and the tube diameter in the circuit
screen header bar. KTube: Tube coefficient (see page 347)
When selecting loops, tracheal pressure can also Flow: Patient flow
be selected as a parameter. Tracheal pressure can
also be displayed when tube compensation is Inspiration: Flow >0
deactivated if the calculation of the tracheal Expiration: Flow <0
pressure was activated on the Start/Standby >
Tube/NIV page and the tube type and diameter The selected tube type and the inner diameter of
were entered. Evita V300 uses this value for the tube must correspond with the real tube for
calculating leakage and determining the lung correct calculation and display of the tracheal
mechanics, but not for tube compensation. The pressure. This is required for correct tube
selected degree of compensation is not considered compensation.
when displaying tracheal pressure or when
determining leakage and lung mechanics.

When tube compensation is activated, the If the value selected for Paw high or Pmax is too
ventilation pressure in the breathing circuit is low, it may impair the effectiveness of tube
increased during inspiration or decreased during compensation. If the value selected for Paw high
expiration. The airway pressure is adjusted to the or Pmax is too high, it may result in unwanted high
tracheal level if 100 % compensation of the tube airway pressures. When setting Pmax, be aware
resistance has been selected. that this value may actually be reached in contrast
to the value for Paw high.
Expiratory tube compensation can be deactivated.
In volume-controlled ventilation modes with a
Calculating the support
constant inspiratory flow (VC-CMV, VC-SIMV,
VC-MMV, VC-AC) tube compensation is only active The level of support Paw applied during ATC is
during the expiration and spontaneous breathing calculated on the basis of a square law function of
phases. tube resistance and patient flow.
For the mandatory portion of the breath, the Paw = Comp. x KTube x Flow x Flow x |Flow|
inspiratory tube compensation can be deactivated.
Comp.: Degree of compensation 0 to 100 %
When tube compensation is activated, Evita V300
controls the ventilation pressure so that the KTube: Tube coefficient (see page 347)
resistive work of breathing on the tube is Flow: Patient flow
compensated in accordance with the selected
degree of compensation.
Tube coefficient
Depending on the direction of the patient flow, the
airway pressure is increased during inspiration or The tube coefficient KTube is largely determined on
decreased during expiration. the basis of the results obtained by Guttmann et al*.
The airway pressure can be reduced to a minimum The tube coefficient KTube for the full-length tube is
of 0 mbar (0 cmH2O). always taken as the basis. The effect of the
shortened length is negligible.
The maximum value for the airway pressure can be
set using the Pmax therapy control. If Pmax is not The values for the tube coefficients are shown in
linked to the Paw high alarm limit, the maximum the following tables.
pressure is limited to 5 mbar (5 cmH2O) below the
Paw high alarm limit. The pressure limitation
message is displayed when the maximum
permitted values are reached.
* Literature reference [5], see page 374

Table for endotracheal tube: Table for tracheostomy tube:
Inner diameter of the Tube coefficient Inner diameter of the Tube coefficient
tube (mm) KTube (mbar/L2/s2) tube (mm) KTube (mbar/L2/s2)
2.00 1834.00 2.50 600.00
2.50 600.00 3.00 340.00
3.00 340.00 3.50 170.00
3.50 170.00 4.00 100.00
4.00 100.00 4.50 50.00
4.50 50.00 5.00 30.96
5.00 30.96 5.50 15.40
5.50 23.70 6.00 10.00
6.00 17.21 6.50 7.90
6.50 13.05 7.00 6.38
7.00 10.56 7.50 5.20
7.50 8.41 8.00 4.50
8.00 6.57 8.50 3.70
8.50 5.17 9.00 2.95
9.00 4.29 9.50 2.65
9.50 3.80 10.00 2.50
10.00 3.50 10.50 2.05
10.50 3.00 11.00 1.65
11.00 2.50 11.50 1.35
11.50 2.00 12.00 1.10
12.00 1.50

AutoRelease
Paw
Start of Start of t
Flow exp. insp.
t
AutoRelease Exp. term.
229
In ventilation mode PC-APRV, the duration of
pressure release is determined from the expiratory
flow curve when AutoRelease is activated. The
Exp. term. setting specifies when the ventilation
returns to the pressure level Phigh dependent on
the decline in percent of the peak expiratory flow.
The Tlow max therapy control limits the maximum
duration of pressure release.
When AutoRelease is switched on, the change-
over from the upper pressure level Phigh to the
lower pressure level Plow is synchronized with the
patient's spontaneous breathing.
Synchronization of the mandatory breath reduces
the effective time of the upper pressure level.
Evita V300 prolongs the subsequent ventilation
time on the upper pressure level by the missing
time. This prevents an increase of the respiratory
rate resulting from the settings.

Special functions
Medication nebulization constant minute volume. The medication nebulizer

is supplied with compressed air, O2 or a mixture of
compressed air and O2 by Evita V300, depending
Insp. O2 concentration during medication on the set O2 concentration.
nebulization
In the Ped. pat. and Neo. patient categories, the
Use only medication nebulizer 8412935 (white medication nebulizer nebulizes continuously. The
central section core). If other medication nebulizers aerosol generated during expiration does not reach
are used, considerable deviations may occur in the the lungs, however. The medication nebulizer is
tidal volume and the inspiratory O2 concentration! supplied with compressed air, O2 or a mixture of
To minimize the deviation from the set O2 compressed air and O2 by Evita V300, depending
concentration, Evita V300 uses a gas mixture to on the set O2 concentration.
drive the medication nebulizer. The gas mixture is The graph shows the possible deviations in the
generated by switching over between compressed applied O2 concentration as a function of the set
air and O2 in short time intervals. FiO2 concentration with a minimal inspiratory flow
In the Adult patient category, Evita V300 (14 L/min) in the Adult patient category and at
synchronizes application of the medication aerosol respiratory rates above 12/min in the Ped. pat. and
with the inspiratory flow phase and maintains a Neo. patient categories.
Applied O2 concentration FiO2 in Vol%
Set O2 concentration FiO2 in Vol%

221

Air supply from the GS500 gas supply unit

If Evita V300 is supplied with Air from the GS500
gas supply unit and O2 is supplied from the central
gas supply system, the medication nebulizer
operates with O2 only. The measured value FiO2
indicates the O2 concentration of the gas supplied
at the inspiratory port and not the O2 concentration
reaching the patient. Depending on the patient
category, the following systematic deviations are
possible:
Adult up to +32 Vol%

Ped. pat. up to +40 Vol%
Neo. up to +40 Vol%

Diagnostics – measurement maneuver
Occlusion pressure – P0.1
Inspiratory valve closed

Paw
100 ms Inspiratory valve opens

PEEP
–0.5 mbar t
(–0.5 cmH2O) P1
P0.1
P2
227
Respiratory drive can be measured at the start of Evita V300 keeps the inspiratory valve closed after
inspiration by measuring the mouth pressure during one expiration and measures the airway pressure
a short term occlusion. Within the first 100 ms, the produced by the patient's inspiratory effort during
pressure is not influenced by physiological 100 ms. The 100 ms time interval starts when a
reactions that would try to compensate for the negative pressure of –0.5 mbar (–0.5 cmH2O)
occlusion (e.g., reflexive interruption of breathing or below PEEP/CPAP is measured during the
increased respiratory drive). In principle, this inspiratory effort. The second pressure value is
pressure is also independent of the muscle determined after 100 ms. Simultaneously, the
strength of the diaphragm. Therefore, the negative inspiratory valve is opened. The patient can
mouth pressure P0.1 after 0.1 seconds is a direct breathe normally again. The occlusion pressure
measure of neuromuscular respiratory drive*. P0.1 is the difference between the pressure values
Evita V300 displays the value for the measured "P2 – P1".
pressure difference without a negative sign. For
patients with healthy lungs and regular breathing,
P0.1 will be about 3 to 4 mbar (3 to 4 cmH2O). A
high P0.1 value signifies a high respiratory drive,
which can only be maintained for a limited period of
time. P0.1 values above 6 mbar (6 cmH2O), e.g.,
for a COPD patient, indicate impending exhaustion
(RMF – respiratory muscle fatigue).
* Literature reference [6], [7], see page 374

Intrinsic PEEP – PEEPi
Paw Insp. and exp. valve

closed Exp. Valve opens
PEEPi
PEEP
Measur-
ing inter- Measur-
Flow ing inter-
val 1
val 2
t
Vtrap
219
Intrinsic PEEP is the actual end-expiratory Measuring interval 1 is terminated:
pressure inside the lungs. Owing to dynamic – when no pressure changes are detected any
influences of the lung mechanics (resistance, longer, but at the earliest after 0.5 seconds,
compliance, closing volume) and the ventilation – at the latest after 3 seconds in the Adult patient
setting parameters, the Intrinsic PEEP may deviate category and after 1.5 seconds in the Ped. pat.
from the PEEP in the upper airways. patient category
This measurement maneuver also measures the The start value corresponds to PEEP and the value
"trapped" volume Vtrap in the lungs, which does at the end of the closed phase is the Intrinsic PEEP.
not participate in gas exchange. At the end of measuring interval 1, Evita V300
opens the expiratory valve and measures the
The Intrinsic PEEP is measured in two phases.
expiratory flow generated by Intrinsic PEEP during
Evita V300 keeps the inspiratory and expiratory
measuring interval 2. During this period, lung
valves closed during measuring interval 1. This
pressure is allowed to decrease to PEEP level.
ensures that it is impossible for inspiratory gas to
flow into the breathing circuit or for gas to escape Measuring interval 2 is terminated:
from it. During this closed phase, pressure is – when the expiratory flow has returned to 0, but
equalized between the lungs and the circuit after 0.5 seconds at the earliest,
system. Evita V300 measures the pressure over – at the latest after 7 seconds in the Adult patient
time. category and after 3.5 seconds in the Ped. pat.
patient category
The integrated flow corresponds to the air volume
trapped in the lungs Vtrap by Intrinsic PEEP.

Measuring times of the measuring interval 1 for Influence of spontaneous breathing on

Intrinsic PEEP: resistance and compliance values
– Adult patient category: max. 3 seconds
Spontaneous breathing influences the compliance
– Ped. pat. patient category: max. 1.5 seconds
Cdyn and resistance R values as follows:
Measuring times of the measuring interval 2 for
– Trigger activity
Vtrap:
The trigger activity is filtered out of the
– Adult patient category: max. 7 seconds
calculation and has virtually no influence on
– Ped. pat. patient category: max. 3.5 seconds
Cdyn and R.
– Patient breathing synchronously with the
Negative Inspiratory Force – NIF
ventilator
The Negative Inspiratory Force Index (NIF)* – Cdyn becomes incorrectly high
measures a patient's maximum inspiratory effort – R becomes incorrectly low
after exhaling. The breathing circuit is closed during
Changes in the values indicate to what extent
measurement of NIF. The NIF value is also known
the patient is able to perform work of breathing
as the Maximum Inspiratory Pressure (MIP). As a
and determine ventilation.
result of the inspiratory effort during manually
extended expiration, the patient generates a The trend display provides information on
negative pressure in relation to PEEP. The progress.
probability that the patient can be weaned
– Patient breathing synchronously against the
successfully increases with the magnitude of this
ventilator
negative pressure. Patients reaching a NIF value of
– Cdyn becomes incorrectly low
less than –30 mbar (–30 cmH2O) can in all
– R becomes incorrectly high
probability be weaned successfully. Weaning of
patients with a NIF value not below –20 mbar – Purely spontaneous breathing
(–20 cmH2O) will most likely prove unsuccessful. In the case of purely spontaneous breathing, no
information on Cdyn and R is available.
Evita V300 determines the NIF value during
manually extended expiration. The breathing circuit
closes following an expiration by the patient while
the Exp. hold button remains pressed. Evita V300
then measures the maximum inspiratory effort
made by the patient. The NIF value is measured as
a pressure relative to PEEP. The measuring
procedure is ended when the Exp. hold button is
released or after a maximum of 15 seconds.
Evita V300 displays the last measured NIF value
and the time when the measurement was made.
* Literature reference [8], [9], see page 374

C20/C
The C20/C index is a calculation of the compliance

of the last 20 % (C20) of a breath in relation to the
compliance (C) of the entire breath.
During a breath, Evita V300 determines
continuously the pressure applied and the resulting
tidal volume. The compliance of the last 20 % of a
breath determined in this manner is set in
proportion to the total compliance.
From the ratio determined, the following
information can be derived:
– C20/C <1: A decrease of compliance at the end
of the breath was detected. The lungs may be
overinflated.
– C20/C >1: An increase of compliance at the end
of the breath was detected. Tidal recruitment
may be occurring.
– C20/C = 1: No change in compliance at the end
of a breath could be detected. The lungs may
not be overinflated, or tidal recruitment may not
be occurring.
The calculation of C20/C takes into account the
effect of the resistance of the endotracheal tube
used or the tracheostomy tube used. For this, the
tube diameter is required. The correct tube
diameter entry of the tube used determines the
quality of the C20/C index calculated.
The C20/C index is always displayed as long as a
correction delivers plausible results with regard to
the resistance. If, for instance, a smaller tube
diameter was entered than that of the tube actually
used, a correction to the measured values may
deliver an implausible result. In this case, no C20/C
index is displayed. The parameter field remains
empty.

Smart Pulmonary View The ratio between spontaneous breathing and

mandatory ventilation is displayed in a diagram:
Graphic display of lung characteristics – RRspon and VTspon represent the
Smart Pulmonary View is a graphic display of lung spontaneous minute volume as an area
flexibility (compliance) and resistance of the – RRmand and VTmand represent the
airways (resistance). mandatory minute volume as an area
The representation corresponds to the displayed The display is a qualitative representation of the
measured values of the respective patient. respective minute volume.
The display range of compliance is 0 to From this, the following information can be derived:
400 mL/mbar (400 mL/cmH2O).
– The ratio between the spontaneous and
The display range of resistance is 0 to 300 mbar/L/s mandatory minute volumes
(300 cmH2O/L/s).
– The quality and pattern of the spontaneous
To detect an improvement or deterioration of the breathing, e.g., Rapid Shallow Breathing
patient's condition with regard to compliance and
resistance, it is possible to adapt the representation Smart Pulmonary View is a qualitative
to the current values of the patient. One measuring representation of the ventilation situation. Local
range starts at 0 and goes to double the value of the pathophysiological peculiarities, such as
current compliance; the other measuring range atelectasis or airway obstructions of the lungs,
starts at 0 and goes to double the value of the cannot be displayed.
current resistance. After the adaptation, the Furthermore, individual patient situations cannot be
measuring values determined are displayed as displayed, such as the condition after a
reference values with the time and date. In the pneumectomy or a diaphragmatic hernia.
graph, the current values (calibration values) are
displayed as an orange broken line. The scales for
compliance and resistance are adapted.
The compliance and resistance measured
respectively are displayed by thin or thick lines
accordingly.
The point when the maximum value that is based
on the last calibration is reached is represented
with a red line as a boundary. This indicates that the
measured values determined can no longer be
represented graphically. The measured values are
outside the display range. Evita V300 displays a
request for a new calibration.
The diaphragm is displayed schematically
underneath the representation of the lungs. The
movement of the diaphragm indicates
synchronized mandatory breaths, supported
(triggered) breaths, or spontaneous breaths.

Description of the therapy types
O2 therapy In the Neo. patient category, only the SPN-CPAP or

PC-CMV ventilation modes may be selected. When
O2 therapy can be used for patients with using prongs or a mask, the neonatal flow sensor
independent breathing. The continuous flow is must be removed from the breathing circuit.
applied via an oxygen mask, a hood, or nasal Evita V300 switches off flow monitoring with the
cannula. The O2 concentration and the flow can be neonatal flow sensor.
set.
NIV – Non-invasive ventilation
Non-invasive ventilation by mask for patients with

spontaneous breathing
Leakages are greater with non-invasive ventilation
than with invasive ventilation. Evita V300 takes into
account the leakages in the NIV application mode
accordingly. The inspiratory trigger and the
termination criterion are automatically adapted to
the measured leakage. This prevents auto-
triggering due to a flow trigger which has been set
too low and extended inspirations as well as
insufficient inspiration due to a termination criterion
which has been set too high.
The inspiratory tidal volume is typically far higher
than the patient’s tidal volume. The expiratory tidal
volume is slightly lower than the patient’s tidal
volume. The measured values for tidal volume are
leakage-corrected and indicate the patient's actual
tidal volume. In the ventilation modes with
AutoFlow and Volume Guarantee, the corrected
measured values are set when leakage
compensation is selected. During volume-
controlled ventilation, the inspiratory volume
escaping through the leak is additionally supplied.
The VT low, VT high, MV low and Tapn alarm
limits can be deactivated in the NIV application
mode. The Tdisconnect setting can be used to
delay the Airway pressure low alarm.

Automatic leakage compensation
Mode of operation Example of leakage compensation during

volume-controlled ventilation
Evita V300 determines the difference between the
delivered inspiratory flow and the measured The mode of operation is illustrated using a
expiratory flow. This difference provides a measure simplified example with the following values:
of the amount of leakage and is displayed by – Set tidal volume VT = 500 mL
Evita V300 as the leakage minute volume MVleak – 10 % tube leak
and relatively as % leak (MVleak to MVi).
Mode of operation without leakage compensation:
The calculation of leakage compensation takes into Evita V300 delivers 500 mL. This is displayed as
account the airway pressures. A higher percentage the inspiratory tidal volume VTi. 50 mL escape as
of volume is lost on the inspiratory side than on the leakage during inspiration. 450 mL reach the lungs.
expiratory side because the pressure during 450 mL are expired, of which 45 mL again escape
inspiration is higher. The displayed leakage minute as leakage. 405 mL are measured on the
volume MVleak is based on the mean pressure expiratory side and indicated as VTe.
Pmean. The leakage minute volume MVleak also As a result, an inspiratory minute volume of
takes the inspiratory leakages into account. Due to 5.0 L/min will be delivered at a respiratory rate of
technical tolerances, a small leakage minute 10/min and an expiratory minute volume of
volume may be displayed even in the case of a 4.05 L/min will be measured. The lungs are
leak-free breathing circuit. If there is a rapid change ventilated with a minute volume of 4.5 L/min.
in the leakage, e.g., due to the leak being opened Without leakage compensation, the VT therapy
or closed suddenly, Evita V300 needs a few control determines the volume supplied by
breaths to identify the new leakage value. Evita V300.
Evita V300 prevents any potentially dangerous
Mode of operation with leakage compensation:
rises in pressure which might occur as a result of
With automatic leakage compensation, Evita V300
this.
delivers 550 mL on the basis of the measured
During volume-controlled ventilation, without leakage minute volume instead of a tidal volume of
AutoFlow, Evita V300 supplies additional volume in 500 mL. 500 mL enter the lungs and the inspiratory
order to compensate the leakage. Unlimited tidal volume is 500 mL. This value is displayed as
volume compensation is, however, inappropriate. the inspiratory tidal volume VT.
Evita V300 compensates for volume losses of up to The volume measured on the expiratory side is
100 % of the set tidal volume VT. displayed without compensation, even when
leakage compensation is activated, and is therefore
Volume and flow values are displayed leakage-
450 mL. The minute volume measured on the
compensated with the exception of the expiratory
expiratory side is 4.5 L/min and is also displayed
minute volume measured and all measured values
uncompensated. Otherwise, expiratory leakage
which are explicitly marked as inspiratory or
compensation might block a low minute volume
expiratory, such as VTi and VTe.
alarm. Evita V300 is intended to always generate
The inspiratory flow trigger threshold and the an alarm in the event of an excessively low minute
inspiratory termination criterion are applied to the volume.
leakage-compensated flow, with both settings With leakage compensation, the VT therapy control
being continuously optimized with regards to the determines the volume to be delivered to the
leakage. patient.

Example of leakage compensation with Example of leakage compensation with flow

AutoFlow or Volume Guarantee trigger or inspiratory termination criterion
The mode of operation is illustrated using a The mode of operation is illustrated using a
simplified example with the following values: simplified example with the following values:
– Set tidal volume VT = 500 mL – Flow trigger setting 2 L/min
– 10 % leakage – Leakage increases from 0 % to 20 %
Mode of operation without leakage compensation: Mode of operation without leakage compensation:
Evita V300 selects the inspiratory pressure so that If the leakage flow is above the flow trigger
VTi = 500 mL is delivered during inspiration. The threshold, the user must increase the flow trigger
patient only receives 450 mL. threshold in order to avoid auto-triggering. If the
leakage is reduced, the user must increase the
Mode of operation with leakage compensation:
sensitivity of the flow trigger again. The same
Evita V300 selects the inspiratory pressure so that
applies to the inspiratory termination criterion in
the leakage-corrected VT delivered to the patient is
specific ventilation modes.
500 mL. The inspiratory tidal volume is
correspondingly higher. Mode of operation with leakage compensation:
Evita V300 determines the leakage flow. The
leakage flow is subtracted from the total flow in
order to determine the patient flow. Only this flow is
used for the flow trigger or the inspiratory
termination criterion. After a few breaths
Evita V300 "learns" the leakage and avoids auto-
triggering. If the leakage is closed, the sensitivity of
the flow trigger is automatically increased again.
The same applies to the inspiratory termination
criterion (if configured) for breaths with pressure
support or volume support.
Flow reduction Anti Air Shower
When the Anti Air Shower function is activated

and a disconnection is detected during ventilation,
the flow is reduced until reconnection is detected.
Simultaneously, the Disconnection? alarm is
displayed. With non-invasive ventilation, the time
before the alarm is triggered can be delayed with
Tdisconnect. The minute ventilation can be
reduced due to the already reduced flow.
To configure the Anti Air Shower function, see
"Configuring general settings" on page 194.

Measurements
Flow / volume measurement In addition to the influence of breathing circuit

compliance, flow/volume measurement is
Independent of whether ventilation is pressure or affected by:
volume-controlled, positive pressures are – the ambient conditions temperature and
generated both in the breathing circuit as well as in pressure
the patient's lungs. The volume delivered by the – the composition of the gas
ventilator is distributed to both the patient lungs and – leakages in the breathing circuit
the breathing circuit used between patient and Evita V300 takes these effects into account and
ventilator. This distribution occurs according to the corrects the set and measured values accordingly.
ratio of lung compliance versus breathing circuit
compliance.
Adaptation to ambient conditions
Resulting expiratory deviations for the measured
value of flow and the calculated values of minute The volume of a gas depends on the ambient
ventilation and tidal volume are minimal during conditions with regard to temperature, pressure,
ventilation in the Adult patient category. This is due and humidity. In lung physiology, reference is made
to the relatively large lung compliance compared to to the conditions inside the lungs for the values of
the considerably smaller compliance of the minute volume and tidal volume: 37 °C (99 °F)
breathing hoses. Significant differences are body temperature, pressure inside the lungs,
possible during ventilation in the Ped. pat. and 100 % relative humidity.
Neo. patient categories. As only the volume Measured values for flow and volume under these
actually entering and leaving the lungs is relevant conditions are characterized as BTPS. Medical
for the efficiency of ventilation, Evita V300 always gases from cylinders or from a central supply are
compensates for the effect of breathing circuit dry (approximately 0 % relative humidity) and are
compliance on ventilation. delivered from the ventilator at 20 °C (68 °F) and
1013 mbar (1013 cmH2O). Measured values for
Compensating for the effect of breathing circuit flow and volume under these conditions are
compliance characterized as NTPD.
During the breathing circuit check before the start of The difference between values measured as NTPD
ventilation, Evita V300 determines the compliance and BTPS is approximately 12 % at a pressure of
of the breathing hoses. It then compensates for the 1013 mbar (1013 cmH2O).
effect of this compliance on flow and volume Example: 250 mL tidal volume NTPD become
measurement during ventilation. 282 mL BTPS when warmed to 37 °C (99 °F) and
Depending on the airway pressure, Evita V300 humidified to 100 % relative humidity.
increases ventilatory volume to the same amount Evita V300 controls tidal volume in such a way that
that remains in the breathing hoses. Evita V300 the set tidal volume value is applied under BTPS
compensates hose-dependent volume losses up to conditions in the lungs.
a compliance of 4 mL/mbar in the Adult patient
category and 3 mL/mbar in the Ped. pat. and Neo.
patient categories.

Measurement principles Two different sensor types are available:

– Y-sensor, integrated in the Y-piece
– ISO sensor to insert between Y-piece and tube
Measurement principle of the flow connector
measurement
Both sensor types use the same sensor insert.
The measurement principle used for flow Despite this, the sensor properties are not identical.
measurement is based on hot-wire anemometry. The sensor type is set in the Sensors/Parameters
Hot-wire anemometry is a thermal measurement > Neonatal flow sensor dialog window in order to
procedure in which the measuring wires of the flow adapt the measurement for this type of sensor
sensor are kept at a constant excess temperature. optimally.
The higher the flow, the more current is required to
maintain a constant excess temperature. The flow
rate is calculated based on the magnitude of the O2 measurement
heating current. A heating and a temperature sensor are positioned
To ensure correct function, check for visible in a homogeneous magnetic field which is
damage, soiling, and particles before inserting the periodically activated and deactivated. The thermal
flow sensor. Repeat this check regularly. Replace conductivity of O2 changes due to the magnetic
flow sensors when damaged, soiled, or not field. The change in thermal conductivity is a
particle-free. If the measurement wires of the flow measure of the O2 concentration.
sensor glow continuously during operation, this is
an indication of contamination. Immediately CO2 measurement
reprocess or replace the flow sensor.
CO2 is measured via a mainstream system based
on absorption measurement.
Flow measurementwith expiratory flow sensor
A light source generates a spectrum. Two light
Expiratory flow is measured with a hot wire detectors record the characteristic absorption
anemometer. The flow passes through the sensor, spectrum and supply electrical signals that change
cooling the hot wire in the process. The amount of with the CO2 concentration.
energy required to maintain the hot wire at a
temperature of 130 °C (360 °F) is a measure of the These signals are then evaluated and displayed.
flow. Heating the CO2 sensor probe prevents
condensation.
Flow measurement with neonatal flow sensor

The flow is measured with a hot wire anemometer
between the Y-piece and the tube. The flow
direction is detected by the use of two hot wires,
one of which is shielded on one side.
The amount of energy required to maintain the wire
at a temperature of 400 °C (752 °F) is used as a
measure of the flow passing through the sensor,
cooling the hot wire in the process.
The lowest flow at which detection functions
reliably is 0.2 L/min. Lower flow values are
therefore suppressed and displayed as zero.

Airway pressure measurement During inspiration, the value measured by the

expiratory pressure sensor (Pexp) is raised relative
Evita V300 measures the airway pressure indirectly to the airway pressure by the amount of the
by means of two internal pressure sensors. pressure drop caused by the flow (normally
The sensors are installed in the inspiratory and Flowout  Flowbf) through the expiratory line of the
expiratory lines, thereby eliminating the need for an breathing circuit (Rexp):
external pressure measuring line between the Paw = Pexp + Rexp x Flowout
Y-piece and the device. As long as one side is
without flow, the measured value of the flowless Paw: Airway pressure at Y-piece
pressure sensor corresponds to the airway
pressure at the Y-piece. Pexp: Airway pressure in expiratory breathing
hose
In the Neo. patient category, there is a constant
Rexp: Flow resistance of the expiratory
base flow during ventilation. However, due to this
breathing hose
constant base flow, the zero-flow condition is never
attained either on the inspiratory or expiratory side. Flowout: Flow through the expiratory valve during
The pressure measured by the inspiratory pressure inspiration
sensor varies with the variations in airway pressure
but is increased by the pressure drop in the The hose resistances are determined by
inspiratory line of the breathing circuit. The Evita V300 during the breathing circuit check.
pressure measured by the expiratory pressure
sensor is reduced by the pressure drop in the
expiratory line of the breathing circuit. These
pressure differences are caused by the flow
resistance of the breathing circuit.
During expiration, the value measured at the
inspiratory pressure sensor (Pinsp) is reduced by
the pressure drop caused by the base flow (Flowbf)
in the inspiratory line of the breathing circuit (Rinsp):
Paw = Pinsp – Rinsp x Flowbf
Paw: Airway pressure at Y-piece

Pinsp: Airway pressure at the inspiratory
pressure sensor
Rinsp: Flow resistance of the inspiratory
breathing hose
Flowbf: Base flow

Battery concept
General information The battery charge indication is a relative indication

which is based on the electrochemical properties of
At the time of manufacture and delivery, batteries the battery. The battery charge indication is
have a typical capacity which is in accordance with evaluated on the basis of a battery model.
the information specified in the battery The use of a model-based indication is a state-of-
manufacturer's data sheet. The electrochemical the-art technique which finds application in many
composition of the battery is the determining factor fields, e.g., computers, mobile phones, etc.
for its total capacity. The operating time of the
batteries derived from these specifications can be The model-based indication of battery charge takes
found in the "Technical Data" chapter. account of the following information, among other
things:
NOTE – Type of battery (e.g., NiMH or VRLA)
The capacity of batteries changes with increasing – Maximum capacity on delivery (e.g., 12 Ah)
age and utilization. – Age of the battery (e.g., new or 2 years)
– Capacity spent (irreversibly lost) over the
All the following information and specifications refer utilization time (e.g., 1000 Ah)
to perfectly functioning batteries. If batteries are – Present power requirement of the device
defective or faulty, the functional integrity, e.g., (power consumption, e.g., 2.5 A)
battery charge indication or alarms, may be – Discharge mode
impaired. See chapter "Battery check" – Charging mode
on page 270.
If the power consumption changes, e.g., due to
switching to Standby, operation of a GS500, or
adjustment of the screen brightness, the remaining
Display of battery charge available operating time of the device also
changes. The battery charge indication is updated
The battery charge indication shows the available to take account of the present power requirement
battery charge determined by the electrochemical (power consumption).
processes. When the batteries are, e.g., fully
charged, this state is indicated by a corresponding In accordance with the specification, the battery
symbol. charge indication is only displayed and updated
after the device has been completely started up.
Symbol Battery charge This procedure may take a few minutes.
90 to 100 %
60 to <90 %
40 to <60 %
20 to <40 %
<20 %, flashes light and dark red in
1-second pulses.
Batteries defective or no information
available on the battery charge.

Battery ageing Aged batteries, e.g., 2 years old

The following data for minimum operating time
The electrochemical composition of a battery alters apply, e.g., to 2-year old and fully charged batteries.
as a result of ageing and utilization. Consequently The data are approximate values and cannot be
every battery loses a proportion of its maximum regarded as guaranteed for every battery, The
capacity in comparison with its new condition. This symbol for a fully charged battery is
loss of capacity is typically irreversible. displayed. See also the "Display of battery charge"
As a result of ageing and utilization of the battery, chapter and the "Technical Data" chapter.
there is a change in the actual maximum operating
time which is displayed by the percentage values in Battery used Minimum Minimum
the battery charge indication. The percentage value (Battery type) operating operating
refers to the currently available operating time of time without time with
batteries which were fully charged before use. operation of a operation of a
GS500 GS500
New batteries Internal battery 22 min 11 min

PS500 120 min 60 min
The following data for minimum operating time
apply to new and fully charged batteries. The
symbol for a fully charged battery is displayed. See NOTE
also the "Display of battery charge" chapter and the A reduction in the capacity of batteries due to
"Technical Data" chapter. Owing to production ageing and utilization is normal. As a greatly
fluctuations during the manufacture of batteries, the simplified approximation, an average linear
operating time can be considerably longer. reduction in capacity can be assumed. The
current individual capacity of a battery depends
Battery used Minimum Minimum on the following factors, among others:
(Battery type) operating operating – Age
time without time with – Utilization (frequency, duration, and power
operation of a operation of a consumption)
GS500 GS500 – Battery charge
Internal battery 30 min 15 min – Ambient temperature
PS500 240 min 120 min

Spent batteries
NOTE
When the internal battery and the batteries in the
PS500 show less than the following residual
operating times, they are considered to be spent.
Battery used Spent with remaining

(Battery type) residual operating time
without operation of a GS500
Internal battery <22 min
PS500 <120 min

Alarm behavior in battery operation
The switch-over of the device to battery operation is the internal battery after the operating time of the
indicated by the Battery activated alarm (see PS500 has elapsed. The switch-over is indicated
chapter "Alarm – Cause – Remedy"). The alarm by the Internal battery activated alarm.
can be acknowledged by the user. Consequently
At the end of the operating time of the internal
the Battery activated alarm will no longer be
battery, the device generates the Battery low
displayed until the mains power supply is re-
alarm. The Battery discharged alarm follows after
established.
that.
When the device is equipped with a PS500 power
These alarms appear at the time specified by the
supply unit, in battery operation the PS500 is
model-based calculation for the particular battery.
discharged first. If the mains power supply has not
been re-established, the device switches over to
Schematic representation of the sequence of alarms
Battery activated
Voltage [V]
Internal battery activated
Battery low
PS500 Internal battery
Battery discharged
Switch-off voltage
Device shuts down
0 60 120 180 240 0 5 10 15 20 25 Time [min]
PS500 operating time Operating time of the internal battery

374
The schematic representation of the sequence of When the voltage drop of the internal battery
alarms with respect to battery utilization is shown in reaches an operationally critical value, a shut-down
an example with a PS500 but without the use of a of the device due to an inadequate supply is
GS500. The representation corresponds to the immediately imminent. In this case the power
operating time of new and fully charged batteries. supply failure alarm sounds.

NOTE
If the device displays the Battery low alarm
message or the Battery discharged alarm
message, connect the device to the mains power
supply.
NOTE
When the remaining calculated operating time is
less than 10 minutes, the model-based Battery
low alarm appears. When the remaining
calculated operating time is less than 5 minutes,
the model-based Battery discharged alarm
appears.
NOTE
The operating time remaining after the
corresponding alarms can be considerably longer
than the specified minimum operating time.
NOTE
When the device is fitted with the GS500 gas
supply unit, the device calculates the time for the
Battery discharged alarm allowing for the power
consumption of a GS500, regardless of whether
the GS500 is activated or not.

Pneumatic functional description
Pneumatic circuit diagram of Evita V300
A 8 B 9 10 11
3 5 7 p 18 F
17 E
27 28
4 6 p CO2
E 20 V 12
2 E E
19
13
23 24 G C 14
Air
26 O2
H E D Insp. Gas
25 21 O2 p V
E Exsp. Gas
I E 16 15 E
22 Nebulizer gas
198
1 Air gas inlet 16 Barometric pressure sensor
2 O2 gas inlet 17 Calibration valve for inspiratory pressure
sensor
3 Air non-return valve
18 Inspiratory pressure sensor
4 O2 non-return valve
19 Calibration valve for expiratory pressure sensor
5 Air metering valve
20 Expiratory pressure sensor
6 O2 metering valve
21 O2 sensor
7 Tank
22 Nebulizer outlet
8 Mixed gas metering valve
23 Air pressure regulator
9 Safety valve
24 O2 pressure regulator
10 Emergency expiratory valve
25 Nebulizer mixer valve
11 Emergency breathing valve
26 Nebulizer changeover valve
12 Patient's lungs
27 CO2 sensor
13 Expiratory valve
28 Neonatal flow sensor (depending on the patient
14 Non-return valve
category)
15 Expiratory Infinity ID flow sensor

A Gas mixture and gas metering assembly spontaneous breathing. The expiratory Infinity ID
flow sensor (D, 15) measures the expiratory flow
B Inspiratory unit assembly
in accordance with the hot-wire anemometry
C Expiratory unit assembly measurement principle. Therefore the measured
flow is a mass flow (NTPD).
D Expiratory Infinity ID flow sensor
The inspiratory unit, expiratory unit, and expiratory
E Barometric pressure sensor
Infinity ID flow sensor assemblies can be detached
F Pressure measurement assembly from Evita V300 for cleaning purposes.
G Calibration assembly The mass flow to volume flow conversion (BTPS)
requires knowledge of the ambient pressure. The
H O2 sensor
ambient pressure is measured with the barometric
I Medication nebulization assembly pressure sensor (E, 16).
The pressure in the breathing system is measured
Description of the pneumatic mode of operation with two independent pressure sensors (18, 20)
that form the pressure measurement assembly
Evita V300 consists of 9 pneumatic assemblies.
(F). The pressure sensors are regularly zero
The gas mixture and dosage assembly (A) calibrated. For this, the pressure sensors are
delivers the time-variable flow of a gas mixture with connected to ambient pressure via the two
adjustable proportions of O2 and air. Gas from the calibration valves (17, 19). The calibration valves
(central) gas supply system enters the device via form the calibration assembly (G).
the gas inlet connections for O2 and air (1, 2). Two
The O2 sensor (H, 21) measures the inspiratory O2
non-return valves (3, 4) prevent one gas from
concentration based on a sidestream
returning to the supply line of the other gas. The
measurement principle. For calibration by the user
mixing of the gases takes place in the tank (7) and
during the device check, the O2 sensor can be
is controlled via two control valves (5, 6). The
flushed with pure O2 from the tank (7).
supplied inspiratory flow is controlled via a third
control valve (8). A pneumatic medication nebulizer can be
connected to the nebulizer gas outlet (22) for
The inspiratory unit assembly (B) consists of the
medication nebulization. Evita V300 provides an
safety valve (9) and two non-return valves (10, 11).
intermittent gas flow consisting of O2 and air to
In normal operation, the safety valve is closed so
drive the medication nebulizer. This ensures that
that the inspiratory flow is supplied to the patient
the deviation of the set O2 concentration remains
(12) from the gas mixture and gas metering
within the specified limits. For this, the gas from the
assembly. During other operating states, e.g., when
two gas inlet connections (1, 2) is throttled by the
Evita V300 is in standby, the safety valve is open
pressure regulators (23, 24). The intermittent gas
and enables spontaneous inspiration through the
delivery is done by nebulizer mixer valve (25). The
emergency breathing valve (11). The emergency
nebulizer changeover valve (26) closes the
expiratory valve (10) provides a second channel for
nebulizer gas outlet when the nebulizer function is
expiration when the expiratory valve (13) is
not switched on.
blocked.
The nebulizer mixer valve, the nebulizer
The expiratory valve assembly (C) consists of the
changeover valve, and the two pressure regulators
expiratory valve (13) and a non-return valve (14).
form the medication nebulization assembly (I).
The expiratory valve is a proportional valve and is
used to adjust the pressure in the breathing The CO2 concentration of the breathing gas can be
system. In conjunction with the spring-loaded valve measured using the CO2 sensor (27). CO2 is
of the emergency air outlet (10), the non-return measured according to an optical measurement
valve (14) prevents pendulum breathing during principle in the mainstream.

An active breathing gas humidifier and a pneumatic

medication nebulizer can also be installed.
Additional information can be found in the chapters
"Assembly and preparation" and "Operation".

Main menu bar structure
The following table lists the buttons of the main buttons are freely configurable and are assigned to
menu bar with the resulting dialog windows of the the respective group. The freely configurable
same name and the tabs. Touching a tab opens the buttons open the corresponding page in the dialog
corresponding page. The dark gray buttons are window or activate a function.
always contained in the main menu bar. The white
Group Button in main menu Horizontal tab Vertical tab Additional tabs
symbol bar
Alarms... Limits
Current alarms
Alarm history
Settings
Alarm volume
Ventilation settings... Modes 1, 2, 3, 4
General settings
Additional settings
Overview
Apnea Ventilation
Trigger/ Termin.
Sigh
AutoFlow/ Volume
Guarantee
ATC
Auto Release
Mode 5
General settings
Additional settings
Overview
Apnea Ventilation
Trigger/ Termin.
Sigh
AutoFlow/ Volume
Guarantee
ATC
Auto Release
Other modes
Trigger
Apnea Ventilation continued next page

symbol bar
Views...
1 2 3
Day/Night
Freeze waveforms
Export screenshot
Main screen
Trends/Data... Trends
Graphics 1
Graphics 2
Table
Values
Customized data
Values 1
Values 2
Settings
Logbook
Export data
Trends table
Values
Logbook
Customized data
Special maneuvers... Maneuvers
Nebulization
Diagnostics
P0.1
PEEPi
NIF
Nebulization
Diagnostics
O2 suction
Man. insp./hold
P0.1
PEEPi
NIF
Exp. hold
Manual disconnection continued next page

symbol bar
Sensors/ Parameters... Neonatal flow
sensor
Flow
O2 sensor
CO2 sensor
Zero calib. on/off
Check sensor
Calibration
Neonatal flow sensor
Flow sensor
O2 sensor
CO2 sensor
System setup... Screen layout
Overview
General settings
Views
Customized data
Config. buttons
Trends graphic 1
Trends graphic 2
Therapy bar
Alarms
Overview
Preset limits
Alarm vol./tone
Ventilation
Overview
Patient category
Modes
Start settings
VT, RR, Trigger
Pressures, O2, I:E
Other settings
ATC
General settings
Maneuver
continued next page

symbol bar
Config. exchange
Applications
System status
Overview
General status
Exchange intervals
System
Overview
Country
Units
Interface
LAN
COM
External display
Supply units
Service
System Information
Operating Data
Options
Service Call
Applications
Help...
Start/ Standby...
Start/Standby
Tube/NIV
Br. circuit/ Humidifier
System check
Overview
Device check
Breathing circ.
check
Check results
Battery check
Accessory status

Factory-set screen views
View 1
FiO2
Waveform Paw
MVe
Waveform Flow
VTe
Waveform Volume
RR
View 2
FiO2
Waveform Paw
MVe
MVespon
VTe
VTespon
Waveform Flow
RR
RRspon
View 3
FiO2
Loop Pressure Volume

TC
C20/Cdyn
R
Cdyn
088_V300

List of references
[1] Meyer, J.: Neue Beatmungsformen.

Anästhesiol. Intensivmed. Notfallmed.
Schmerzther. [New Ventilation Modes.
Anesthesiology. Intensive-Care Medicine.
Emergency Medicine. Pain Therapy.]
26 (1991): 337-342
[2] Vincent, J.-L.: Yearbook of Intensive Care
and Emergency Medicine.
Springer-Verlag, 1993
[3] Stock, M. C., Downs, J. B., Frolicher, D.:
Airway Pressure Release Ventilation.
Critical Care Medicine 15 (1987): 462-466
[4] Räsänen, J., Cane, R. D., Downs, J. B., et
al.: Airway Pressure Release Ventilation
During Acute Lung Injury: A Prospective
Multicenter Trial.
Critical Care Medicine 19 (1991): 1234-1241
[5] Guttmann, W., Eberhard, L., Fabry, B., et al.:
Continuous Calculation of Tracheal Pressure
in Tracheally Intubated Patients.
Anesthesiology 79 (1993): 503-513
[6] Sassoon, C. S., Te, T. T., Mahutte, C. K.,
Light, R. W.: Airway Occlusion Pressure. An
Important Indicator for Successful Weaning
in Patients with Chronic Obstructive
Pulmonary Disease.
Am. Rev. Respir. Dis. 135 (1987): 107-113
[7] Kuhlen, R., Hausmann, S., Pappert, D., et
al.: A New Method for P0.1 Measurement
Using Standard Respiratory Equipment.
Intensive Care Medicine 21 (1995): 554-560
[8] Jubran, A.: Advances in Respiratory
Monitoring During Mechanical Ventilation.
Chest 116 (1999): 1416-1425
[9] Tobin, M. J., Charles, G. A.: Discontinuation
of Mechanical Ventilation.
In: Tobin, M. J.: Principles and Practice of
Mechanical Ventilation. 1177-1206.
McGraw-Hill, 1994.

Index
Index
A AutoFlow
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Switch on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Automatic alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Attaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Automatic leakage compensation . . . . . . . . . 357
Accessories, displaying the status of . . . . . . . . . 93 AutoRelease, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Acoustic alarm, failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Additional buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Additional settings for ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . 101 B
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Bacterial filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Start-up settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Battery
Ventilation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Aeroneb nebulizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Alarm – Cause – Remedy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Battery charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Alarm bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Battery check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Alarm history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Battery concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Alarm limits Battery maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Automatic setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Battery operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Configuring start-up values . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Before reuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Body height/body weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
In event of power failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Body weight, current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Breathing circuit
Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Alarm priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Alarm tone Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Setting the volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Suppressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Alarms Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Acknowledging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 User-defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Current alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Breathing gas humidifier
Displaying causes and remedies . . . . . . . . 144 Attaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Ambient air filter, replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Anti Air Shower Brightness, adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 BTPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Switch on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Apnea ventilation
Auto. Return, switching on or off . . . . . . . . 194 C
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 C20/C, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Switch alarm on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Calibrating the O2 sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Switch on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Checking readiness for operation . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Application mode CO2 cuvette, installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
NIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 CO2 monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Deactivating or activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
ATC
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Switch on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Audio paused . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Index
CO2 sensor E
Check calibration with test filter . . . . . . . . . 170
Check calibration with test gas . . . . . . . . . 171 EMC Declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Dismantling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Environment of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Exchange intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Performing calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Expiratory compensation, switching on or
CO2 zero calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
CO2 zero indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Expiratory hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Coaxial breathing circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Expiratory valve
Color concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Dismantling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Compressed gas cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 260
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Preparing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Configuring alarm settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Replace diaphragm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Configuring units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 External screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Connecting the nurse call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Connection with other electrical equipment . . . . . 9 F
Contraindications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Control and display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 38 Factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Country-specific settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Fisher & Paykel MR 850 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Curve field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Flow / volume measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Curve fields, selecting the display . . . . . . . . . . 108 Flow monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Curves and measured values, displaying . . . . 107 Deactivating or activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Cuvette type, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Flow reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Flow sensor
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
D Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Data export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Flow sensor (Infinity ID)
Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Calibrating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Day and night mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Flow trigger, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
DC power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Freezing waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Front
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Control and display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Device check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Ventilation unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Dialogs windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 G
Disinfection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Display data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Gas supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Displaying data Central gas supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
All measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Hospital-specific data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 From cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Set values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Gas supply unit GS500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Disposable cuvettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 General settings for ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Disposal of the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Graphic trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Index
H M
Header bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Main menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Height above sea level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Main screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
HME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Mains power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Hospital-specific measured values . . . . . . . . . 180 Maneuvers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Humidifier holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Manual disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Manual inspiration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
I Manual ventilation device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Measurement maneuver, description . . . . . . . 351
Illumination adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Measurement principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Import/export of configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 MEDIBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Medication nebulization
Infinity C300 Applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Preparing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Infinity ID breathing circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 79 Medication nebulizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Infinity ID components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Dismantling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Inspiratory hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Preparing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Inspiratory termination Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 159
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Monitoring area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Switch on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Monitoring fields, changing display . . . . . . . . 107
Inspiratory termination criterion . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Instructions for use, observing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 N
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Interfaces, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Negative Inspiratory Force
Intrahospital patient transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Intrinsic PEEP Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Neonatal flow sensor
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Calibrating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Dismantling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
L Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Replacing insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Lateral flaps on the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 New patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Leakage compensation Non-invasive ventilation
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Switch on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
List of references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 NTPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Logbook, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Loops O
Evaluating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Reference loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 O2 monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Deactivating or activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
O2 therapy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Setting O2 and flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Index
Occlusion pressure P0.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 S

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Safety checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Operation display of ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Safety information
Oxygen enrichment for suction maneuver . . . . 113 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Product-specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
P Screen display, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Parameter fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Screen text language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Parameter fields, selecting the display . . . . . . 108 Screen view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 381 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Patient category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Scroll bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Patient monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 14 Selecting a patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Patient safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Patient transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 263
Pmax/Paw high AutoSet Service dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Switch on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Setting ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Pneumatic functional description . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Sigh, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Pneumatic medication nebulizer . . . . . . . 117, 118 Smart Pulmonary View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Power failure alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Spontaneous breathing support . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Sreen view
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Internal battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Start-up settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 189, 192
Mains power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Suction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Power supply unit PS500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Supply units, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Preparing the ventilation unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Surface disinfectants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Pressure-controlled ventilation modes . . . . . . . 99 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Previous patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 System cable
Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Q Fixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Quick access bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 System check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
System overview
GS500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
R Trolley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Range of functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
System status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Rear
Ventilation unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 T
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Reprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Tabular trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Reprocessing list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Reusable cuvettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Test lung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Rotary knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Therapy controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Therapy controls, locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Therapy line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Therapy type, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Therapy, starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Toggle switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Touch screen, calibrating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Index
Trends
Configuring display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Trolley, preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
U
Units of measurement, configuring . . . . . . . . . 201
Universal holder with standard rail . . . . . . . . . . 51
USB storage medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
V
Ventilation functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Ventilation modes
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Ventilation parameters
Exceeding set limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Linked setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 97
Setting directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Configuring import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Transferring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Virus protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Volume Guarantee
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Switch on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Volume-controlled ventilation modes . . . . . . . . . 99



Password for Evita V300 SW 2.n


Cut out from the Evita V300 instructions for use

SW 2.n
To prevent unauthorized adjustments, the following

pages are password-protected: 4572

– System setup > Screen layout > Views
– System setup > Alarms
– System setup > Ventilation
– System setup > Applications
– System setup > Exchange intervals

     
Information on the password
To prevent unauthorized adjustments, the following

pages in the System setup dialog window are
password-protected:
– Screen layout > Views
– Alarms
– Ventilation
– Applications
The password appears on this page of the
instructions for use. Cut out the area with the
password and keep in a place which is safe from
access by unauthorized persons.
If the area with the password has been removed,
ask the person responsible for your device about
making adjustments to the pages specified.



These instructions for use only apply to
Evita V300 SW 2.n
with the Serial No.:
If no Serial No. has been filled in by Dräger,
these instructions for use are provided for
general information only and are not intended for
use with any specific medical device.
These instructions for use are provided for
customer information only and will only be
updated or exchanged upon customer request.
Directive 93/42/EWG Labeling in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC

concerning medical devices on radio equipment
and telecommunications terminal equipment
Manufacturer
Drägerwerk AG & Co. KGaA

Moislinger Allee 53 – 55
D-23542 Lübeck
Germany
+49 451 8 82-0
FAX +49 451 8 82-20 80
http://www.draeger.com
9052995 – GA 6500.320 en
© Drägerwerk AG & Co. KGaA
Edition: 3 – 2016-04
(Edition: 1 – 2011-03)
Dräger reserves the right to make modifications
to the device without prior notice.

Evita v300 Ifu 9052995 en PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Evita v300 Ifu 9052995 en PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Evita v300 Ifu 9052995 en PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

How does the device deliver gas mixtures to the patient?

How does the device deliver gas mixtures to the patient?

What are the components of the inspiratory unit assembly?

What are the components of the inspiratory unit assembly?

Instructions for use

WARNING Intensive care ventilator

1 Consecutive numbers indicate steps of action,

Any text shown on the screen and any labeling on

Schematic renderings of screen images are used,

Dräger uses the term "Accessory" not only for

2 Instructions for use Evita V300 SW 2.n

Trademark Trademark owner Trademark Trademark owner

SmartCare® Virkon® DuPont

Safety information definitions

Instructions for use Evita V300 SW 2.n 3

For this medical device users, service personnel, Service personnel

Users Experts are persons who may carry out repair or

Abbreviations and symbols

For explanations refer to sections "Abbreviations"

4 Instructions for use Evita V300 SW 2.n

Typographical conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Instructions for use Evita V300 SW 2.n 5

Trends and data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Alarm – Cause – Remedy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Principles of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

6 Instructions for use Evita V300 SW 2.n

For your safety and that of your patients

General safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Product-specific safety information . . . . . . . 12

Instructions for use Evita V300 SW 2.n 7

General safety information

The following WARNING and CAUTION Service

8 Instructions for use Evita V300 SW 2.n

Not for use in areas of explosion hazard Device combinations

WARNING This device can be operated in combination with

Instructions for use Evita V300 SW 2.n 9

Connection to IT network CAUTION

The design of the medical device, the

10 Instructions for use Evita V300 SW 2.n

Information on electromagnetic Disposable articles

CAUTION Storing the instructions for use

Instructions for use Evita V300 SW 2.n 11

Training for users is available via the Dräger

Product-specific safety information

12 Instructions for use Evita V300 SW 2.n

Instructions for use Evita V300 SW 2.n 13

CAUTION Monitoring ventilation

Back-up ventilation with an independent

14 Instructions for use Evita V300 SW 2.n

Emission of high-frequency energy

Instructions for use Evita V300 SW 2.n 15

16 Instructions for use Evita V300 SW 2.n

Indications for use and contraindications . . 18

Instructions for use Evita V300 SW 2.n 17

Evita V300 intensive care ventilator is intended for

Indications for use and contraindications

Indications It is the responsibility of the user to select the

18 Instructions for use Evita V300 SW 2.n

Intensive care ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Control and display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21